Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
6161 EL CAMINO REAL; ; AS130009
7/10/24, 11:44 AM AS130009 Permit Data City of Carlsbad Sprinkler Permit 6161 ELCAMINO Job Address: REAL Permit Type: SPRINK Parcel No: 2131002100 Lot #: 0 Reference No.: PC #: Project Title: VIASAT 1.1. Permit No: AS130009 Status: PENDING Applied 1/22/2013 Approved: Issued: Inspector: Applicant: SCHMIDT FIRE PROTECTION CO INC 4760 MURPHY CANYON RD SAN DIEGO, CA 92123 858-279-6122 Owner: LEVINE INVESTMENTS LIMITED PARTNERSHIP 1702 E HIGHLAND AVE #310 PHOENIX AZ L Fees ($) Add'I Fees(s) Total ($) Balance ($) [ 268 0 268 0 about:blank 1/1 ' FIRE ALARM RECORD OF COMPLETION To be completed by the system installation contractor at the time of system acceptance and approval. PROTECTED PROPERTY INFORMATION Name of Property: Viasat Building 2 Address:.-6161-El Ca iñRl, Carls6CA920097 Description of Property: Existing 2-story offices Occupancy type: Type IIB Fully Sprinklered Name of property representative: Viasat - Gerard Tanksley Address: 6161 El Camino Real, Carlsbad, CA 92009 Phone: 760-476-2351 Fax: E-mail: gerard.tanksley@viasat.com Authority having jurisdiction over this property: CARLSBAD FIRE DEPT. Phone: 760-602-4665 Fax: 760-602-8561 E-mail: 2. FIRE ALARM SYSTEM INSTALLATION, SERVICE, AND TESTING INFORMATION Installation contractor for this equipment: SCHMIDT FIRE PROTECTION CO., INC. Address: 4760 MURPHY CANYON RD., SAN DIEGO, CA 92123 Phone: 858-279-6122 Fax: 858-279-3583 E-mail: JAMES @ SCHMI DTFI REPROli Service organization for this equipment: SCHMIDT FIRE PROTECTION CO., INC. Address: 4760 MURPHY CANYON RD., SAN DIEGO, CA 92123 Phone: 858-279-6122 Fax: 858-279-3583 E-mail: JAMES@SCHMIDTFIREPRO Location of as-built drawing: ONSITE Location of historical test reports:ONSITE Location of system operation and maintenance manuals: ONSITE A contract for test and inspection in accordance with NFPA standards in effect as of Contracted testing company: Address: Phone: Fax: E-mail: Contract expires: Contract Number: Frequency of routine inspections: 3 TYPE OF FIRE,.ALRM SYSTEM OR SERVICE NFPA 72,2W6hapter Reference of System Type: Central Station Monitoring Name of organization receiving alarm signals with phone numbers (if applicable): Alarm: Tyco Integrated Security (ADT) Phone: 800-997-6502 Supervisory: Phone: Trouble: Phone: Entity to which alarms are retransmitted: Fire Dept. North COfj Phone: 858-756-1126 Method of retransmission of alarms to that organization or location: phone If Chapter 8, note the means of transmission from protected premises to the central station: o Digital alarm communicator 0 McCulloh 0 Multiplex 02-way radio 0 1-way radio ON/A If Chapter 9, note the type of connection: 0 Local energy 0 Shunt 0 N/A 3.1 System Software Operating system (executive) software revision level: Site-specific software revision date: Revision completed by: 4. SIGNALING LINE CIRCUITS Characteristics of siqnallng line circuits connected to this system (see NFPA 72, 2007, Table 6.6. 1).- Quantity: Style: 6 Class: A 1 of ALARM-INITIATING DEVICES AND CURCUITS Characteristics of initiating device circuits connected to this system (see NFPA 72, 2007 Table 6.5): Quantity: Style: Class: 5.1 Manual Initiating Devices 5.1.1 Manual Pull Stations Number of manual pull stations: 1 Type of devices: 0 Addressable El Conventional 0 Coded 0 Transmitter 0 N/A 5.2 Automatic Initiating Devices 5.2.1 Area Smoke Detectors Number of smoke detectors: 1 Type of coverage: El Complete area El Partial area 0 No required partial area 0 N/A Type of devices: o Addressable El Conventional 0 Coded 0 Transmitter 0 N/A Type of smoke detector sensing technology: 0 Ionization El Photoelectric 5.2.2 Duct Smoke Detectors Number of Duct smoke detectors: Type of coverage: Type of devices: 0 Addressable 0 Conventional 0 Coded 0 Transmitter 0 N/A Type of smoke detector sensing technology: 0 Ionization 0 Photoelectric 5.2.3 Heat Detectors Number of Heat detectors: Type of coverage: El Complete area 0 Partial area 0 No required partial area 0 N/A Type of devices: 0 Addressable El Conventional 0 Coded 0 Transmitter 0 N/A 5.2.4 Sprinkler Waterf low Detectors Number of waterfiow detectors: Type of devices: 0 Addressable El Conventional 0 Coded 0 Transmitter 0 N/A 5.2.5 Alarm Verification Number of devices subject to alarm verification: Alarm verification on this system is: 0 Enabled 0 Disabled 0 Set for seconds SUPERVISORY SIGNAL-INITIATING DEVICES AND CURCUITS 6.1 Sprinkler System Number of valve supervisory switches: 2 Type of devices: 0 Addressable El Conventional 0 Coded 0 Transmitter 0 N/A 6.2 Fire Pump Type of fire pump: 0 Electric 0 Diesel Type of fire pump supervisory devices: 0 Addressable 0 Conventional 0 Coded 0 Transmitter [I N/A Fire Pump Functions Supervised O Fire pump power 0 Fire pump running 0 Fire pump phase reversa 0 Selector switch not in auto O Engine or control panel trouble 0 Low fuel Other: 6.3 Engine-Driven Generator Type of generator supervisory devices: 0 Addressable 0 Conventional 0 Coded 0 Transmitter 0 N/A Other: - 2 of ANNUNCIATORS 1.1 Annunciators 1 0 Local 0 Remote Type: 0 Addressable 0 Directory 0 Graphic 0 N/A Location: 7.2 Annunciators 2 0 Local 0 Remote Type: 0 Addressable 0 Directory 0 Graphic 0 N/A Location: 7.3 Annunciators 3 0 Local 0 Remote Type: 0 Addressable 0 Directory 0 Graphic 0 N/A Location: ALARM NOTIFICATION DEVICES AND CURCUITS 8.1 Emergency Voice Alarm Service Number of single voice alarm channels: Number of Multiple voice alarm channels: Number of speakers: Number of speaker zones: 8.2 Telephone Jacks Number of telephone jacks installed: Number of telephone handsets stored on site: Type of telephone system installed: 0 Electrically powered 0 Sound powered 0 N/A 8.3 Nonvoice Audible System Characteristics of notification device circuits connected to this system (see NFPA 72, 2007, Table 6.5) Quantity: 2 Style: E Class: A 8.4 Types and Quantities of Nonvoice Notification Appliances Installed Bells: 1 With visual devices: 0 Horns: 1 With visual devices: 0 Chimes: With visual devices: Visual devices without audible devices: Other: (describe): EMERGENCY CONTROL FUNCTIONS ACTIVATED Hold-open door releasing devices 0 Smoke management or smoke control Door unlocking 0 Elevator recall 0 Other 10. SYSTEM POWER SUPPLY 10.1 Primary Power Nominal Voltage 12v Amps 20amp Overcurrent protection: Type: Amps Location (of primary supply panelboard): Janitors Closet Potter PFC4410 Panel Disconnecting means location: n/a - inside panel 10.2 Secondary Power Location: In panel Type: batteries Nominal voltage 12v Current rating: 7ah Number of standby batteries: 2 Amp hours rating: Location of emergency generator: Location of fuel storage: Calculated capacity of secondary power to drive the system In standby mode: 3.24108 In alarm mode: .060685 3 of 11. RECORD OF SYSTEM INSTALLATION Fill out after all installation is complete and wiring has been checked for opens, shotis, ground faults, and improper branching, but before conducting operational acceptance tests. The system has been installed in accordance with the following NFPA standards: (Note all that apply.) NFPA 72;-29 'a 0 NFPA 70, National Electrical Code, Article 760 Manufacturers published instructions D Other (please specify): NFPA 13 System deviations from referenced NFPA standards: Signed: Printed name: Date: Organization: Title: Phone: 12. RECORD OF SYSTEM OPERATION All operational features and functions of this system were tested by or in the presence of the signer shown below. On the date shown below, and were found lobe operating properly in accordance with the requirements o/. E1 NFPA 72, 2ee- 0 NFPA 70, National Electrical Code, Article 760 D Manufacturers published instructions 0 Other (please specify): NFPA 13 Documentation in accordance with Inspection and Testing Form (NFPA 72, 2007 Figure 10.6.2.3) is attached Signed: Printed name: Date: Organization: Title: Phone: 13. CERTIFICATIONS AND APPROVALS 13.1 System Installation Contractor This syst ecified r n as 'nstalled and tested according to all NFPA standards cited herein. Signed: . Printed name: PAUL MOFFAT Date: 02/28/13 Organ' z ion: qQ4Al6T FIRE PROTECTh Title: PROJECT MANAGER Phone: 8582796122 13.2 System Service Contractor This system as specified herein has been installed and tested according to all NFPA standards cited herein. Signed: Printed name: Date: Organization: Title: Phone: 13.3 Central Station This system as specified herein has will be monitored according to all NFPA standards cited herein. Signed: Printed name: Date: izat ion: Title: Phone: Pro en inst ed and tested to its s ecifications and all NFPA standards cit d her n. Printed name: cRMb 1rt.4SA( Date: 'Z.f2 2 3 Signed Print Orga OIL, _VIA, Title: 'p4 1- Phone:O,tt4270, 13.1 Authority Having Jurisdiction I have witnessed a satisfactory acceptance test of this system and find it to be installed and operating properly in accordance with its approved plans and specifications, its approved sequence of operations, and with all NFPA standards cite'l herein. __ Printed name: Date: aby)/6 Signed: ___ ___ Title: Phone: Organization: C 4 of 4 A chmidt Fire Protection Ca,, Inc. -u 4760 MURPHY CANYON RD • SAN DIEGO, CA 92123 • (858) 279-6122 • FAx (858) 279-3583 VIASAT 6161 EL CAMINO REAL CARLSBAD, CA 92009 SUBMITTAL PACKAGE . (1) PREACTION FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM FILE COPY I1E A _ VP Schmidt Fire Protection Co., Inc. U 416OMJFIffCON ROAD -SN DIEGO, C1JFO123(61P)279.6I22 Schmidt Fire Protection Co. 4760 Murphy Canyon Rd. San Diego, CA 92123 (858) 279-6122 Job Name : \iasat Building Location 6161 El Camino Real System : I Contract : SFP-852 Data File 852-Viasat.WXF 0 r It ter Programs by Hydratec Inc. Route 111 Windham N.H. USA 03087 Schmidt Fire Protection Co. Page 1 Viasat Date 01-10-13 HYDRAULIC CALCULATIONS for Project name: Viasat Location: 6161 El Camino Real Drawing no: Date: 1-10-13 Design Remote area number: 1 Remote area location: Preaction Occupancy classification: Ordinary Group I Density: .15-Gpm/SqFt Area of application: 527 - SqFt Coverage per sprinkler: 120 - SqFt Type of sprinklers calculated: 1/2" 5.6k 200 Degree No. of sprinklers calculated: 7 In-rack demand: - GPM Hose streams: 250 - GPM Total water required (including hose streams): 382.77 -GPM © 66.398 - Psi Type of system: Preaction Fire Sprinkler Volume of dry orpreactlon system: 16.7035 - Gal Water supply information Date: 6-26-2012 Location: 6155 El Camino Real Source: Carlsbad Fire Dept. Name of contractor: Schmidt Fire Protection Co. Address: 4760 Murphy Canyon Rd. I I San Diego, CA 92123 Phone number 858-279-6122 Name of designer: Chandra O'Neal Authority having Jurisdiction: Carlsbad Fire Dept. Notes: (Include peaking Information or gridded systems here.) Tie into existing 1-112" Grid Computer Programs by Hydratec Inc. Route 111 Windham N.H. USA 03087 Water Supply Curve (C) Schmidt Fire Protection Co. Page 2 Viasat Date 01-10-13 City Water Suppy: Demand: Cl - Static Pressure : 90 Dl - Elevation : 5.017 C2 - Residual Pressure: 85 D2 - System Flow : 132.766 C2 - Residual Flow : 1423.77 . 1)2 - System Pressure : 66.398 Hose(Adj City) Hose ( Demand) : 250 D3 - System Demand : 382.768 Safety Margin : 23.182 150 140 130 p120 R° Cl ____________ E100 ___________ Q90 - ___ _____ ______ _______ C2 -0-- S 80 U 70 R60 E5° 40 30 - - 20 10 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 FLOW(NA 1.85) Computer Programs by Hydratec ii Thute 111 \Mndham N.H. USA 03087 Fittinç '',.ed Summary Schmidt Fire Protection Co. Page Viasat Date 01-10-13 Fitting Legend Abbrev. Name % % 1 1% 1% 2 21A 3 3% 4 5 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 24 B NFPA 13 Butterfly Valve 0 0 0 0 0 6 7 10 0 12 9 10 12 19 21 0 0 0 0 0 E NFPA 13 90 Standard Elbow 1 2 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 12 14 18 22 27 35 40 45 50 81 G NFPA 13 Gabe Valve 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 2 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 11 13 90'Grvd-Vic Elbow #lO 0 0 2 3 4 3.5 6 5 8 7 8.5 10 13 17 20 23 25 33 36 40 L NFPA 13 Long Turn Elbow 0.5 1 2 2 2 3 4 5 5 6 8 9 13 16 18 24 27 30 34 40 S NFPA 13 Swing Check Valve 4 5 5 7 9 11 14 16 19 22 27 32 45 55 65 76 87 96 109 130 T NFPA 13 90 Flow thru Tee 3 4 5 6 8 10 12 15 17 20 25 30 35 50 60 71 81 91 101 121 Zwd Watts 709DCDA Fitting generates a Fixed Loss Based on Row Units Summary Diameter Units Length Units Flow Units Pressure Units Inches Feet US Gallons per Minute Pounds per Square Inch Computer Programs by Hydratec Inc. Route 111 Windham N.H. USA 03087 Pressure I Flow Summary - STANDARD Schmidt Fire Protection Co. Page 4 Viasat Date 01-10-13 Node Elevation K-Fact Pt Pn Flow Density Area Press No Actual Actual Req. 1 8.583 5.6 11.16 no 18.71 0.15 120 7.0 2 8.583 5.6 10.33 no 18.0 0.15 120 7.0 3 8.583 5.6 10.93 no 18.52 0.15 120 7.0 4 8.583 5.6 11.1 no 18.66 0.15 120 7.0 3A 14.083 11.44 no 4A 14.083 11.65 no 8 14.083 11.9 no 5 8.333 5.6 12.5 no 19.8 0.15 80 7.0 6 8.333 5.6 11.81 no 19.24 0.15 100 7.0 7 8.333 5.6 12.55 no 19.84 0.15 100 7.0 7A 14,083 12.11 no 9 14.083 13.1 na 8A 13.583 13.66 no 9A 13.583 14.33 no 10 13.583 20.3 no 11 2.0 32.46 no 12 13.583 31.94 no 14 13.583 48.14 no 15 13.583 48.11 no 16 13.583 47.97 no 13 13.583 33.78 no 17 13.583 48.24 no 18 13.583 48.36 no 19 13.583 48.39 no 20 13.583 49.98 na 21 13.583 49.98 no 22 13.583 49.99 no 26 13.583 50.05 no 23 13.583 50.04 no 24 13.583 50.04 no TOR 13.583 50.07 no 100.0 BOR 0.5 55.86 no UGI -3.0 57.39 no BF1 -3.0 57.41 na 150.0 BF2 -3,0 65.45 na UG2 -3.0 65.6 no SRC -3.0 66.4 no The maximum velocity is 12.89 and it occurs in the pipe between nodes 9A and 10 Computer Programs by Hydratec Inc. Route 111 Windham N.H. USA 03087 Final Calculations - Hazen-Williams Schmidt Fire Protection Co. Page 5 Viasat Date 01-10-13 - Id. Qa Dia. Fitting Pipe Pt Pt of. "C" or Ftng's Pe Pv Notes ioint Qt Pf/Ft Eqv. Ln. Total Pf Pn 1 18.71 1.049 5E 10.0 17.167 11.160 K Factor 5.60 to 120.0 0.0 10.000 -2.382 8 18.71 0.1150 0.0 27.167 3.124 Vet = 6.95 0.0 18.71 11.902 K Factor = 5.42 2 18.00 1.049 4E 8.0 19.583 10.332 KFactor = 5.60 to 120.0 IT 5.0 13.000 -2.382 3A 18.0 0.1071 0.0 32.583 3.489 Vet = 6.68 0.0 18.00 11.439 KFactor = 5.32 3 18.52 1.049 3E 6.0 9.583 10.934 K Factor 5.60 to 3A 18.52 120.0 0.1128 21 10.0 0.0 16.000 25.583 -2.382 2.887 Vel = 6.88 0.0 18.52 11.439 KFactor= 5.48 4 18.66 1.049 3E 6.0 9.583 11.101 K Factor =5.60 to 4A 18.66 120.0 0.1145 2T 10.0 0.0 16.000 25.583. -2.382 2.928 Vel = 6.93 0.0 18.66 11.647 K Factor = 5.47 A 36.52 1.38 0.0 2.000 11.439 120.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 4A 36.52 0.1040 0.0 2.000 0.208 Vel = 7.83 4A 18.66 1.61 0.0 2.417 11.647 to 120.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 8 55.18 0.1055 0.0 2.417 0.255 Vel = 8.70 8 18.70 1.61 IT 80 0.500 11.902 to 120.0 0.0 8.000 0.217 8A 73.88 0.1812 0.0 8.500 1.540 Vel = 11.64 0.0 73.88 13.659 K Factor = 19.99 5 19.80 1.049 3E 6.0 13.167 12.504 K Factor = 5.60 to 120.0 IT 5.0 11.000 -2.490 9 19.8 0.1278 0.0 24.167 3.088 Vel = 7.35 0.0 19.80 13,102 K Factor = 5.47 6 19.24 1.049 3E 6.0 17.000 11.810 K Factor = 5.60 to 120.0 0.0 6.000 -2.490 7A 19.24 0.1212 0.0 23.000 2.787 Vet = 7.14 0.0 19.24 12.107 KFactor 5.53 7 19.84 1.049 2E 4.0 7.000 12.546 K Factor = 5.60 to 120.0 IT 5.0 9.000 -2.490 7A 19.84 0.1282 0.0 16.000 2.051 Vel = 7.37 7A 19.24 1.38 IT 6.0 2.417 12.107 to 120.0 0.0 6.000 0.0 39.08 0.1182 0.0 8.417 0.995 Val = 8.38 Computer Programs by Hydratec Inc. Route 111 Windham N.H. USA 03087 Final Calculations - Hazen-Williams Schmidt Fire Protection Co. Page 6 Viasat Date 01-10-13 Hyd. Qa Die. Fitting Pipe Pt Pt Ref. "C" or Ftng's Pe Pv Notes Point at Pf/Ft Eqv. Ln. Total Pf Pn 9 19.80 1.61 IT 8.0 0.500 13.102 to 120.0 0.0 8.000 0.217 9A 58.88 0.1189 0.0 8.500 1.011 Vel= 9.28 0.0 58.88 14.330 KFactor= 15.55 8A 73.88 2.067 0.0 12.500 13.659 to 120.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 9A 73.88 0.0537 0.0 12.500 0.671 Vel = 7.06 9A 58.89 2.067 31 10.5 27.083 14.330 to 120.0 0.0 10.500 0.0 10 132.77 0.1587 0.0 37.583 5.966 VeI= 12.69 10 0.0 2.067 lB 6.0 11.000 20.296 to 120.0 lEqI 28.0 34.000 5.017 11 132.77 0.1587 0.0 45.000 7.142 Vel = 12.69 11 0.0 2.157 1 7.384 14.583 32.455 to 120.0 31 12.922 20.306 -5.017 12 132.77 0.1290 0.0 34.889 4.501 Vel = 11.66 12 0.0 2.157 IT 12.307 2.000 31.939 to 120.0 0.0 12.307 0.0 13 132.77 0.1290 0.0 14.307 1.845 Vel = 11.66 0.0 132.77 33.784 KFactor 22.84 14 15.06 1.728 IT 11.29 260.000 48.141 to 120.0 0.0 11.290 0.0 20 15.06 0.0068 0.0 271.290 1.839 Vel = 2.06 0.0 15.06 49.980 KFactor 2.13 15 15.22 1.728 IT 11.29 260.000 - 48.108 to 120.0 0.0 11.290 0.0 21 15.22 0.0069 0.0 271.290 1.873 Vel = 2.08 0.0 15.22 49.981 KFactor = 2.15 16 -73.70 1.728 0.0 111.000 47.972 to 120.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 13 -73.7 -0.1278 0.0 111.000 -14.188 Vel 10.08 13 132.77 1.728 41 22.58 157.000 33.784 to 120.0 IT 11.29 33.870 0.0 22 59.07 0.0849 0.0 190.870 16.202 Vel = 8.08 0.0 59.07 49.986 KFactor= 8.35 17 14.91 1.728 IT 11.29 260.000 48.237 to 120.0 0.0 11.290 0.0 23 14.91 0.0066 0.0 271.290 1.803 Vel = 2.04 0.0 14.91 50.040 K Factor = 2.11 18 14.33 1.728 IT 11.29 260.000 48.359 to 120.0 0.0 11.290 0.0 24 14.33 0.0062 0.0 271.290 1.677 VeI= 1.96 Computer Programs by Hydratec Inc. Route 111 Windham N.H. USA 03087 Final Calculations - Hazen-Williams Schmidt Fire Protection Co. Page 7 Viasat Date 01-10-13 yd. Qa Dia. Fitting Pipe Pt Pt of. "C" or Ftng's Pe Pv *** Notes Point Qt Pf/Ft Eqv. Ln. Total Pf Pn 0.0 14.33 50.036 K Factor = 2.03 19 14.17 1.728 IT 11.29 260.000 48.392 to 120.0 0.0 11.290 5.883 25 14.17 0.0061 0.0 271.290 1.642 Vel = 1.94 0.0 14.17 55.917 KFactor = 1.89 14 -15.06 2.203 0.0 16.000 48.141 to 120.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 15 -15,06 -0.0021 0.0 16.000 -0.033 Vel = 1.27 15 -15.22 2.203 0.0 18.000 48.108 to 120.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 16 -30.28 -0.0076 0.0 18.000 -0.136 Vel = 2.55 16 73.70 2.203 0.0 16.000 47.972 to 120.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 17 43.42 0.0147 0.0 18.000 0.265 Vel = 3.65 17 -14.91 2.203 0.0 18.000 48.237 to 120.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 18 28.51 0.0068 0.0 18.000 0.122 Vel = 2.40 18 -14.34 2.203 0.0 18.000 48.359 120.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 9 14.17 0.0018 0.0 18.000 0.033 Vel = 1.19 0.0 14.17 48.392 KFactor = 2.04 20 15.06 4.31 0.0 16.000 49.980 to 120.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 21 15.06 0.0001 0.0 16.000 0.001 Vel = 0.33 21 15.22 4.31 0.0 17.000 49.981 to 120.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 22 30.28 0.0003 0.0 17.000 0.005 Vel = 0.67 22 59.07 4.31 IT 27.874 2.167 49.986 to 120.0 0.0 27.874 0.0 26 89.35 0.0021 0.0 30.041 0.064 Vel = 1.96 26 -132.77 4.31 0.0 16.833 50.050 to 120.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 23 43.42 -0.0006 0.0 16.833 -0.010 Vel = 0.95 23 14.91 4.31 0.0 18.000 50.040 to 120.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 24 -28.51 -0.0002 0.0 18.000 -0.004 Vel = 0.63 24 14.34 4.31 0.0 18.000 50.036 to 120.0 0.0 0.0 5.883 25 -14.17 -0.0001 0.0 18.000 -0.002 Vel = 0.31 0.0 -14.17 55.917 KFactor -1.89 26 132.77 6.357 - Il 12.573 18.000 50.050 to 120.0 0.0 12.573 0.0 OR 132.77 0.0007 0.0 30.573 0.020 Vel= 1.34 Computer Programs by Hydratec Inc. Route 111 Windham N.H. USA • 03087 Final Calculations - Hazen-Williams Schmidt Fire Protection Co. Page 8 Viasat Date 01-10-13 Hyd. Oa Dia. Fitting Pipe Pt Pt Ref. "C' or Ftng's Pe Pv Notes Point Qt PfIFt Eqv. Ln. Total Pf Pn TOR 100.00 6.357 lB 12.573 13.000 50.070 Qa= 100 to 120.0 IS 40.235 52.808 5.666 BOR 232.77 0.0019 0.0 65.808 0.125 Vel = 2.35 BOR 0.0 8.27 IL 20.56 10.500 55.861 to 140.0 0.0 20.560 1.516 UGI 232.77 0.0004 0.0 31.060 0.012 Vel = 1.39 UGI 0.0 6.044 IL 20.411, 40.000 57.389 to 150.0 0.0 20.411 0.0 BFI 232.77 0.0004 0.0 60.411 . 0.024 VeI= 1.47 BFI 150.00 8.27 lZwd 0.0 10.000 57.413 Qa = 150 to 140.0 0.0 0.0 8.028 * Fixed loss = 8.028 BF2 382,77 0.0010 0.0 10.000 0.010 Vel = 2.29 BF2 0.0 8.044 'ii 20.411 70.000 65.451 to 150.0 IT 54.952 75.362 0.0 UG2 382.77 0.0010 0.0 145.362 0.145 Vel= 2.42 UG2 0.0 8.044 1 6.28 800.000 65.596 to 150.0 0.0 6.280 0.0 SRC 382.77 0.0010 0.0 806.280 0.802 Vel = 2.42 0.0 382.77 66.398 K Factor = 46.97 Computer Programs by Hydratec Inc. Route 111 Windham N.H. USA 03087 7-04-'9 7.;19 FROM-A&D Fire Sprir)Uer 1-619-448-1265 1-871 P03/6 F-985 DA. 26O.12 j.E;4O AM: : PORT SIZE cT)T READING! 72..E DISCHARGE COEFFICIENT QSocsd2 .P MIere... .41stharge od .:theffitiflUPIcal..tS.:O: depeflding.:b.hYdr3t.tYP d= out atWnDter (2W in our case) P= pft pM*~k~~!Aed duling nGwte* (72 PSI) 171GPM RESULTS... RESIDUAL 95PI .FLN: 142.77GPM 07-04-'9 07:19 FROM-&D Fire Sprinklers 1-619-442-:1255 T-871.. PB2/006 F-95 Carlsbad Municipal \faer District Potable Water Discharge Event Report Date: .• 7//il £. Location CM4 L(O (2L P40 e=- Reason for Discharge Event Q1L/ f)1r1 Typ.:Of Eflt .Ih1tIat Dewatering Water Mains t't! Estimated Discharge Fkv GP Nóte lndude flow Lestkta iithn . MO Start Time ., Dewaterina .:UeU:bjsclrge Jthk End'1fli Clear Ilow path of debris, aurfaee Pre-Dechiorinafton Residual Q contaminants and/or hazardous matenals Do not remove nattve Post-Iechktnatloi Residual vegetation (Less than 01 m& 4 erosion control1 I a sendbags silt fencing, hay bale&. gravel bags decreasing the V1Ocdy. .O$ed water. . $/k. un nng ccefioflodowat ensure that The how 'ath is free of afi temporary erosion .......... WerS...inphrforrned Couments__________ SUbtedby .....Re.:inwed ........&Dat tqC- a /fire & Building I Products Technical Services: Tel: (800) 381-9312/ Fax: (800) 791-5500 Preaction System with Model DV-5 Deluge Valve Single Interlock, Supervised - Electric Actuation 1-1/2 thru 8 Inch (DN40 thru DN200) General Description The Model DV-5 Supervised Single In- terlock Preaction System with Electric Actuation (Fig. 1) utilizes automatic sprinklers and a supplemental detec- tion system. The supplemental detec- tion system is typically comprised of 24 VDC heat detectors, smoke detec- tors, manual pull stations, etc. Actua- tion of the detection system automat- ically operates (releases) the Model DV-5 Deluge Valve, allowing water to flow into the sprinkler piping system and to be discharged from any sprin- klers that may be open. In accordance with the requirements of the National Fire Protection Asso- ciation, a preaction system employing more than 20 automatic sprinklers is to have the sprinkler piping automatically supervised to monitor the overall in- tegrity of the system. In the case of a Supervised Single Interlock Preaction System, a Riser Check Valve (that does not require the use of priming water) provides an air check so that the system can be automatically pres- surized with a nominal supervisory air or nitrogen pressure of 10 psi (0,69 bar). A supervisory low pressure alarm switch that is set to transfer its contacts at nominally 5 psi (0,34 bar), on de- creasing pressure, is utilized to indi- cate whether there are any abnormal leaks in the sprinkler system piping. Loss of air pressure from the system as a result of a damaged sprinkler or broken piping will not cause the DV-5 Valve to open - the air pressure is for supervisory alarm only. Typically, the system designer selects the detection components for a single interlock preaction system that will re- spond to a fire sooner than the auto- matic sprinklers. Consequently, the system will experience a minimal delay in water delivery over that for a wet pipe sprinkler system because the system will have begun to fill with water before a sprinkler operates. Supervised single interlock preaction systems are generally used to protect areas where there is danger of serious water damage that might result from damaged automatic sprinklers or pip- ing. Typically, such areas include com- puter rooms, storage areas for valu- able artifacts, libraries, and archives. Single interlock preaction systems are also effectively used to protect proper- ties where a pre-alarm of a possible fire condition may allow time for fire extinguishment by alternate suppres- sion means, prior to a sprinkler dis- charge. In the event the fire cannot otherwise be extinguished, the preac- tion sprinkler system will then perform as the primary fire protection system. The Model DV-5 Deluge Valve (de- scribed in Technical Data Sheet TFP1305) is a diaphragm style valve that depends upon water pressure in the Diaphragm Chamber to hold the Diaphragm closed against the water supply pressure. When the DV-5 Valve is set for service, the Diaphragm (TEXT CONTINUED ON PAGE 9) Page 1 of 14 SEPTEMBER, 2004 TFPI420 Page 2 of 14 TFPI42O f 1 - Model DV-5 Deluge Valve 2 - Main Control Valve (N.O.) 3 - Diaphragm Chamber Supply Control Valve (NO.) 4 - Local Manual Control Station 5 - Automatic Sprinklers 6 - Heat Detectors, Smoke Detectors, etc. (Fire Detection) 7 - Water Supply Pressure Gauge 8 - Diaphragm Chamber Pressure Gauge 9 - System Drain Valve (N.C.) 10 - Main Drain Valve (N.C.) (Shown at Rear of Valve) 11 - Diaphragm Chamber Automatic Shut-Off Valve Waterf low Pressure Alarm Switch (Shown at Rear of Valve) Water Motor Alarm (Optional) Solenoid Valve Deluge Valve Releasing Panel Riser Check Valve Supervisory Air Pressure Gauge Automatic Supervisory Air/Nitrogen Supply Supervisory Low Pressure Alarm Switch FIGURE 1— PART 1OF2 SUPERVISED SINGLE INTERLOCK PREACTION SYSTEM WITH ELECTRIC ACTUATION - SYSTEM SCHEMATIC (Front View) - TFPI420 Page 3of 14 1 - Model DV-5 Deluge Valve 2 - Main Control Valve (NO.) 3 - Diaphragm Chamber Supply Control Valve (NO.) 4 - Local Manual Control Station (Shown at Front of Valve) 5 - Automatic Sprinklers 6 - Heat Detectors, Smoke Detectors, etc. (Fire Detection) 7 - Water Supply Pressure Gauge (Shown at Front of Valve) T 8 - Diaphragm Chamber Pressure Gauge (Shown at Front of Valve) 9 - System Drain Valve (N.C.) 10 - Main Drain Valve (NC.) 11 - Diaphragm Chamber Automatic Shut-Oft Valve Waterflow Pressure Alarm Switch Water Motor Alarm (Optional) Solenoid Valve Deluge Valve Releasing Panel Riser Check Valve Supervisory Air Pressure Gauge (Shown at Front of Valve) Automatic Supervisory Air/Nitrogen Supply Supervisory Low Pressure Alarm Switch FIGURE 1— PART 2 0F2 SUPERVISED SINGLE INTERLOCK PREACTION SYSTEM WITH ELECTRIC ACTUATION - SYSTEM SCHEMATIC (Rear View) - NO. DESCRIPTION QTY PIN 1 300 pail 2000 kPa Water Pressure Gauge .2 92-343-1-005 2 1/4 Gauge Test Valve . 1 46-005-1-002 3 Model MC-1 Manual Control Station .........1 52-289-2-001 4 Model AD-1 Automatic Drain Valve ...........1 52-793-2-004 5 Automatic Shut-Off Valve, Model ASV-1 ..........1 92-343-1-021 6 Waterflow Pressure Alarm Switch (PS10-2A) .1 2571 7 1/2 Bat Valve .........2 46-050-1-004 8 1/2 Spring Loaded Check Valve ..........1 92-322-1-002 9 1/2' Y-Strainer .........1 52-353-1-005 10 3/4" Swing Check Valve .1 46-049-1-005 11 3/4" Angle Valve .......1 46-048-1-005 12 Drip Funnel Connector .. 1 92-211-1-005 13 Drip Funnel Bracket .. 1 92-211-1-003 14 Drip Funnel ...........1 92-343-1-007 15 3/32' Vent Fitting .......1 92-032-1-002 16 1/4' x 18' Tubing .......1 CH 17 1/2' Tubing Connector - 1 CH 18 1/2 x 12° Tubing .......I CH NO. DESCRIPTION QTY. P/N 19 1/4' Plug .............. 1 CH 20 3/4' Plug..............1 CH 21 1/2' Union ............5 CH 22 3/4" Union ............1 CH 23 1/4' 90° Elbow .........1 CH 24 1/2'90* Elbow .........7 CH 25 3/4'90° Elbow .........1 CH 26 3/4' x 1/2' 901 Elbow.... 1 CH 27 112' Tee .............:3 CH 28 1/2" x 1/4' x 1/2" Tee ....3 CH 29 3/4" Tee ..............1 CH 30 3/4' x 1/2' x 3/4" Tee ....2 CH 31 1/4' x Close Nipple .....2 CH 32 1/2' x Close Nipple .....3 CH 33 1/2"x1-1/2"Nipple .....11 CH 34 1/2"x 2" Nipple ........1 CH 35 112"x2-1/2"Nipple .....3 CH 36 1/2" x 5" Nipple ........2 CH 37 1/2'x7'Nipple ........1 CH 38 Select Nipple per Table . 2 CH 39 Select Nipple per Table .2 CH 40 314"xl-112"Nipple .....6 CH 41 3/4"x2'Nipple ........1 CH 42 3/4°x4"Nipple ........1 CH P5 NO. DESCRIPTION QTY. P/N P1 250 psi! 1750kPa Air Pressure Gauge .....1 92-343-1-012 P2 1/4 Gauge Test Valve . - 1 46-005-1-002 P3 Low Air Pressure Alarm Switch (PS10-2A) ......1 2571 P4 1/4" Pressure Relief Valve ................1 92-343-1-019 P5 1/2" Swing Check Valve .1 46-049-1-004 P6 1/2" Globe Valve .......1 46-047-1-004 P7 3/4" Angle Valve ........1 46-048-1-007 P8 1/4" Plug..............3 CH P9 1/2" x 1/4° Reducing Bushing ..............1 CH P10 1/2" Union ............1 CH P11 1/2"90°Elbow .........1 CH P12 1/2" Cross ............1 CH P13 1/2"xl/2"xl/4'Tee ....1 CH P14 1" x 3/4" x 1/2" Tee .....1 CH P15 1/4"x3' Nipple ........1 CH P16 1/2" x 1-1/2' Nipple .....5 CH P17 1/2"x2-1/2" Nipple .....1 CH P18 3/4" x 1-1/2' Nipple .....1 CH P19 1"x2' Nipple ..........1 CH El Solenoid Valve Per Data Ordered Sheet TFP2180 .......1 Separately E2 1/2" Tubing Connector 1 CH E3 1/2" x24° Tubing .......1 A 'f101-'., I CH 111.4 P4 Page 4 of 14 TFPI 420 Pit 161;P10 ,-,' ,"w ..... Pi P16 P13 P9 P16 P15 P6 15 1 P12 26 (GREEN 40 TINT) 16 P2 P17 33 ro P7 P19 - Ell 27 (ORDERED 1 29 12 E3 SEPARATELY) , E4 22 P8 13 E4 40 14 21 40' 33 10 27 36 21 32 39 40 P8'i 24 40 40 35 24 24 30 B 25 RISER 27 CHECK 33 32 ii 42 VALVE 33 28 ,-7 (NOTE 2) 37 35 1 8 33 3 NOTES: SupeMsed Single 2 - 21 33 5 21 Interlock Preaction Trim with Electric Actuation 36 24 9 34 32 is comprised of Items 1-42 33 2' (DNSO) 18 plus Items PI-P19 and 31 28 GROOVE X GROOVE 33 24 17 24 Items E1-E4. 23 31 MODEL DV-5 Use only the 2" Model CV-1 FR DELUGE VALVE 21 Riser Check Valve for 1-1/2' or SHOWN NOTES: 33 2" assemblies. . 5. See Figure 2 of TFP1 305 for 7 3. All Fittings and Nipples are galvanized (Standard Order). Deluge Valve Port identification. 4. CH: Common Hardware. 6. Route all Tubing to Drip Funnel, Item 14. FIGURE 2A —PART 1 0F3 1-1/2 and 2 INCH (DN40 and DN50) MODEL DV-5 DELUGE VAL VES SUPERVISED SINGLE INTERLOCK PREACTION WITH ELECTRIC ACTUATION TRIM (52-478-X-119) -EXPLODED VIEW - 28 30 20 - 35 LOCATION 41 I E L—' FOR OPTIONAL I - I SUPERVISED I 33 I N.O. ALARM I I CONTROLVALVEI 24 Nipple Number Select Appropriate Nipple Sizes I per DV-5 Deluge Valve Size I 1-1/2" (DN40) 2" (DNSO) 38 I 1/2"x Close I 1/2"x2" 39 I 1/2"x5" I 112"x5-112" TFP1420 Page 5of 14 NO. DESCRIPTION CITY. P/N 1 300 psi/ 2000 kPa Water Pressure Gauge . . 2 92-343-1-005 2 1/4 Gauge Test Valve . . 1 46-005-1-002 3 Model MC-1 Manual Control Station .........1 52-289-2-001 4 Model AD-1 Automatic Drain Valve ...........1 52-793-2-004 5 Automatic Shut-Off Valve, Model ASV-1 ..........1 92-343-1-021 6 Waterflow Pressure Alarm Switch (PS10-2A) .1 2571 7 1/2° Ball Valve .........2 46-050-1-004 8 1/2' Spring Loaded Check Valve ..........1 92-322-1-002 9 112"Y-Strainer .........1 52-353-1-005 10 3/4" Swing Check Valve .1 46-049-1-005 ii 1-1/4" Angle Valve ......1 46-046-1-007 12 Drip Funnel Connector . . 1 92-211-1-005 13 Drip Funnel Bracket .. 1 92-211-1-003 14 Drip Funnel ...........1 92-343-1-007 NO. DESCRIPTION QTY. P/N 18 1/2'x 18° Tubing .......1 CH 19 1/4'Plug .............1 CH 20 3/40 Plug .............1 CH 21 1/2° Union ............5 CH 22 3/4° Union ............1 CH 23 1/4 900 Elbow .........1 CH 24 1/2" 900 Elbow .........7 CH 25 3/4"x112'90°Elbow 1 CH 26 1-1/4" 900 Elbow .......1 CH 27 1/2" Tee ..............3 CH 28 1/2"xl/4"xl/2"Tee ....3 CH 29 3/40 Tee ..............1 CH 30 3/4' x 1/2° x 3/4" Tee ....2 CH 31 1/4° x Close Nipple .....2 CH 32 1/2"x Close Nipple .....2 CH 33 1/2"x1-1/2°Nipple .....13 CH 34 1/2'x2-1/2' Nipple .....1 CH 35 1/2'x 3-1/2' Nipple .....1 CH 36 1/2° x 4' Nipple ........1 CH 37 1/2'x4-1/2°Nipple 1 CH NO. DESCRIPTION QTY. P/N 38 1/2"xS°Nipple ........1 CH 39 1/2 x 5-1/2° Nipple .....1 CH 40 1/2 x 7° Nipple ........2 CH 41 3/4" x 1-1/2° Nipple .....5 CH 42 3/4"x2°Nipple ........1 CH 43 1-1/4"x2°Nipple .......1 CH 44 1-1/4 x 4° Nipple .......1 CH P1 250 psi/ 1750kPa P2 Air Pressure Gauge .....1 92-343-1-012 1/4 Gauge Test Valve . . 1 46-005-1-002 P3 Low Air Pressure Alarm Switch (PS10-2A) ......1 2571 P4 1/4 Pressure Relief Valve ................1 92-343-1-019 P5 1/2 Swing Check Valve .1 46-049-1-004 P6 1/2° Globe Valve .......1 46-047-1-004 P7 1-1/4 Angle Valve ......1 46-048-1-007 P8 1/4 Plug..............3 CH P9 1/2 x 1/4 Reducing 0, ,,.k,,., i flu lttull9 ....... C .............. I 16 1/4" x 18' Tubing .......1 CH PlO 1/2" Union ............1 CH lJlJ yclftr I CJ.J I WUC ,Juo, ii.,g 17 1/2° Tubing Connector . . 1 CH P16 P4 P11 1/2900 Elbow .........1 CH P16 P13 P12 1/2" Cross ............1 CH P13 1/2"x 1/2" x 1/4' Tee ....1 CH P16 P6 P14 1-1/4" xl-1/4" x 1/2" Tee .1 CH P5 25 P15 1/4" x 3° Nipple ........1 CH P10 P3 P11 P1 41 P16 1/2" x 1-1/2" Nipple .....6 CH P17 1-1/4" x2"Nipple ......1 CH P18 i-1/4"x3' Nipple .......1 CH 6 P16 P9 33 P16 P15 El Solenoid Valve Per Data Ordered Sheet TFP2180 .......1 Separately (GREEN 15 P12 - 27 '-'-- E2 1/2" Tubing Connector .1 CH E3 1/2' x 24° Tubing .......I CH TINT) 16 P16 P8 28 P17 12 14 E4 1/2" x 1-1/2' Nipple .....1 CH 30 ' K P18 PLUG 13 El 20 (ORDERED P14 UNUSED SEPARATELY) 34 29 PORTS RISER E3 E2 LOCATION 42 221 P8 CHECK VALVE 4 (NOTE 2) 39 21 33 21 33FOR OPTIONAL 41 P8 36 ELECTRICALLY 41 27 SUPERVISED 33 10 24 40 N.O. ALARM 41 -. 24 24 CONTROL VALVE 24 30 32 (BVS-3/4') 33 33 32 26 28 7 43 44 40 11 . 33 3 38 NOTES: 21 8 33 5 21 Supervised Single 19 . 2 24 33 32 Interlock Preaction Trim ,.— 9 35 with Electric Actuation 37 33 18 is comprised of Items 1-44 33 3' (DN80) 24 17 24 plus Items P1-P18 and 31 28 GROOVE x GROOVE Items E1-E4. MODEL DV-5 21 Use only the Model CV-1 FR 23 31 DELUGE VALVE NOTES: Riser Check Valve. SHOWN 33 5. See Figure 2 of TFP1 305 for All Fittings and Nipples are 7 Deluge Valve Port identification. galvanized (Standard Order). 6. Route all Tubing to Drip Funnel, CH: Common Hardware. Item 14. FIGURE 2A -PART 2 0F3 3 INCH (DNBO) MODEL DV-5 DELUGE VALVES SUPERVISED SINGLE INTERLOCK PREACTION WITH ELECTRIC ACTUATION TRIM (52-478-X-116) — EXPLODED VIEW — Page 6 of 14 TFPI42O NO. DESCRIPTION QTY. P/N 1 300 psi, 2000 kPa Water Pressure Gauge . .2 92-343-1-005 2 1/4 Gauge Test Valve ..1 46-005-1-002 3 Model MC-1 Manual Control Station .........1 52-289-2-001 4 Model AD-11 Automatic Drain Valve ...........1 52-793-2-004 5 Automatic Shut-Off Valve, Model ASV-1 ..........1 92-343-1-021 6 Waterflow Pressure Alarm Switch (PSI 0-2.A) .1 2571 7 1/2" Ball Valve .........2 46-050-1-004 8 1/2' Spring Loaded Check Valve ..........1 92-322-1-002 9 1/2" V-Strainer .........1 52-353-1-005 10 3/4" Swing Check Valve .1 46-049-1-005 11 Not Used .............0 N/A 12 2' Angle Valve .........1 46-048-1-009 13 Drip Funnel Connector . .1 92-211-1-005 14 Drip Funnel Bracket . . 1 92-211-1-003 15 Drip Funnel ...........1 92-343-1-007 16 3/32' Vent Fitting .......1 92-032-1-002 17 1/4' x24° Tubing .......1 CH 18 1/2' Tubing Connector . . 1 CH - 19 1/2" x24" Tubing .......1 CH 20 1/4" Plug..............1 CH 21 3/4" Plug..............1 CH NO. DESCRIPTION QTY. P/N 47 1"x3"Nipple ..........1 CH 48 Not Used .............0 N/A 49 2" x 3' Nipple ..........2 CH 250 psi, 1750 kPa Air Pressure Gauge .....1 92-343-1-012 P2 1/4" Gauge Test Valve . , 1 46-005-1-002 P3 Low Air Pressure Alarm Switch (PS10-2A) ......1 2571 P4 1/4" Pressure Relief Valve ................1 92-343-1-019 P5 1/2" Swing Check Valve .1 46-049-1-004 P6 1/2" Globe Valve .......1 46-047-1-004 P7 2" Angle Valve .........1 46-048-1-009 P8 1/4" Plug .............. 3 CH P9 1/2" x 1/4' Reducing Bushing ..............1 CH P10 1/2" Union ............1 CH P11 1/2°900Elbow .........1 CH P12 1/2° Cross ............1 CH P13 1/2"x 1/2'x 1/4' Tee .... 1 CH P14 2°x2"x1/2°Teè .......1 CH P15 1/4"x3 Nipple ........1 CH P16 1/2" x 11/2' Nipple .....6 CH P17 2" x 3" Nipple ..........2 CH El Solenoid Valve Per Data Ordered Sheet 1FP2180 .......1 Separately E2 1/2" Tubing Connector . - 1 CH E3 1/2" x 24" Tubing .......1 CH E4 1/2" x 1-1/2' Nipple .....I CH NO. DESCRIPTION QTY. P/N 22 1/2' Union 5 CH 23 1" Union ..............1 CH 24 1/4'90° Elbow .........1 CH 25 1/2"90* Elbow .........7 CH 26 1/2' Tee ..............3 CH 27 112'xi/4'x1f2"Tee ....3 CH 28 3/4' x 1/2' x 3/4" Tee ....2 CH 29 1"xi/2'90°Elbow .....1 CH 30 1"x314'xi°Tee .......I CH 31 2" 90° Elbow ..........1 CH 32 1/4' x Close Nipple .....2 CH 33 1/2' x Close Nipple .....2 CH 34 i/2'xl-1/2'Nipple .....10 CH 35 1/2'x2-1/2'Nipple .....2 CH 36 1/2'x3'Nipple ........1 CH 37 1/2'x5" Nipple ........2 CH 38 1/2" x 6' Nipple ........1 CH 39 1/2'x7" Nipple ........2 CH 40 Select Nipple per Table .2 CH 41 Select Nipple per Table .2 CH 42 Select Nipple per Table .2 CH 43 3/4'xl-1/2'Nipple .....1 CH 44 3/4'x2° Nipple ........1 45 Select Nipple per Table . 2 CH CH 46 1" x Close Nipple 2 CH 15 El II14 - (ORDERED E2 SEPARATELY) RISER CHECK VALVE 38 22 41 22 26- 25 42 - Select Appropriate Nipple Sizes Nipple per D"-5 Deluge Valve Size No. - 4" 6' 8" - (DN100) (DN150) (DN200) 40 1/2"x2-1/2" 1/2'x5-1/2' 1/2°x8-1/2" 4 41 1I2"x2" 1/2°x3 1/2"x3-1/2° 3/4"x2-1/2" 3/4"x3-1/2' 42 1/2" x6-1/2" 1/2" x7-1/2' 1/2" x9 45 ' I)_ 35 LOCATION —44 FOR OPTIONAL ELECTRICALLY SUPERVISED 34 N.O. ALARM 25 CONTROL VALVE 28 (BVS-3/4") 40 NOTES: Supervised Single Interlock Preaction Trim with Electric Actuation is comprised of Items 1-49 plus Items P1-P17 and Items E1-E4. Use only the Model CV-1 FR Riser Check Valve. All Fittings and Nipples are galvanized (Standard Order). CH: Common Hardware. FIGURE 2A —PART 3 OF 3 4, 6, and 8 INCH (DN100 and DN200) MODEL DV-5 DELUGE VALVES SUPERVISED SINGLE INTERLOCK PREACTION WITH ELECTRIC ACTUATION TRIM (52-478-X-113) - EXPLODED VIEW - —P2 26 P8 13 PLUG UNUSED PORTS IN 37 34 34 4'(0) 32 27 FLANGE x GROOVE 24 32 MODEL DV-5 DELUGE VALVE SHOWN 35 26 25 1 34 33 34 27 39 34 5 22 34 37 19 33 25 18 25 25 22 NOTES: 34 5. See Figure 2 of TFP1 305 for Deluge Valve Port identification. 7 6. Route all Tubing to Drip Funnel, Item 15. TFPI42O Page 7 of 14 NOTES: Use only the 2 Model CV-1 FR Riser Check Valve with 1-1/2 and 2 DV-5 Valves. Use corresponding sized Model CV- 1FR Riser Check Valves for 3-8 Model DV-5 Valves. Nipples 1-4 vary in length relative to the Model DV-5 size used. Select per the table. All other nipples packed unassembled shall be installed per the appropriate trim exploded view, Figure 2A Part 1, 2, or 3. Install subassemblies in alphabetical order. See Figure 2 of TFP1305 for Deluge Valve Port identification. Route all Tubing to Drip Funnel. Nipple Number Select Appropriate Nipple Sizes per DV-5 Deluge Valve Size 1-1I2 (DN40) 2 (DN50) 3 (DN80) 4 (DN100) 6 (DN150) 8 (DN200) 1 1/2'x Close 1/2x2 1/2x1-1/2 1/2x2-1/2 1/2x5-1/2 1/2x8-1/2 2 112xClose 1/2xClose 1/2x1-I/2 1/2"x2 1/2x3" 1/2x3-1/2 3 1/2"x5 1I2x5-1!2 1I2x7 1/2x6-1/2 1/2x7-1/2 1/2x9 4 3/4x1-1/2 3/4'x 1-1/2" 3/4x1-1/2 3/4"x2-1/2 3/4x3-1/2 3/4x4-1/2 System Main Drain Size 3/4 NPT 3/4 NPT 1-1/4 NPT 2 NPT 2 NPT 2 NPT Main Drain Size 3/4 NPT 3/4 NPT 1.1/4 NPT 2 NPT 2 NPT 2 NPT VENT FITTING SYSTEM LOW AIR (GREEN TINT) AIR SUPPLY PRESSURE CONTROL VALVE ALARM SWITCH WATERFLOW (NORMALLY PRESSURE OPEN) 1/2 INCH NPT ALARM SWITCH CONNECTION 3/4 INCH NPT AUTOMATIC DRIP FUNNEL FOR SYSTEM CONNECTION FOR DRAIN WITH 1-114 AIR SUPPLY SOLENOID VALVE, WATER MOTOR B VALVE INCH NPT ORDERED SEPARATELY 1/2 INCH ALARM CONNECTION SYSTEM (NORMALLY CLOSED) CONDUIT NIPPLE TO DRAIN AIR SUPPLY PRESSURE C ONNECTION FOR ELECTRIC 4 PLUG F / GAUGE DETECTION UNUSED SYSTEM PORTS RISER MAIN DRAIN CHECK VALVE NIPPLE CONNECTION (NOTE 1) (SIZED PER NIPPLE TABLE) ~NlFfLE SYSTEM MAIN DRAIN VALVE AUTOMATIC 3 (NORMALLY SHUT-OFF VALVE M AIN CLOSED) (NORMALLY DIAPHRAGM DRAIN VALVE OPEN) CHAMBER (NORMALLY E P PRESSURE CLOSED) GAUGE ALARM TEST VALVE A (NORMALLY 0 MANUAL CLOSED) 0 0 0 0 D CONTROL STATION SYSTEM WATER C 4 (DN100) DIAPHRAGM SUPPLY FLANGE x GROOVE CHAMBER SUPPLY PRESSURE MODEL DV-5 CONTROL VALVE GAUGE MAIN DRAIN DELUGE VALVE 1/2 INCH NPT (NORMALLY OPEN) CONNECTION SHOWN CONNECTION FROM (SIZED PER TABLE) WATER SUPPLY FIGURE 2B 1-1/2 thru 8 INCH (DN40 thru DN200) MODEL DV-5 DELUGE VALVES SUPERVISED SINGLE INTERLOCK PREACTION WITH ELECTRIC ACTUATION TRIM - OPERATIONAL COMPONENTS - Page 8of 14 TFPI420 * MINIMUM CLEARANCE. * —A B — * C * D — h' A11I VA III 0 E* 1/2'NPS 0 M DIAPHRAGM CHAMBER SUPPLY (a o CONNECTING TRIM db (FIELD FABRICATED) I o\ o ri ii 1l I II JL Ii----- -Jill I I III III F --- ir - \ C f' U MAIN 2" NPS I 1-1/4 NPS _____ 1 —G CONTROL DRAIN I DRAIN VALVE I I J I K LEFT VIEW FRONT VIEW FIGURE 3 1-1/2 thru 8 INCH (DN4O and DN200) MODEL DV-5 DELUGE VALVES SUPERVISED SINGLE INTERLOCK PREACTION WITH ELECTRIC ACTUATION TRIM - NOMINAL INSTALLATION DIMENSIONS - Valve Nominal Dimensions _Installation in Inches and (mm) Size A B C D E F G H J K L M 1-1/2 7.00 8.88 13.00 10.50 20.50 4.00 5.81 5.81 3.00 7.00 4.00 14.81 (DN40) (177,8) (225,4) (330,2) (266,7) (520,7) (101,6) (147,6) (147,6) (76,2) (177,8) (101,6) (376,2) 2" 7.13 9.13 13.00 10.50 21.06 3.13 6.00 6.00 3.00 7.00 3.13 15.38 (DN50) (181,0) (231,8) (330,2) (266,7) (535,0) (79,4) (152,4) (152,4) (76,2) (177,8) (79,4) (390,5) 3' 7.81 10.44 14.50 10.50 25.00 1.69 6.69 6.69 4.25 7.00 0.25 21.13 (DN80) (198,4) (265,1) (368,3) (266,7) (635,0) (42,9) (170,0) (177,8) (6,4) (536,6) 4" 10.00 11.75 17.88 10.50 29.13 1.75 6.50 8.56 6.25 7.13 0.38 25.38 (DN100) (254,0) (298,5) (454,0) (266,7) (739,8) (44,5) (165,1) (217,5) (158,8) (181,0) (9,5) (644,5) 6' 14.31 18.75 10.50 31.94 3.50 7.88 9.94 6.25 7.13 1.56 29.63 (DN150) (363,5) (476,3) (266,7) (811,2) (88,9) (200,0) (252,4) (158,8) (181,0) (39,7) (752,5) 8" L34 16.00 21.25 10.50 36.75 1.75 10.75 10.63 6.25 7.13 7.13 36.50 (DN200) (406,4) (539,8) (266,7) (933,5) (44,5) (273,1) (269,9) (158,8) (181,0) (181,0) (927,1) TFPI 420 Page 9 of 14 Chamber is pressurized through the trim connections from the inlet side of the systems main control valve, such as an O.S.&Y. gate valve or butterfly valve (Fig. 1). Operation of an electrical detection de- vice such as a heat sensitive thermo- stat, smoke detector, or electrical man- ual control station signals the deluge valve releasing panel to energize the Solenoid Valve. In turn, the energized Solenoid Valve opens to release water from the Diaphragm Chamber faster than it can be replenished through the 1/8 inch (3,2 mm) restriction provided by the Model ASV-1 Automatic Shut- Off Valve in the diaphragm supply con- nection (Item 5 - Fig. 2A, also de- scribed in Technical Data Sheet TFP1384). This results in a rapid pres- sure drop in the Diaphragm Chamber to below the valve trip point. The water supply pressure then forces the Dia- phragm open, permitting water to flow into the system piping, as well as through the Alarm Port to actuate the system alarms. As water flows into the system, the pilot chamber of the Model ASV-1 Automatic Shut-Off Valve (Item 5 - Fig. 2A) becomes pressurized and the ASV-1 automatically shuts off the dia- phragm chamber supply flow to the DV-5 Diaphragm Chamber. Shutting off the diaphragm chamber supply flow prevents the DV-5 Diaphragm Cham- ber from becoming re-pressurized, thereby preventing inadvertent closing of the DV-5 during a fire (as may be the case should the Solenoid Valve be- come de-energized after its initial op- eration). WARNING The Model DV-5 Supervised Single In- terlock Preaction System with Electric Actuation Trim described herein must be installed and maintained in compli- ance with this document, as well as with the applicable standards of the National Fire Protection Association, in addition to the standards of any other authorities having jurisdiction. Failure to do so may impair the per- formance of the related devices. The owner is responsible for maintain- ing their fire protection system and de- vices in proper operating condition. The installing contractor or manufac- turer should be contacted with any questions. Technical Data Approvals UL and C-UL Listed. FM Approved. Deluge Valve Model DV-5. Riser Check Valve Model CV-1 FR. NOTE 1-1/2 inch (DN40) risers utilize a 2 inch (DN50) Riser Check valve in combina- tion with the 1-1/2 inch (DN40) Model DV-5 Deluge Valve. Valve Trim The Supervised Single Interlock Pre- action System With Electric Actuation Trim (Fig. 2A/213) forms a part of the laboratory listings and approvals. The trim is necessary for proper operation of the DV-5 Valve. Each package of trim includes the fol- lowing items: Water Supply Pressure Gauge Diaphragm Chamber Pressure Gauge Diaphragm Chamber Connections Manual Control Station Main Drain Valve System Drain Valve Alarm Test Valve Automatic Drain Valve System Air Pressure Gauge Air Supply Connections Low Air Pressure Supervisory Switch Waterflow Pressure Alarm Switch To ease field assembly of the trim ar- rangement, the trim components are provided partially assembled as shown in Figure 2B. The trim arrangement is provided with galvanized or black nipples and fit- tings. The galvanized trim is intended for non-corrosive or corrosive condi- tions, whereas the black trim is princi- pally intended for use with AFFF sys- tems. NOTE When the system pressure is greater than 175 psi (12,1 bar), provision is to be made to replace the standard order 300 psi (20,7 bar) Water Pressure Gauges, shown in Figure 2Al2B with separately ordered 600 psi (41,4 bar) Water Pressure Gauges. Detection System In order for a single interlock preaction system to be hydraulically calculated as a wet pipe system, as opposed to a dry pipe sprinkler system, the detec- tion system must be designed to oper- ate sooner than the automatic sprin- klers on the sprinkler piping. The Supervised Single Interlock Pre- action System With Electric Actuation Trim provides for electric operation of the DV-5 Valve by a detection system consisting of electrical devices such as heat sensitive thermostats, smoke de- tectors, and/or electric manual pull sta- tions. Information on the various types of separately ordered Solenoid Valves that may be used with this trim pack- age is given in Technical Data Sheet TFP2180. Nominal installation dimen- sions for the Supervised Single Inter- lock Preaction System With Electric Actuation Trim are shown in Figure 3. NOTES Approval by Factory Mutual is contin- gent on the use of an FM Approved 24 VOC Solenoid Valve (P/N 52-287-1- 024 or P/N 52-287-1-124). FM only approves solenoid valves for use in non-hazardous locations. Consult with the Authority Having Ju- risdiction regarding installation criteria pertaining to electric actuation cir- cuitry. The Supervised Single Interlock Pre- action System With Electric Actuation Trim is provided with a Model ASV-1 Automatic Shut-Off Valve (Item 5 - Fig. 2A); consequently, the release circuit of the releasing panel need only pro- vide the standard ten minutes of alarm condition intended to energize the So- lenoid Valve. After the ten minute du- ration, should the Solenoid Valve be- come de-energized and close (especially while operating under bat- tery back-up), the Automatic Shut-Off Valve will have already automatically closed thereby preventing the DV-5 Diaphragm Chamber from becoming re-pressurized and preventing an in- advertent closing of the DV-5 during a fire event. System Air Pressure Requirements The supervisory air (nitrogen) pres- sure is to be 10 plus or minus 2 psi (0,69 plus or minus 0,07 bar). The use of a higher supervisory pressure is subject to approval by the Authority Having Jurisdiction, and it should be understood that the use of a higher supervisory pressure may increase water delivery time. The use of a lower supervisory pressure may prevent clearing the alarm of the Supervisory Low Pressure Alarm Switch (Item P3 - Fig. 2A), which is factory set to alarm at 5 plus or minus 1 psi (0,34 plus or minus 0,07 bar) on decreasing pres- iiuuiu••u UI II iiuuu.uuIr ..... -- -- IlUUiEMEM WA•••U• I.... -- •••• lu INNEWMINEWIMM ll '4•••• IN MESONiuUui FAIII Iluil UU EFA MEIN MENESEEMEN MENEM II..... UUUI!1IIUIIIIII UU ru. ui......u.ii....i .1010110no H ME dam MI= .. ----- __A•• U• NON l U.... Uld US •• • ----- .. _____ v... •uuuu UU UU •U .. 'AU•U• •UUUU UUU'4 -- UU UU •• U. UUUU• •••Uu 1I141 UU •U • U .. ____,A ••••u 0'.401 .. ..• TFPI42O Page 11 of 14 sure. The supervisory air supply pres- sure of 10 plus or minus 2 psi (0,69 plus or minus 0,07 bar) can be pro- vided by any of the following methods. Refer to the applicable data sheet for laboratory approval information. Model G16AC812 (self contained) Automatic Supervisory Air Supply described in Gem Technical Data Sheet TD1 26. A maximum 200 psi (13,8 bar) plant air supply in combination with the Model AMD-1 Air Maintenance De- vice described in Technical Data Sheet TFP1221. A maximum 3000 psi (206,9 bar) nitrogen cylinder in combination with the Model AMD-3 Nitrogen Mainte- nance Device described in Techni- cal Data Sheet TFP1241. NOTE The dew point of the air or nitrogen supply, for a system exposed to freez- ing conditions, must be maintained be- low the lowest ambient temperature to which the system piping will be ex- posed. Introduction of moisture into the system piping can create ice build up which could prevent proper opera- tion of the system. The Supervisory Low Pressure Alarm Switch (Item P3 - Fig. 2A) is factory set at 5 plus or minus 1 psi (0,34 plus or minus 0,07 bar) on decreasing pres- sure. The Pressure Relief Valve (Item P4- Fig. 2A) is factory set to fully open at 25 plus or minus 2 psi (1,72 plus or minus 0,14 bar) and it begins to crack open at a pressure of about 18 psi (1,24 bar). Friction Loss The nominal pressure loss versus flow data for the Model DV-5 Deluge Valve plus Riser Check Valve is provided in Graph A. Installation NOTES 1-1/2 inch (DN40) risers utilize a 2 inch (DN50) Riser Check valve in combina- tion with the 1-1/2 inch (DN40) Model DV-5 Deluge Valve. Proper operation of the Model DV-5 Deluge Valves depends upon their trim being installed in accordance with the instructions given in this Technical Data Sheet. Failure to follow the ap- propriate trim diagram may prevent the DV-5 Valve from functioning prop- erly, as well as void listings, approvals, and the manufacturer's warranties. The DV-5 Valve must be installed in a readily visible and accessible location. The DV-5 Valve and associated trim must be maintained at a minimum tem- perature of 40017/40C. Heat tracing of the DV-5 Valve or its associated trim is not permitted. Heat tracing can result in the formation of hardened mineral deposits that are ca- pable of preventing proper operation. The Model DV-5 Deluge Valve is to be installed in accordance with the follow- ing criteria: Step 1. All nipples, fittings, and de- vices must be clean and free of scale and burrs before installation. Use pipe thread sealant sparingly on male pipe threads only. Step 2. The DV-5 Valve must be trimmed in accordance with Figure 2A/2B. Step 3. Care must be taken to ensure that check valves, strainers, globe valves, etc. are installed with the flow arrows in the proper direction. Step 4. Drain tubing to the drip funnel must be installed with smooth bends that will not restrict flow. Step 5. The main drain and drip funnel drain may be interconnected provided a check valve is located at least 12 inches (300 mm) below the drip funnel. Step 6. Suitable provision must be made for disposal of drain water. Drainage water must be directed such that it will not cause accidental dam- age to property or danger to persons. Step 7. Connect the Diaphragm Chamber Supply Control Valve to the inlet side of the system's main control valve in order to facilitate setting of the DV-5 Valve (Fig. 3). Step 8. Unused pressure alarm switch connections must be plugged. Step 9. A suitable automatic supervi- sory air (nitrogen) supply, as described in the Technical Data Section, is to be installed in accordance with the appli- cable Technical Data Sheet and set for 10 plus or minus 2 psi (0,69 plus or minus 0,14 bar). Step 10. A desiccant dryer, when re- quired for the supervisory air supply, is to be installed between a drip leg and the Model AMD-1 Air Maintenance De- vice or between the Model G16AC812 Automatic Supervisory Air Supply and the Preaction Trim. Step 11. The Supervisory Low Pres- sure Alarm Switch is to be wired to the supervisory alarm initiating circuit of an alarm panel. Step 12. Conduit and electrical con- nections are to be made in accordance with the requirements of the authority having jurisdiction and/or the National Electric Code. Step 13. Before a system hydrostatic test is performed in accordance with NFPA 13 system acceptance test re- quirements, the DV-5 Diaphragm Chamber is to be depressurized; the Automatic Drain Valve (Item 4, Fig. 2A) is to be temporarily replaced with a 1/2 inch NPT plug, the 3/32 inch Vent Fit- ting (16 - Fig. 2A) is to be temporarily replaced with a 1/4 inch NPT plug, and the Diaphragm Cover Bolts must be uniformly and securely tightened using a cross-draw sequence. After tightening, double-check to make cer- tain that all of the Diaphragm Cover Bolts are securely tightened. Valve Setting Procedure Steps 1 through 12 are to be per- formed when initially setting the Model DV-5 Deluge Valve; after an opera- tional test of the fire protection system; or, after system operation due to a fire. Step 1. Close the Main Control Valve. Step 2. Close the Diaphragm Cham- ber Supply Control Valve and the Su- pervisory Air Supply Control Valve. Step 3. Open the Main Drain Valve, System Drain Valve, and all auxiliary drains in the system. After water ceases to discharge, close the System Drain Valve and auxiliary drain valves. Leave the Main Drain Valve open. Step 4. Depress the plunger of the Automatic Drain Valve to verify that it is open and that the DV-5 Valve is completely drained. Step 5. Clean the Strainer in the Dia- phragm Chamber Supply connection by removing the clean-out plug and strainer basket. The Strainer may be flushed out by momentarily opening the Diaphragm Chamber Supply Con- trol Valve. Step 6. Reset the actuation system. Manual Actuation - Push the operat- ing lever up; however, do not close the hinged cover at this time. Electric Actuation - Reset the electric detection system in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions to de- energize the Solenoid Valve. Step 7. Open the Diaphragm Chamber Supply Control Valve and allow time for full pressure to build up in the Dia- phragm Chamber. Step 8. Operate (open) the Manual Control Station to vent trapped air from the Diaphragm Chamber. If necessary, Page 12 of 14. TFPI 420 first open the hinged cover, and then fully pull down on the operating lever. SLOWLY close the operating lever, by pushing it up, after aerated water ceases to discharge from the Manual Control Station drain tubing. Close the hinged cover and insert a new break rod in the small hole through the top of the enclosing box. Step 9. Inspect the drain connections from the Manual Control Station and the Solenoid Valve. Any leaks must be corrected before proceeding to the next step. Step 10. Verify the ability for the DV-5 Diaphragm to hold pressure as fol- lows: With the diaphragm chamber pressur- ized per Step 8, temporarily close the Diaphragm Chamber Supply Control Valve, and monitor the Diaphragm Chamber Pressure Gauge for a drop in pressure. If a drop in pressure is noted, the DV-5 Diaphragm is to be replaced and/or any leaks must be corrected before proceeding to the next step. If the Diaphragm Chamber Pressure Gauge does not indicate a drop in pressure, re-open the Diaphragm Chamber Supply Control Valve and proceed to the next step. Step 11. Replace operated automatic sprinklers on the system piping and then open the Supervisory Air Supply Control Valve and allow the system to automatically re-establish its nominal air pressure of 10 psi (0,69 bar). Ob- serve the Automatic Drain Valve for leaks. If there are leaks, deter- mine/correct the cause of the leakage problem within the Riser Check Valve. NOTE In order to prevent the possibility of a subsequent operation of an over- heated solder type automatic sprin- kler, any solder type automatic sprin- klers that were possibly exposed to a temperature greater than their maxi- mum rated ambient must be replaced. Step 12. Slowly open the Main Control Valve. Close the Main Drain Valve as soon as water discharges from the drain connection. Observe the Auto- matic Drain Valve for leaks. If there are leaks, determine/correct the cause of the leakage problem. If there are no leaks, the DV-5 Valve is ready to be placed in service and the Main Control Valve must then be fully opened. NOTES When the Main Control Valve is opened, the pressure on the Dia- phragm Chamber may increase. This increase in pressure is normal, and if the pressure is greater than 250 psi (17,2 bar), the pressure is to be re- lieved by partially and temporarily opening the Manual Control Station; however, do not allow the pressure as indicated on the Diaphragm Chamber Pressure Gauge to drop below the supply pressure shown on the Water Supply Pressure Gauge, since this ac- tion may result in tripping of the DV-5 Valve. After setting a fire protection system, notify the proper authorities and ad- vise those responsible for monitoring proprietary and/or central station alarms. Care and Maintenance The following procedures, inspections, and maintenance must be performed as indicated, in addition to any specific requirements of the NFPA, and any impairment must be immediately cor- rected. The owner is responsible for the in- spection, testing, and maintenance of their fire protection system and de- vices in compliance with this docu- ment, as well as with the applicable standards of the National Fire Protec- tion Association (e.g., NFPA 25), in addition to the standards of any authority having jurisdiction. The in- stalling contractor or product manufac- turer should be contacted relative to any questions. It is recommended that automatic sprinkler systems be inspected, tested, and maintained by a qualified Inspection Service in accordance with local requirements and/or national codes. NOTES Some of the procedures outlined in this section will result in operation of the associated alarms. Consequently, notification must first be given to the owner and the fire department, central station, or other signal station to which the alarms are connected. Before closing a fire protection system main control valve for maintenance work on the fire protection system that it controls, permission to shutdown the affected fire protection systems must first be obtained from the proper authorities and all personnel who may be affected by this action must be no- tified. Annual Operation Test Procedure Proper operation of the DV-5 Valve (i.e., opening of the DV-5 Valve as dur- ing a fire condition) must be verified at least once a year as follows: Step 1. If water must be prevented from flowing beyond the riser, perform the following steps. Close the Main Control Valve. Open the Main Drain Valve. Open the Main Control Valve one turn beyond the position at which water just begins to flow from the Main Drain Valve. Close the Main Drain Valve. Step 2. Test the deluge releasing panel in accordance with the manufac- turer's instructions to energize the So- lenoid Valve. NOTE Be prepared to quickly perform Steps 3, 4, and 5, if water must be prevented from flowing beyond the riser. Step 3. Verify that the DV-5 Valve has tripped, as indicated by the flow of water into the system. Step 4. Close the system's Main Con- trol Valve. Step 5. Close the Diaphragm Cham- ber Supply Control Valve and the Su- pervisory Air Supply Control Valve. Step 6. Reset the DV-5 Deluge Valve in accordance with the Valve Setting Procedure. Quarterly Waterfiow Alarm Test Procedure Testing of the system waterflow alarms must be performed quarterly. To test the waterflow alarm, open the Alarm Test Valve, which will allow a flow of water to the Waterf low Pressure Alarm Switch and/or Water Motor Alarm. Upon satisfactory completion of the test, close the Alarm Test Valve. Quarterly Solenoid Valve Test Procedure For Electric Actuation Proper operation of the Solenoid Valve for electric actuation must be verified at least quarterly as follows: Step 1. Close the Main Control Valve. Step 2. Open the Main Drain Valve. Step 3. Test the deluge releasing panel in accordance with the manufac- turer's instructions to energize the so- lenoid valve. Step 4. Verify that the flow of water from the Solenoid Valve drain connec- tion increases to a full flow. Step 5. Verify that the Diaphragm Chamber pressure has decreased to below 25% of the water supply pres- sure. Step 6. Reset the electric detection TFPI 420 Page 13 of 14 system in accordance with the manu- facturer's instructions to de-energize the solenoid valve. Check the Solenoid Valve drain for leaks. Any leaks must be corrected before proceeding to the next step. Step 7. Slowly open the Main Control Valve. Close the Main Drain Valve as soon as water discharges from the drain connection. Observe the Auto- matic Drain Valve for leaks. If there are leaks, determine/correct the cause of the leakage problem. If there are no leaks, the DV-5 Valve is ready to be placed in service and the Main Control Valve must then be fully opened. NOTE When the Main Control Valve is opened, the pressure on the Dia- phragm Chamber may increase. This increase in pressure is normal, and if the pressure is greater than 250 psi (17,2 bar), the pressure is to be re- lieved by partially and temporarily opening the Manual Control Station; however, do not allow the pressure as indicated on the Diaphragm Chamber Pressure Gauge to drop below the supply pressure shown on the Water Supply Pressure Gauge, since this ac- tion may result in tripping of the DV-5 Valve. Quarterly Supervisory Low Pres- sure Alarm Test Procedure Proper operation of the Supervisory Low Pressure Alarm Switch must be performed quarterly as follows: Step 1. Crack open the System Main Drain Valve for the Riser Check Valve (Item P7, Figure 2A) to slowly relieve supervisory air pressure from the sys- tem. Verify that the Supervisory Low Pressure Alarm Switch is operational and that the low pressure set point is approximately 5 psi (0,34 bar). Step 2. Close the System Main Drain Valve (Item P7, Figure 2A) and allow the system supervisory pressure of 10 plus or minus 2 psi (0,69 plus or minus 0,14 bar) to be automatically re-estab- lished. The Supervisory Low Pressure Alarm Switch should return to its "nor- mal" condition. Pressure Relief Valve Maintenance Over pressurization of the system pip- ing with air will result in the opening of the Pressure Relief Valve (Item P4, Fig. 2A). If the Relief Valve continues to bleed air after the system pressure has been reduced to its normal super- visory pressure range of 10 plus or minus 2 psi (0,69 plus or minus 0,14 bar), most likely debris became lodged in the seating area. To help clean the seating area, slowly pull up on the ring at the top of the Relief Valve to allow a full flow of air through the Relief Valve, and then release the ring to allow the Relief Valve to snap closed. Repeat the cleaning procedure as necessary Limited Warranty Products manufactured by Tyco Fire Products are warranted solely to the original Buyer for ten (10) years against defects in material and work- manship when paid for and properly installed and maintained under normal use and service. This warranty will ex- pire ten (10) years from date of ship- ment by Tyco Fire Products. No war- ranty is given for products or components manufactured by compa- nies not affiliated by ownership with Tyco Fire Products or for products and components which have been subject to misuse, improper installation, corro- sion, or which have not been installed, maintained, modified or repaired in ac- cordance with applicable Standards of the National Fire Protection Associa- tion, and/or the standards of any other Authorities Having Jurisdiction. Mate- rials found by Tyco Fire Products to be defective shall be either repaired or replaced, at Tyco Fire Products' sole option. Tyco Fire Products neither as- sumes, nor authorizes any person to assume for it, any other obligation in connection with the sale of products or parts of products. Tyco Fire Products shall not be responsible for sprinkler system design errors or inaccurate or incomplete information supplied by Buyer or Buyer's representatives. IN NO EVENT SHALL TYCO FIRE PRODUCTS BE LIABLE, IN CON- TRACT, TORT, STRICT LIABILITY OR UNDER ANY OTHER LEGAL THE- ORY, FOR INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LABOR CHARGES, RE- GARDLESS OF WHETHER TYCO FIRE PRODUCTS WAS INFORMED ABOUT THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES, AND IN NO EVENT SHALL TYCO FIRE PRODUCTS' LI- ABILITY EXCEED AN AMOUNT EQUAL TO THE SALES PRICE. Ordering Procedure With reference to Table A on Page 14, the following items must be ordered separately: Deluge Valve Riser Check Valve Coupling (Deluge Valve to Riser Check Valve) Single Interlock Preaction Trim Supervisory Air Supply Solenoid Valve Accessories NOTE 1-1/2 inch (DN40) risers utilize a 2 inch (DN5O) Riser Check valve in combina- tion with the 1-1/2 inch (DN40) Model DV-5 Deluge Valve. Part Numbers for factory pre-trimmed Model DV-5 Valves are provided in the Price Book. Replacement Trim Parts: Specify: (description) for use with Model DV-5 Deluge Valve, P/N (see Figure 2A). TFPI42O Page 14 of 14 DELUGE VALVE (SELECT ONE) P/N's are for American Standard Groove x Groove Connections, and Threaded Ports, For other configurations refer to Technical Data Sheet TFP1305. Specify: (size) Model DV-5 groove x groove Deluge Valve, P/N (specify). 1-1/2 Inch ..........................................................P/N 52-477-1-919 2 Inch .............................................................P/N 52-477-1-910 3 Inch .............................................................P/N 52-477-1-912 4 Inch .............................................................P/N 52-477-1-913 6 Inch .............................................................P/N 52-477-1-915 8 Inch .............................................................P/N 52-477-1-916 RISER CHECK VALVE (SELECT ONE) P/N's are for American Standard Grooved Connections. For other configurations refer to Technical Data Sheet TFP950 for the groove x groove Model CV-1 FR Riser Check Valve. Specify: (size), Model CV-1 FR groove x groove Riser Check Valve, P/N (specify). For 1-1/2 inch risers, use the 2 Inch Riser Check Valve. 2 Inch .............................................................PIN 59-590-1-020 3 Inch .............................................................P/N 59-590-1-030 4 Inch ..............................................................P/N 59-590-1-040 6 Inch ..............................................................P/N 59-590-1-060 8 Inch .............................................................P/N 59-590-1-080 COUPLING (SELECT ONE) P/N's are for American Standard Grooved Connections. For other configurations and finishes refer to Technical Data Sheet TFP1830 or TFP1880. A coupling to attach the Riser Check Valve to the outlet of the Deluge Valve must be separately ordered. Specify: (Size), (Figure #), painted, (description), P/N (specify). For 1-1/2 inch risers, order an additional Reducing Coupling for the outlet of the 2 inch Riser Check Valve. 2 x 1-1/2 Inch Figure 716 Painted Reducing Coupling ....................... P/N 7162015ES 2 Inch Figure 772 Painted Rigid Coupling ................................PIN 77220ASC 3 Inch Figure 772 Painted Rigid Coupling ................................P/N 77230ASC 4 Inch Figure 772 Painted Rigid Coupling ................................PIN 77240ASC 6 Inch Figure 772 Painted Rigid Coupling ................................P/N 77260ASC 8 Inch Figure 772 Painted Rigid Coupling ................................P/N 77280ASC PREACTION TRIM (SELECT ONE) Specify: (specify size and finish - galvanized is standard) Semi -Preassembled Super- vised Single Interlock Preaction System With Electric Actuation Trim for Model DV-5 Deluge Valves, P/N (specify). 1-1/2 & 2 Inch Galvanized .............................................P/N 52-478-2-119 1-1/2 & 2 Inch Black .................................................. .P/N 52-478-1-119 3 Inch Galvanized .................................................... P/N 52-478-2-116 3 Inch Black ........................................................ P/N 52-478-1-116 4,6 & 8 Inch Galvanized ..............................................P/N 52-478-2-113 4,6 & 8 Inch Black ...................................................P/N 52-478-1-113 SUPERVISORY AIR SUPPLY (SELECT ONE) A device capable of maintaining a nominal system air or nitrogen pressure of nominal 10 psi (069 bar) must be separately ordered. Specify: (Specify model and description), P/N (specify). Model AMD-1 Air Maintenance Device (TFP1221) .........................P/N 52-324-2-002 Model AMD-3 Nitrogen Maintenance Device (TFP1 241) ....................P/N 52-328-2-001 Model G16AC812 Automatic Supervisory Air Supply (1D126) ................P/N 52-150-1-001 SOLENOID VALVE (SELECT ONE) A Solenoid Valve compatible with the anticipated maximum water supply pressure must be ordered separately. Refer to Technical Data Sheet TFP2180 for other voltage ratings and NEMA classifications. Specify: 24 VDC, NEMA 2, 4, and 4X, (specify 175 or 250 psi) Solenoid Valve, P/N (specify). 175 psi .............................................................P/N 52-287-1-024 250 psi ............................................................P/N 52-287-1-124 ACCESSORIES (AS NEEDED) Specify: (description), PN (specify). 600 PSI Water Pressure Gauge .........................................P/N 92-343-1-004 Model WMA-1 Water Motor Alarm (TFP921) ..............................P/N 52-630-1-001 TABLE A - ORDERING LIST TYCO FIRE PRODUCTS, 451 North Cannon Avenue, Lansdale, Pennsylvania 19446 Bulletin 251 Rev. A ReI m ®R) iabk Models A-2 & B-i Automatic Pressure Maintenance Devices Instructions for Installation, Operation, Care and Maintenance The Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc., 103 Fairview Park Drive, Elmsford, New York 10523 Operation Adjustment Model A-2 Pressure Maintenance Device • Model A-2 Pressure Maintenance Device (Refer to Figure 1) The Model A-2 Pressure Maintenance Device (PMD) is de- signed for use where a source of compressed air (plant air system, tank-mounted compressor with a pressure control, etc.) or nitrogen cylinder (equipped with a regulating de- vice) is available (refer to the section in this technical bulle- tin titled "Installation"). The regulator in the Model A-2 PMD reduces higher pressure air or nitrogen to a level required by a dry pipe valve, dry pilot line, or a deluge valve based preaction system. The Model A-2 PMD will maintain a con- stant pressure in the system regardless of any pressure fluctuations from the compressed air or nitrogen source. Basic functionality of components (refer to Figure 1): The strainer's (Item 2) function is to prevent any foreign matter that may be present in the air supply, from traveling to the regulator (Item 1) and the check valve (Item 3), thereby en- suring their normal operation. The check valve's function is to prevent the reverse flow of water resulting from a dry pipe or deluge valve's operation, from reaching the regulator. The globe valves (Item 4) allow for the servicing (if needed) of the strainer (Item 2) and regulator (Item 1) without having to shut down the sprinkler system. The ball valve (Item 5) permits the rapid restoration (quick-fill) of the required sys- tem air pressure after service or operation. The ball valve (Item 5) must be closed and the globe valves (Item 4) must be open for proper automatic operation. Models B-i Pressure Maintenance Device (Refer to Figure 2) The Model B-i Pressure Maintenance Device (PMD) is designed for use in conjunction with the Reliable Model A Tankless Air Compressor in order to maintain the correct air pressure in a dry pipe valve or dry pilot line (refer to the section in this technical bulletin titled 'Installation"). The Re- liable Model A Tankless Air Compressor is controlled on or off by the air pressure level present in the dry pipe valve or dry pilot line via wiring between the compressor's motor and the contacts of the Model B-i PMD's pressure switch. Basic functionality of components (refer to Figure 2): A drop in the sprinkler system's air pressure causes the contacts of the pressure switch (Item i) to close, thereby activating the air compressor . When the pre-adjusted level of air pressure is restored, the pressure switch's contacts re-open, thereby deactivating the air compressor. The pressure switch (Item 1) is also equipped with an unloader valve that automati- cally bleeds off the air compressor's outlet pressure each time the contacts of the pressure switch open. This protects the air compressor's motor from overloading during start- up. Like the Model A-2 PMD, the Model B-i has a strainer (Item 2) for contamination control and a check valve (Item 3) to prevent reverse water flow. The ball valve (Item 5) and globe valves (Item 4) are also identical in configuration and function as with the Model A-2 PMD. Likewise, the ball valve (Item 5) must be closed and the globe valves (Item 4) must be open for proper automatic operation (Refer to Figure 1) The pressure regulator (Item i)is factory set to maintain a nominal system air or nitrogen pressure of 30 psi (2,1 bar). In order to change the outlet pressure, loosen the locknut at the top of regulator and turn the adjustment screw clockwise to increase pressure. To decrease the pressure, turn the adjusting screw counter clockwise. The resulting pressure can be determined at the sprinkler system air gauge once the air flow through the device has ceased, or at the optional gauge location. Shown on Figure 1. Note: The locknut of the regulator (Item 1) must be tight- ened after adjusting in order to prevent an accidental change in the pressure setting. Adjustable Outlet Pressure Range: 5 psi - to - 50 psi (0,3 bar - to - 3,4 bar) Maximum Inlet Pressure: 175 psi (12 bar) Model B-i Pressure Maintenance Device The pressure switch (Item i) is factory set to maintain a nominal system air pressure of 35 psi (2,4 bar). In order to change the setting, remove the pressure switch's cov- er and follow the directions contained within the switch. Electrical Rating: Single Phase: 120 Volts AC; 2 hp 240 Volts AC; 3hp 600 Volts AC; 5hp Three Phase: 240 Volts AC; 5 hp 600 Volts AC; 5 hp 115-230 Volts DC; 3 hp Adjustable Outlet Pressure Range: 14 psi -to -60 psi (1,0 bar- to - 4,1 bar) Maximum Inlet Pressure: 175 psi (12 bar) 2. Model A-2 Pressure Maintenance Device P/N 6304000135, (All steel pipe fittinqs are qalvanized) Item Part No. No.Req'd Description 1 98681630 Regulator, 5-50 psi 1 2 98727606 Strainer, ¼" NPT, 90 1 3 96816902 Check Valve, ¼" 1 4 98840172 Globe Valve, ¼' 1 5 98840108 Butterfly Valve, 3%" 1 6 98815201 Union, 1/4" 1 7 96606616 Tee, 3/4" x 3%" x ¼" 2 8 98543234 Nipple, 3/4" x 31/2" 2 9 98543226 Nipple, ¼" x 11/2" 4 10 98174404 Elbow, ¼" 1 11 98543268 Nipple, ¼" xl" 3 12 96606608 Tee, ¼" 1 13 1 98614403 1 Plug, ¼" 1 Model B-i Pressure Maintenance Device P/N 6304010100, (All steel pipe fittinqs are qalvanized) Item No. Part No. Description No. Req'd 1 98728801 Pressure Switch, s/s" NPT 1 2 98727607 Strainer, ¼", 30 Mesh 1 3 96816902 Check Valve, ¼" 1 4 98840172 Globe Valve, ¼" 1 5 98840108 Butterfly Valve, 3/4" 1 6 98815201 Union, ¼" 1 7 96606616 Tee, 3/4" x 3/4" x ¼" 2 8 98543233 Nipple, 3/4" x 2 ½" 2 9 98543226 Nipple, ¼" x 11/2" 4 10 96606608 Tee, 1/4" 1 11 98750004 Cross, 1/4" 1 12 98543227 Nipple, ¼" x Close 1 13 98523100 Restrictor Nipple, ¼" 1 14 98768000 Copper Tubing, ¼" 0. D. 1 15 98085630 Comp. Fitting, ¼" x ¼" 1 16 98048034 Reducer Bushing 3/s"x¼" 1 17 1 98614403 1 Plug, ¼" 1 11 10 2 6 11 I Optional Pneumatic Location From Air 9 112 or Nitrogen ' Pressure Guage 12 Supply 8 To 7 System 251FGOIA Figure 1 14 15 9 10 2 13 9 4 16 Optional f 6 12 Pneumatic è 3 4 Pressure Gauge From 11 Location 4 17 Tonkless Compressor 7 9 S 5 251FG02C 8 To 7 System Figure 2 3. Inspection and Maintenance Refer to Figures 1 & 2. Review the latest NFPA 13 and NFPA 25 Standards, any appropriate dry pipe or deluge valve installation bulletins, and the section in this bulletin titled Instal- lation" to ensure that the pressure maintenance de- vice is installed properly. Make sure that both 1/4" globe valves (Item 4) are open and that the 3/4" ball valve (Item 5) is closed. Check the gas pressure in the dry pipe, deluge or preaction system at the pressure gauge located on those devices. See the section titled "Adjustment" if any are required. If maintenance is to be performed on Items 1, 2 or 3 of the pressure maintenance device, make sure that both globe valves (Item 4) are closed and that pressure has been relieved from the section through the 1/4" union (Item 6). These valves must be opened again in order to restore proper automatic operation. The strainer (Item 2) should be cleaned periodically to prevent contamination from blocking air flow. This can be done by removing the strainer's cap and wip- ing or blowing off any collected debris. Make sure the check valve (Item 3) is installed ac- cording to the schematic with the arrow on its hex- agonal side pointing in the required direction of air flow. If the regulator (Item 1) in the Model A-2 Pressure Maintenance Device is constantly leaking at the ad- justing screw, the regulator may contain dirt keep- ing the poppet open and should be cleaned or re- placed. Check the inside housing of pressure switch (Item 1) of the Model B-i Pressure Maintenance Device for dirt or foreign matter and verify that the wiring is fastened securely and is wiring insulation is in good condition. WARNING: Do not contact the electrical wiring when the power is on Installation As shown in Figures 4 through 13, Pressure Maintenance Devices are installed in the air supply line leading to the dry pipe valve, deluge or preaction systems. With the Model A-2 PMD the air supply is a tank mounted compressor with a pressure control switch, or a Nitrogen supply equipped with a regulating device. With the Model B-i PMD, the air supply is an air compressor without a pressure control switch. An extra outlet connection is provided on all of the models for mounting an optional pressure gauge to moni- tor the outlet pressure. Model A-2 Pressure Maintenance Device Make sure the air flow through the Pressure Maintenance Device is as shown by the arrows in Figures 1,4,6,8,9 and 11-13. Install the Pressure Maintenance Device as close to the dry pipe valve airline trimmings as pos- sible. Install the Pressure Maintenance Device in the air supply immediately leading to the del- uge or preaction trim. Refer to separate dry pipe valve, deluge valve or preaction system bulletins for the additional installation information. Model B-i Pressure Maintenance Device Make sure the air flow through the Device is as shown by the arrows in Figures 2, 5-7 andlO. Remove the pressure switch's (Item 1) cover and connect the wiring in accordance with the Nation- al Electric Code or other appropriate standards. The connections should be as shown in Figure 3 for single phase wiring of thermally protected compressor motors. Refer to separate dry pipe valve and deluge valve bulletins for additional in- stallation information. Air Compressor (REF. WIRING DIAGRAM ATTACHED TO AIR COMPRESSOR) 251FG04E Figure 3 For 3-phase wiring, a listed and/or approved, properly sized magnetic motor starter with ap- propriate NEMA enclosure must be provided. The wiring of the pressure switch, motor starter, and air compressor must be in accordance with the National Electrical Code, or other appropri- ate standards. Model A-2 Pressure Maintenance Device with Model D Dry Pipe Valve Trim Model A-2 Pressure Maintenance / Device J Pressure Relief / Valve - J— From Owner's Air Supply, Tank—Mounted Air Compressor or Nitrogen Supply Model D Dry Pipe Valve In Standard Dry Pipe Valve Air Line Trim 25 1FGO5F Figure 4 Model B-i Pressure Maintenance Device with Model D Dry Pipe Valve Trim Electrical Signal To Compressor Pressure Relief Valve - LJ From Tankless Air Compressor Model B—i Pressure Maintenance Device Model 0 Dry Pipe Valve - Standard Dry Pipe Valve Air Line Trim 25 1FGO6E Figure 5 5. Model A-2 Pressure Maintenance Device with Model BX Dry Pilot Line Deluge Trim To Dry Pressure Pilot Line Switch Pressure Relief Valve / From Owner's Air Supply, Tank—Mounted Air Compressor or Nitrogen Supply Model A-2 Pressure Maintenance Device Standard _J Dry Pilot Line Deluge Trim Dry Pilot Line Model BX Actuator Deluge Valve C 1 J 25 IFCQ7B Figure 6 Model B-i Pressure Maintenance Device with Model BX Dry Pilot Line Deluge Trim Electrical Signal To Compressor To Dry Pressure Pilot Line Switch Pressure Relief (2 Valve From Tankless Air Compressor / . Dry Pilot Line Actuator Model BX Deluge Valve Model B—i Pressure Maintenance 2 Device Standard. Dry Pilot Line 1 Deluge Trim I -j 251F008A Figure 7 6. Model A-2 Pressure Maintenance Device with Model LDX Dry Pipe Valve Trim From Owners Air Supply, Tank—Mounted Air Compressor or Nitrogen Supply Model A-2 Pressure Maintenance Device Model LDX Pressure Relief Check Valve Valve Model LOX Dry Valve Model LOX Actuator Dry Pipe Valve 25 IFGO9A Figure 8 Model A-2 Pressure Maintenance Device with Model DDX Dry Pilot Line Deluge Trim From Owner's Air Supply, Tank—Mounted Air Compressor or Nitrogen Supply Model A-2 Pressure Device 0> To Dry Pilot Line Pressure Switch Model LP Dry Pilot Line Actuator Model DDX Deluge Valve 251F010A Figure 9 7. Model B-i Pressure Maintenance Device with Model DDX Dry Pilot Line Deluge Trim Model B—i Pressure Maintenance From Tonkless Device Air Compressor Electrical Signal To Compressor To Dry Pilot Line Pressure Switch Model LP Dry Pilot Line Actuator Model DDX Deluge Valve (7) TT 251FC11A Figure 10 Model A-2 Pressure Maintenance Device with Model DDX Dry Pilot Line Single Interlock Preaction Trim Model A-2 Pressure Maintenance Device Model DDX From Owners Air Supply, Deluge Valve Tank—Mounted Air Compressor or Nitrogen Supply Model LP Dry Valve Actuator Q / 4 251FG12A Figure 11 Al Model A-2 Pressure Maintenance Device with Model DDX Type F Double Interlock Preaction Trim From Owners Air Supply, Tank—Mounted Air Compressor or Nitrogen Supply Model A-2 Pressure Maintenance Device 00 Model DDX Deluge Valve Model LP Dry Valve Actuator P.O 0 25 IFG 1,3A Figure 12 Model A-2 Pressure Maintenance Device with Model DDX- LP Dry Pipe Valve Trim From Owner's Air Supply, Tank—Mounted Air Compressor or Nitrogen Supply Model A-2 Pressure Maintenance Device Model DDX Deluge Valve (2) Model LP = Dry Valve Actuator / 251 FG 14A Figure 13 IM Reliable ... For Complete Protection Reliable offers a wide selection of sprinkler components. Following are some of the many precision-made Reliable products that guard life and property from fire around the clock. Automatic sprinklers Flush automatic sprinklers Recessed automatic sprinklers Concealed automatic sprinklers Adjustable automatic sprinklers Dry automatic sprinklers Intermediate level sprinklers Open sprinklers Spray nozzles Alarm valves Retarding chambers Dry pipe valves Accelerators for dry pipe valves Mechanical sprinkler alarms Electrical sprinkler alarm switches Water flow detectors Deluge valves Detector check valves Check valves Electrical system Sprinkler emergency cabinets Sprinkler wrenches Sprinkler escutcheons and guards Inspectors test connections Sight drains Ball drips and drum drips Control valve seals Air maintenance devices Air compressors Pressure gauges identification signs Fire department connection The equipment presented in this bulletin is to be installed in accordance with the latest published Standards of the National Fire Protection Association, Factory Mutual Research Corporation, or other similar organizations and also with the provisions of governmental codes or ordinances whenever applicable, Productsmanufactured and distributed by Reliable have been protecting life and property for over 90 years, and are installed and serviced by the most highly qualified and reputable sprinkler contractors located throughout the United States, Canada and foreign countries. Manufactured by The Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co. Inc. Recycled I bill! (800) 431-1588 Sales Offices Paper (800) 848-6051 Sales Fax Revision lines indicate updated or new data. (914) 829-2042 Corporate Offices www.reliablesprinkler.com Internet Address EG, Printed in USA 05/10 P/N 9999970040 " 4LCB-46S-M450GX F-30 (5-02) UL 2125 Listed Air Compressors • Tankless I Tank Mounted U UL 2125 Listed Motor Mounted, (no belts or pulleys) Oil free air, no lubrication required U Corrosion resistant internal parts I Compact, easy to install I Black Paint for easy identification N \ \ I, CAST r A &INUr QF IDEX cQRPOR4n'o, www.gastmfg.com UL Listed Oilless Piston Air Compressors for Dry Sprinkler SystE / UL 2125 Listed Motor mounted, (no belts or pulleys),' Oil free air, no lubrication required Corrosion resistant internal parts N Compact, easy to install Black paint for easy identification, MOTORS - All air compressors shown have open motors. Single phase motors have internal thermal protection. Dual voltage motors are shipped pre-wired for the higher voltage. \ N Model 4LC8-46S-M450GX (All tank units are wired for 115 volts) \ 7/ NTankless /Automatic air compressors have inlet filters, asafety valve, pressure switch (minimum switch differentials are 10-13 psig on most models) Check valv; tubing and fittings- The 2LAF-465-M200EX has 6 psig minimum differential. UL Listed 2125 Oilless Piston Air Compressors for Dry Sprinkler Systems ANKLESS DIMENSIONAL DATA (IN.) Model Number A B C Pipe Size Ship Wt. iLAA-46S-MIOOGX 6.0314.66 8.31 1/4" NPT 22.5 2LAF-46S-M200EX 9.52 13.49 9.38 1/4" NPT 24.2 3LBA-463-M300GX 6.03 15.60 11.0 1/4" NPT 30.2 3LEM-46S-M345EX 7.71 14.96 9.40 1/4" NPT 29.2 4L6Mt4QX 8.4_16QZj22Q..jj4Nlj 39..J 5LCA-465-M550GX 8.34 17.15 12.25 1/4" NPT 47.5 6LCF-46S-M616EX 8.38 19.69 12.30 3/8" NPT 552 7LDE-46S-M750X 8.40 25.29 13.46 3/8" NPT 73.0 Maximum Gallons CFM in System to Pump Free Air Tankless Tank Mounted to 40 PSI in 30 Mm. at 40 PSI Motor Data Packages Packages 90_1.0 1f6_hp,.115601 ILAA-46S-MIOQGX 1LAA46LM100GX(2,GAL) - _150_1.5_114 hp, 19;60.i_2LAE46SM20DEX 2LA6TM200EX1 2_GAL)L ____W hp,Th5 6O 180 2.0 1/3 hp, 115-60-1 3LEM-46S-M345EX 3LEM-46T-M345EX (12GAL) 300 3 1 1/2hp J15/23060J_4LCB46SM450GX 4LCB-4611M450GX (2OGAL): 400 4.2 3/4 hp, 115/230-60-1 5LCA-46S-M550GX5LCA-46T-M55OGX (20GAL) 600_5.9_6$M1(_ 800 7.9 1 1/2 hp, 115/208-230-60-1 7LDE-46S-M750X 7LDE-46T-M750X (30GAL) Tank Mounted Mode! 4LCB-46T-M450GX UL Listed 2125 Oilless Piston Air Compressors for Dry Sprinkler Systems (Tank Units) Tank Package ASME Coded tank mounted compressors include gauge, pressure switch (minimum switch differential is 10-13 psig). Shut off valve, drain valve, check valve and safety valve. TANK UNITS DIMENSIONAL DATA (IN.) Tank Size MiFNumber A B C Pipe Size Gal Ion SIiiWt. ILAA-46T-M100GX 19 18 9 1/4" NPT 2 44.0 2LAF-46T-M200EX 26 21 13 1/4" NPT 12 78.0 3LBA-46T-M300GX 2621 13 1/4" NPT 12 83.0 3[EM46TM345EX 2621 13 1/4'NPT 12 80T0 4LCB-46T-M450GX332617 1/4" NPT 20 109.0 5LCA-46T-M55016X 33 26 17 1/4" NPT 20 115.0 6LCF-46T-M616EX 33 25.5 17 1/4" NPT 30 169.0 7JPE4LMThX 38_28.6_J8 8" NPT 30 185.0 Accessories Part Number Description AJ550 Check Valve 1/4"NPTfemale AJ550A Check Valve 3/8" NPT female AT670 Riser Mounting_ Bracket ___________ AK620 Pressure Switch (6 psig minimum pressure differential) AE163B Pressure Switch cut-in pressure 40 psi, cut-out pressure 50 psi AF564 Pressure Switch (20psigminimumpressure differential) AF631 Shock/isolation mounts 1/4-20 thread both ends (48 frame models 1, 2, and 3) AF633 Shock/isolation mounts 5/16-18 thread (both ends) (48 & 56 frame) AF634 15" hose assy.1/4" NPT fittings AH332 16" hose assy. 3/8" NPT fittings UL Fire Protection Listing UL File EX5324 Evaluated to UL2 125 Motor-operated air compressors for use in sprinkler systems. Air Capacity of a System Capacity of 1' of pipe (Based on actual internal diameter) Diãiiiiter_Uons 1/2 in._0.16 3/4 in. .028 i1ir._.045 11/4 in..078 1 1/2ln. .106 2in. .174 21/2in. .248 3 in. .383 _3 in. _.513 4 in. .660 =in. 1.040 6in. 1.501 8 in._2.66 Compressor Mounting Bracket Comes complete with all the hardware and adjustable stainless steel straps for mounting Gast tan kless air compressors to all shapes and sizes of riser pipes. To order contact your local sprinkler supply company or your local Gast distributor. Part Number AT670 I, / Gast Manufacturing Inc. World Headquarters 2550 Meadowbrook Rd. Benton Harbor, Ml Ph: 269-92 Fax: 269-92 Eastern Sales Office 505 Washington Ave. Carlstadt, NJ 07072 Ph: 201-933-8484 Fax:201-933-5545 United Kingdom Beach House Knaves Beach Business Centre Loudwater, High Wycombe Bucks England HP 10 95D Ph: 44 (0) 1628-532600 Fax: 44(0) 1628-532470 Hong Kong Unit 12, 21/F. Block B New Trade Plaza 6, on Ping Street Shatin N.T. Hong Kong Ph: 852-2690-1008 Fax: 852-2690-1012 I CAST www.gastmfg.com tqcul Ffre & Building Products Technical Services: Tel: (800) 381-9312 I Fax: (800) 791-5500 Solenoid Valves For Deluge And I 'reaction Systems Electric Release Service General Description The Solenoid Valves For Releasing Service are intended for use with Tyco Fire Products Deluge and Preaction Valves which are to be electrically ac- tuated. The Solenoid Valves are used in conjunction with an electric releas- ing panel that is listed or approved (as appropriate) for fire protection releas- ing service, and where the releasing panel is operated by listed or approved (as appropriate) electric fire detectors. WARNING The Solenoid Valves described herein must be installed and maintained in compliance with this document, as well as with the applicable standards of the National Fire Protection Asso- ciation, in addition to the standards of any other authorities having jurisdic- tion. Failure to do so may impair the integrity of this device. The owner is responsible for maintain- ing their fire protection system and de- vices in proper operating condition. The installing contractor or sprinkler manufacturer should be contacted relative to any questions. Technical Data Approvals UL Listed and CSA Certified under the name of Parker Hannifin Corporation, Skinner Valve Division. P/N 52-287-1- 024 (175 psi) and P/N 52-287-1-124 (250 psi) are FM Approved for release of Tyco Fire Products Deluge and Pre- action Valves. Working Water Pressure Refer to Figure 1. Physical Characteristics The body is brass, and the seal is Nitrile rubber. Operation Operation of an electrical device such as a heat sensitive thermostat, smoke detector, or electric manual pull station signals the releasing panel to energize the releasing circuit. Energizing the re- leasing circuit opens the normally closed de-energized Solenoid Valve to release water pressure from the differ- ential chamber of the deluge or preac- tion valve, which in turn permits the deluge or preaction valve to open and allow a flow of water into the system piping. Installation The Solenoid Valves For Releasing Service are to be installed in accord- ance with the following instructions: Step 1. Check the nameplate for the correct catalog number, NEMA classi- fication, and voltage. Step 2. The Solenoid Valves are to be installed as part of the deluge or pre- action valve trim in accordance with the applicable instructions provided for the deluge valve or preaction valve. The inlet port of the Solenoid Valve is to be connected to the differential chamber of the deluge or preaction valve, and the outlet port of the Sole- noid Valve is to piped to an open drain. For best life and optimum perform- ance the Solenoid Valve should be mounted vertically upright, as illus- trated in Figure 2, so as to minimize wear and reduce the possibility of ac- cumulating foreign matter. Step 3. Only apply pipe thread sealant sparingly to the male pipe threads of the connecting pipe nipples. Step 4. To prevent distortion of the Solenoid Valve body, always wrench on the portion adjacent to the pipe to which it is being connected. Do not use the Solenoid Valve to force a pipeline into position. Doing so may result in distortion of the valve. Step 5. Conduit and electrical connec- tions are to be made in accordance with the requirements of the authority having jurisdiction and/or the National Electric Code. The coil assembly may be reoriented, as necessary, by first loosening the nut on top of the coil. After repositioning the coil assembly, tighten the nut with a torque of 43 to 53 inch-pounds (4,9 to 6,0 Nm). NOTE Turn off electrical power before con- necting the Solenoid Valve to the power source. Page 1 of 4 JANUARY, 2003 TFP2I80 Page 2 of 4 TFP2IBO ENCLOSURE WORKING WATER AC VOLT-AMPS TYPE VOLTAGE PRESSURE WATTS CATALOG P/N (a) (b( (NEMA RATINGS) PSI (BAR) INRUSH HOLDING 120 VAC, 60Hz 20-175 10 31 16 - 73218BN4UNLVNOC111P3 52-287-1-110 110 VAC, 50Hz (1,4-12,1) 20-175 10 - - 7321813N4UNLVNOC111C2 52-287-1-024 (1,4-12,1) (ORDINARY)24 VDC 20-250 (1,4-17,2) 22 - - 0.83 73212BN4TNLVN0C322C2 52-287-1-124 (LOCATION) (2, 4, and 4X) 48 VDC 20-175 10 - - 0.21 73218BN4UNLVNOC111C4 52-287-1-048 (1,4-12,1) 125 VDC 20-175 11 - - 0.08 73218BN4UNLVNOC1113N 52-287-1-125 (1,4-12,1) 250 VDC 20-175 (1,4-12,1) 10 - - - 0.04 73218BN4UNLVNOC111N9 52-287-1-015 110/120 VAC 20-175 10 31 16 (1,4-12,1) - 73218BN4UNLVNOH111P3 52-287-1-210 HAZARDOUS 24 VDC ____________ 20-175 10 - - (1,4-12,1) 0.41 73218BN4UNLVNOH111C2 52-287-1-224 LOCATION (4, 4X, 7, and 9) 125 VDC 20-175 11 - - 0.08 73218BN4UNLVNOH1113N 52-287-1-225 _ (1,4-12,1) 250 VDC _ 20-175 (1,4-12,1) 10 1- - - 0.04 - 73218BN4UNLVNOH111N9 52-287-1-215 NOTES: (a)Current to start plunger moving. Current to hold plunger open. - FIGURE 1 ENCLOSURE AND VOLTAGE RATINGS Care and Maintenance The following inspection procedure must be performed as indicated, in ad- dition to any specific requirements of the NFPA, and any impairment must be immediately corrected. The owner is responsible for the in- spection, testing, and maintenance of their fire protection system and de- Vices in compliance with this docu- ment, as well as with the applicable standards of the National Fire Protec- tion Association (e.g., NFPA 25), in addition to the standards of any authority having jurisdiction. The in- stalling contractor or product manufac- turer should be contacted relative to any questions. It is recommended that automatic sprinkler systems be inspected, tested, and maintained by a qualified Inspection Service. NOTES Before closing a fire protection system control valve for inspection or mainte- nance work on the fire protection sys- tem which it controls, permission to shut down the effected fire protection system must first be obtained from the proper authorities and all personnel who may be affected by this action must be notified. CONDUIT CONNECTION 3-13/16 2' CONDUIT (96,8 mm) ELECTRICAL 4-3/8 LEADS -(111,1 mm) + 1/2'NPT 2-5/8 (TYPICAL) 29/16" 1mm) (66,7 mm) 175 PSI (12,1 BAR) MAXIMUM SERVICE PRESSURE 1/2" CONDUIT CONNECTION (98,4 mm) ELECTRICAL 4-5/8 LEADS (117,5 mm) NPT 2-3/4' (TYPICAL) (69,9 mm) (50,8 mm) 250 PSI (17,2 BAR) MAXIMUM SERVICE PRESSURE FIGURE 2 SOLENOID VALVES FOR RELEASING SERVICE After placing a fire protection system , _I TFP2I8O Page 3 of 4 in service, notify the proper authorities and advise those responsible for moni- toring proprietary and/or central sta- tion alarms. INSPECTION PROCEDURE The Solenoid Valves must be in- spected quarterly in accordance with the following instructions: Verify operation of the Solenoid Valve following the procedure outlined in the Technical Data Sheet for the Tyco Fire Products Deluge or Preaction Valve. In general, if the voltage to the coil is correct, sluggish valve operation, ex- cessive leakage, or noise will indicate that cleaning is required. Clean the Solenoid Valve in accordance with the procedures outlined by Honeywell, Inc. Skinner Valve. Causes of Improper Operation Faulty Control Circuit: Check the electrical system by energizing the releasing circuit to the Solenoid Valve. A metallic "click" signifies that the solenoid is operating. Absence of the "click" indicates loss of power supply. Check for loose or blown fuses, open-circuited or grounded coil, broken lead wires or broken splice connections. Burned-Out Coil: Check for open- circuited coil. Replace if necessary. Check supply voltage; it must be the same as specified on label or name- plate. Low Voltage: Check voltage across the coil leads. Voltage must be at least 85% of nameplate rating. Limited Warranty Products manufactured by Tyco Fire Products are warranted solely to the original Buyer for ten (10) years against defects in material and work- manship when paid for and properly installed and maintained under normal use and service. This warranty will ex- pire ten (10) years from date of ship- ment by Tyco Fire Products. No war- ranty is given for products or components manufactured by compa- nies not affiliated by ownership with Tyco Fire Products or for products and components which have been subject to misuse, improper installation, corro- sion, or which have not been installed, maintained, modified or repaired in ac- cordance with applicable Standards of the National Fire Protection Associa- tion, and/or the standards of any other Authorities Having Jurisdiction. Mate- rials found by Tyco Fire Products to be defective shall be either repaired or replaced, at Tyco Fire Products' sole option. Tyco Fire Products neither as- sumes, nor authorizes any person to assume for it, any other obligation in connection with the sale of products or parts of products. Tyco Fire Products shall not be responsible for sprinkler system design errors or inaccurate or incomplete information supplied by Buyer or Buyer's representatives. IN NO EVENT SHALL TYCO FIRE PRODUCTS BE LIABLE, IN CON- TRACT, TORT, STRICT LIABILITY OR UNDER ANY OTHER LEGAL THE- ORY, FOR INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LABOR CHARGES, RE- GARDLESS OF WHETHER TYCO FIRE PRODUCTS WAS INFORMED ABOUT THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES, AND IN NO EVENT SHALL TYCO FIRE PRODUCTS' LI- ABILITY EXCEED AN AMOUNT EQUAL TO THE SALES PRICE. Ordering Information Orders for the Solenoid Valves must include the description and Part Number (P/N). Solenois Valves: Specify: (Specify voltage), (Specify 175 or 250) psi pressure rating, Sole- noid Valve with (specify ordinary or hazardous) location enclosure, P/N (specify from Figure 1). Page 4 of 4 TFP2I8O TYCO FIRE PRODUCTS, 451 North Cannon Avenue, Lansdale, Pennsylvania 19446 tIlCe /Fire & Building / Products Technical Services: Tel: (800) 381-9312 / Fax: (800) 791-5500 Tyco Fire Products Model CV-IFR Riser Check Valve General Description The Tyco® Model CV-1FR Riser Check Valve is a compact and rugged swing- type unit that allows water flow in one direction and prevents flow in the op- posite direction. A resilient elastomer seal facing on the spring loaded clap- per ensures a leak tight seal and non- sticking operation. The Model CV-1FR Riser Check Valves are designed to minimize water hammer caused by flow reversal. The CV-1FR is furnished with grooved ends and can be installed using Grin- nell® Grooved Couplings or Grinnell Figure 71 Flange Adapters. The Model CV-1FR Riser Check Valves have been designed with a removable cover for ease of field maintenance. Valves in- stalled horizontally or inclined (flow up or down) are to be positioned with the cover facing up. Valves installed verti- cally may be positioned with flow up or down. The Model CV-1FR Riser Check Valve is provided with threaded outlets for pressure gauges and a drain connec- tion to facilitate their use in wet type automatic sprinkler system risers. They provide a more compact and econom- ical alternative to an alarm check valve where a water motor alarm is not re- quired. Provisions must be made for a local alarm, using an approved flow switch (not included). The Model CV-1 FR Riser Check Valves are a redesig nation for the Central Fig- ure 590FR and Grinnell Figure 590FR. NOTICE The Mode! CV-1FR Riser Check Valve described herein must be installed and maintained in compliance with this document and with the applica- ble standards of the National Fire Pro- tection Association, in addition to the standards of any authorities having ju- risdiction. Failure to do so may impair the performance of this device. The owner is responsible for maintain- ing their fire protection system and de- vices in proper operating condition. The installing contractor or manufac- turer should be contacted with any questions. Technical Data Sizes- Inches I DN 2t012/DN50toDN300 Maximum Working Pressure 300 psi (20,7 bar) Approvals UL, FM, and C-UL. Protective Coating Valve assembly Non-lead paint Installation The Model CV-1 FR Riser Check Valves are to be installed in accordance with the following instructions: Step 1. The arrow cast on the Body must point in the direction of the flow. Step 2. Valves installed vertically may be positioned with the flow up or down. Step 3. Valves installed horizontally or inclined (flow up or down) are to be positioned with the Cover facing up. Step 4. Grooved end pipe couplings used with the CV-1F must be installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Care and Maintenance The owner is responsible for the in- spection, testing, and maintenance of their fire protection system and devic- es in compliance with this document, as well as with the applicable stan- dards of the National Fire Protection Association (e.g., NFPA 25), in addition to the standards of any authority hav- ing jurisdiction. The installing contrac- tor or product manufacturer should be contacted relative to any questions. Any impairments must be immediately corrected. Automatic sprinkler systems should be inspected, tested, and maintained by a qualified Inspection Service in accor- dance with local requirements and/or national codes. After placing a fire protection system in service, notify the proper authorities and advise those responsible for mon- itoring proprietary and/or central sta- tion alarms. Page 1 of 6 JULY, 2008 TFP950 Page 2 of 6 TFP95O Nominal Pipe Size Nominal Dimensions- Inches (mm) Cover Bolt Torq. Lbs.-ft. Approx. Weight Lbs. ANSI O.D. K Inches Inches A B C D E F J NPT .. (Nm) (kg) DN (mm) ( 2.375 6.75 4.38 2.55 2.57 3.25 15 9.0 1 18 9.0 (60,3) (171,5) (111,3) (64,8) (65,3) (82,3) (21) (4,5) (25) (4,5) 21/2 2.875 8.00 5.42 3.41 3.09 3.88 39 10.0 1-1/4 . 39 10.0 DN65 1 (73,0) (203,2) (136,7) (86,6) (78,5) (98,6) (54) (4,5) (54) (4,5) - 3.000 8.00 5.42 3.41 3.09 3.88 39 10.0 1-1/4 39 10.0 DN65 (76,1) (203,2) (136,7) (86,6) (78,5) (98,6) (54) (4,5) (54) (4,5) 3 3.500 8.38 5.76 3.60 3.31 3.88 39 11.0 1-1/4 39 11.0 DN80 (88,9) (212,9) (146,3) (91,4) (84,1) (98,6) (54) (5,0) (54) (5,0) 4 4.500 9.63 6.74 4.61 3.63 4.53 39 25.0 2 50 25.0 DN100 (114,3) (245,6) (171,2) (117,1) (92,2) (115,4) (54) (11,3) (69) (11,3) - 5.500 10.50 7.50 5.29 4.13 4.90 39 29.0 2 39 29.0 DN125 (139.7) (266,7) (190,5) (134,4) (104,9) (124,5) (54) (13,2) (54) (13,2) 5 5.563 10.50 7.50 5.29 4.13 4.90 39 29.0 2 39 29.0 DN125 (141,3) (266,7) (190,5) (134,4) (104,9) (124,5) (54) (13,2) (54) (13,2) - 6.500 11.50 8.05 5.75 4.50 5.00 60 47.0 2 60 47.0 DN150 (165.1) (292,1) (204,4) (146,1) (114,3) (127,0) (82) (21,3) (82) (21,3) 6 6.625 11.50 8.05 5.75 4.50 5.00 60 47.0 2 60 47.0 DN150 (168,3) (292,1) (204,4) (146,1) (114,3) (127,0) (82) (21,3) (82) (21,3) 8 8.625 14.00 10.25 7.75 5.62 5.45 120 66.0 2 120 66.0 DN200 (219,1) (355,6) (260,4) (196,9) (142,7) (138,4) (164) (30,0) (164) (30,0) 10 10.750 18.00 13.00 10.21 6.38 7.50 120 109.7 130 109.7 DN250 (273,1) (457,2) (330,2) (259,3) (162,1) (190,5) (164) (49,4) 2 (178) (49,4) 12 12.750 21.0 14.28 11.31 7.26 7.62 120 151.0 2 130 151.0 DN300 (323,9) (533,4) (362,7) (287,2) (184,4) (193,5) (164) (68,0) (178) (68,0) FIGURE 1 NOMINAL DIMENSIONS MODEL CV-IFR RISER CHECK VALVES Clapper 2-8" Clapper 10" -12" 17 Rivet I Steel I 2 18 Spacer Steel Stainless Page 4 of 6 TFP950 0 C B D - E - FIGURE4 V NOMINAL DIMENSIONS RISER CHECK VALVE WITH TRIM COMPONENTS (AVAILABLE FOR 2"(DN5O) - 8"(DN200) VALVES ONLY) Nominal Pipe Size Nominal Dimensions- Inches (mm) - ANSI O.D. E Inches Inches A B C D Inches DN (mm) NPT 2 2.375 6.75 6.50 3.25 10.13 1 DN50 (60,3) (171,5) (165,1) (82,6 (257,2) 2/2 2.875 8.00 6.56 3.88 11.13 1-1/'4 DN65 (73,0) (203,2) (166,7) (98,6) (282,6) - - 8.00 6.56 3.88 11.13 1-1/4 DN65 (76,1) (203,2) (166,7) (98,6) (282,6) 3 3.500 8.37 6.81 3.88 11.13 1-1/4 DNBO (88,9) (212,6) (173,0 (98,6) (282,6) 4 4.500 9.63 7.75 3.88 13.25 2 DN100 (114,3) (244,6) (196,9) (98,6) (336,6) - 10.50 8.25 5.00 13.81 2 DN125 (139,7) (266,7) (209,6) (127,0) (350,8) 5 5.563 10.50 8.25 5.00 13.81 2 DN125 (141,3) (266,7) (209,6) (127,0) (350,8) -- - 11.50 8.56 5.00 14.13 2 DN150 (165,1) (292,1) (2175) (127,0)) (358,8) V 6 6.625 11.50 8.56 5.00 14.13 2 DN150 (168,3) (292,1) (2175) (127,0) (358,8) 8 8.625 14.00 9.75 5.50 15.25 2 DN200 (219,1) (355,6) (247,7) (139,7) (387,4) TFP95O Page 5 of 6 P/N 59-591-1-020 Riser Check Valve Size 2 Inch (DN50) NO. DESCRIPTION QTY. P/N 1 300 psi/ 2000kPa Water Pressure Gauge . . 2 92-343-1-005 2 1/4 Gauge Test Valve . . 2 46-005-1-002 3 1/4 Plug .............2 CH 4 1' Angle Valve .........1 46-048-1-006 5 1/4 x2 Nipple ........1 CH 6 1/4 x5 Nipple ........1 CH 7 1' x3' Nipple ..........1 CH P/N 59-591-1-030 Riser Check Valve Sizes 2-1/2 (DN65); 76,1 mm; 3' (DN80) NO. DESCRIPTION QTY. P/N 1 300 psi/ 2000 kPa Water Pressure Gauge . . 2 92-343-1-005 2 1/4 Gauge Test Valve . . 2 46-005-1-002 3 1/4 Plug .............2 CH 4 1-1/4 Angle Valve ......1 46-048-1-007 5 1/4' x2' Nipple ........1 CH 6 1/4'x5' Nipple ........1 CH 7 1-1/4' x3' Nipple.......1 CH P/N 59-591-1-080 Riser Check Valve Sizes 4' (DN100); 139,7 mm; 5' (DN125); 165,1 mm; 6' (DN150); 8 (DN200) NO. DESCRIPTION CITY. P/N 1 300 psi/ 2000kPa Water Pressure Gauge . . 2 92-343-1-005 2 1/4' Gauge Test Valve . . 2 46-005-1-002 3 1/4 Plug .............2 CH 4 2' Angle Valve .........1 46-048-1-009 5 1/4 x2 Nipple ........1 CH 6 1/4' x5' Nipple ........1 CH 7 2' x 3' Nipple ..........1 CH NOTES: All Fittings and Nipples are galvanized (Standard Order). CH: Common Hardware. MAIN DRAIN VALVE (NORMALLY CLOSED) SUPPLY PRESSURE GAUGE FIGURE 5 MODEL CV-1FR RISER CHECK VALVE TRIM PARTS LIST Page 6 of 6 TFP95O Limited Warranty Products manufactured by Tyco Fire & Building Products (TFBP) are war- ranted solely to the original Buyer for ten (10) years against defects in mate- rial and workmanship when paid for and properly installed and maintained under normal use and service. This warranty will expire ten (10) years from date of shipment by TFBP. No warran- ty is given for products or components manufactured by companies not af- filiated by ownership with TFBP or for products and components which have been subject to misuse, improper in- stallation, corrosion, or which have not been installed, maintained, modified or repaired in accordance with applicable Standards of the National Fire Protec- tion Association, and/or the standards of any other Authorities Having Juris- diction. Materials found by TFBP to be defective shall be either repaired or re- placed, at TFBP's sole option. TFBP neither assumes, nor authorizes any person to assume for it, any other ob- ligation in connection with the sale of products or parts of products. TFBP shall not be responsible for sprinkler system design errors or inaccurate or incomplete information supplied by Buyer or Buyer's representatives. In no event shall TFBP be liable, in contract, tort, strict liability or under any other legal theory, for incidental, indirect, special or consequential dam- ages, including but not limited to labor charges, regardless of whether TFBP was informed about the possibility of such damages, and in no event shall TFBP's liability exceed an amount equal to the sales price. The foregoing warranty is made in lieu of any and all other warranties, ex- oress or imolied, including warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. This limited warranty sets forth the ex- clusive remedy for claims based on failure of or defect in products, materi- als or components, whether the claim is made in contract, tort, strict liability or any other legal theory. This warranty will apply to the full ex- tent permitted by law. The invalidity, in whole or part, of any portion of this warranty will not affect the remainder. Ordering Procedure The Model CV-1 FR Riser Check Valves: Specify: (specify size) Model CV-1FR Check Valve, P/N (specify) (DN50) Valves ..............59-590-1-020 2-1/2" (DN65) Valves ...........59-590-1-025 DN65 (76,1 mm) Valves..........59-590-1-076 (DN80) Valves ..............59-590-1-030 (DN100) Valves..............59-590-1-040 DN125 (139,7) Valves ...........59-590-1-139 (DN125) Valves..............59-590-1-050 DN150 (165,1) Valves ...........59-590-1-165 (DN150) Valves..............59-590-1-060 8" (DN200) Valves .............59-590-1-080 10" (DN250) Valves.............59-590-1-100 12" (DN300) Valves ............59-590-1-120 The Model CV-1 FR Riser Check Valve Trim: Specify: (specify size) Model CV- 1FR Check Valve Trim Assembly, P/N (specify) (DN50) Valves ............... 59-591-1-020 2-1/2" (DN65) Valves ...........59-591-1-030 DN65 (76,11 mm) Valves ..........59-591-1-030 (DN80) Valves ..............59-591-1-030 (DN100) Valves..............59-591-1-080 0N125 (139,7) Valves ...........59-591-1-080 (0N125) Valves..............59-591-1-080 DN150 (165,1) Valves ...........59-591-1-080 (DN150) Valves..............59-591-1-080 8" (DN200) Valves .............59-591-1-080 Replacement Valve Parts Specify: (specify description) for use with (specify size) Model CV-1FR Check Valve, P/N (specify) (DN50) Valves Cover Gasket ...................976-705-01 Clapper Facing ..................976-709-01 2-1/2" (DN65) Valves Cover Gasket ...................975-618-01 Clapper Facing ..................975-621-01 (DN80) Valves Cover Gasket ...................975-618-01 Clapper Facing ..................975-491-01 (DN100) Valves Cover Gasket ...................975-120-01 Clapper Facing..................975-003-01 (DN125) Valves Cover Gasket ...................975-120-01 Clapper Facing..................975-219-01 (DNI50) Valves Cover Gasket ...................975-218-01 Clapper Facing..................975-006-01 8" (DN200) Valves Cover Gasket ...................975-479-01 Clapper Facing..................975-463-01 10" (DN250) Valves Cover Gasket ...................976-000-01 Clapper Facing ..................975-977-01 12" (DN300) Valves Cover Gasket ...................976-472-01 Clapper Facing ..................976-474-01 0 2008 TYCO FIRE & BUILDING PRODUCTS, 451 North Cannon Avenue, Lansdale, Pennsylvania 19446 March 14, 2008 Sprinkler 41a N I I(I F1G MicrofastHP®QUICK I RESPONSE PENDENT I SPRINKLERS I The Viking Corporation, 210 N Industrial Park Road, Hastings Ml 49058 Telephone: 269-945-9501 Technical Services 877-384-5464 Fax: 269-945-4495 Email: techsvcsvikingcorp.com DESCRIPTION Viking Microfast® and MicrofastHP® Quick Response Pendent Sprinklers are small, thermosensitive, glass-bulb spray sprinklers available in several different finishes and temperature ratings and K-Factors to meet design requirements. The special Polyester and Teflon® coatings can be used in decorative applications where colors are desired. In addition, these coatings have been investigated for installation in corrosive at- mospheres and are cULus listed as corrosion resistant as indicated in the Approval Chart. (Note: FM Global has no approval classification for Teflon® and Polyester coat- ings as corrosion resistant.) LISTINGS AND APPROVALS cULus Listed: Category VNIV FM Approved: Class 2020 NYC Approved: Calendar Number 219-76-SA and MhA 89-92-, volume lb ABS Certified: Certificate 04-H5407984C-PDA VdS Approved: Certificate G4040095, G4040097, G4060056, G4060057, G4880045, G4930038, and G4980021 LPC Approved: Ref. No. 096e103 and 096e104 CE Certified: Standard EN 12259-1, EC-certificate of conformity 0832-CPD-2001, 0832-CPD-2003, 0786-CPD-40130, and 0786-C PD-40 170 MED Certified: Standard EN 12259-I, EC-certificate of conformity 0832-MED-1003 and 0832-MED-1008 NOTE: Other International approval certificates are available upon request. Refer to the Approval Chart on page 41d and Design Criteria on page 41e for cULus and FM approval requirements that must be followed. TECHNICAL DATA Specifications: Available since 1987. Minimum Operating Pressure: 7 psi (0.5 bar) Maximum Working Pressure: Sprinklers 12282 and 12290 are rated for use with water working pressures ranging from the minimum 7 psi (0.5 bar) up to 250 psi (17 bar) for high-pressure systems. High-pres- sure (HP) sprinklers can be identified by locating "250" stamped on the deflector. All other Part Nos. not mentioned above are rated to a maximum 175 psi (12 bar) wwp. Factory tested hydrostatically to 500 psi (34.5 bar) Testing: U.S.A. Patent No. 4,831,870 Thread size: Refer to the Approval Chart Nominal K-Factor: Refer to the Approval Chart Glass-bulb fluid temperature rated to -65 °F (-55 °C) Overall Length: Refer to the Approval Chart Viking Technical Data may be found on The Viking Corporation's Web site at http:llwww.vikinggroupinc.com. The Web site may include a more recent edition of this Technical Data Page. Material Standards: Frame Casting: Brass UNS-C84400 Deflector: Phosphor Bronze UNS-051000 or Copper UNS-C 19500 for Sprinklers 06662B, 06666B, 06765B, and 12104. Copper UNS-C 19500 for Sprinkler 12282. Brass UNS-C26000 for all other Sprinklers. Bushing (for Sprinklers 06718B, 06720B, and 12290): Brass UNS-C36000 Bulb: Glass, nominal 3 mm diameter Belleville Spring Sealing Assembly: Nickel Alloy, coated on both sides with Teflon Tape Screw: Brass UNS-C36000 Pip Cap and Insert Assembly: Copper UNS-C11000 and Stainless Steel UNS-530400 Pip Cap Attachment: Brass UNS-C36000 Ejector Spring (for Sprinkler 12104): Stainless Steel Form No. F_081296 Replaces page 41a-f, dated October 12, 2007. (Added LPCB Approval and updated CE Approval for Sprinkler 0666613, Added Dry System note in approval chart for Small Orifice.) Sprinkler 41 b March 14, 2008 MICROFAST® AND 4,J I FJ l:II[U.7M MicrofastHP® QUICK RESPONSE PENDENT SPRINKLERS The Viking Corporation, 210 N Industrial Park Road, Hastings Ml 49058 Telephone: 269-945-9501 Technical Services 877-384-5464 Fax: 269-945-4495 Email: techsvcs@vikingcorp.com For Teflon® Coated Sprinklers: Belleville Spring-Exposed, Screw-Nickel Plated, Pip Cap-Teflon® Coated For Polyester Coated Sprinklers: Belleville Spring-Exposed Ordering Information: (Also refer to the current Viking price list.) Order Microfast® and MicrofastHP® Quick Response Pendent Sprinklers by first adding the appropriate suffix for the sprinkler fin- ish and then the appropriate suffix for the temperature rating to the sprinkler base part number. Finish Suffix: Brass = A, Chrome-Enloy® = F, White Polyester = M-/W, Black Polyester = M-IB, and Black Teflon® = N Temperature Suffix (°F/°C): 135°/68° =A, 155°/68° = B, 175°I79° = D, 200°/93° = E, and 286°/141° = G For example, sprinkler VK302 with a 1/2" thread, Brass finish and a 155 °F/68 "C temperature rating = Part No. 06662BAB Available Finishes And Temperature Ratings: Refer to Table 1 Accessories: (Also refer to the "Sprinkler Accessories" section of the Viking data book.) Sprinkler Wrenches: Standard Wrench: Part No. 10896W/B (available since 2000). Wrench for coated and/or recessed sprinklers: Part No. 12144W/B (available since 2003) NOTE: RECESSED PENDENT SPRINKLERS WITH PROTECTIVE CAPS MUST USE WRENCH 12144W/B. **A /" ratchet is required (not available from Viking). Sprinkler Cabinets: Six-head capacity: Part No. 01724A (available since 1971) Twelve-head capacity: Part No. 01725A (available since 1971) INSTALLATION Refer to appropriate NFPA Installation Standards. OPERATION During fire conditions, the heat-sensitive liquid in the glass bulb expands, causing the glass to shatter, releasing the pip cap and sealing spring assembly. Water flowing through the sprinkler orifice strikes the sprinkler deflector, forming a uniform spray pattern to extinguish or control the fire. INSPECTIONS, TESTS AND MAINTENANCE Refer to NFPA 25 for Inspection, Testing and Maintenance requirements. AVAILABILITY The Viking Microfast'® and MicrofastHP® Quick Response Pendent Sprinklers are available through a network of domestic and international distributors. See The Viking Corporation web site for the closest distributor or contact The Viking Corporation. GUARANTEE For details of warranty, refer to Viking's current list price schedule or contact Viking directly. Wrench Flats Protective'' Sprinkler Cap 10896 (D Figure 1: Standard Sprinkler Wrench 10896W/B Fil F'. 4 _<--,---- ---- -i Li ------Li EEA 1/2° ratchet is required (not available from Viking). Ii - Sprinkler Wrench 12144W/BEw for installing coated and/or recessed pendent sprinklers with protective caps Carefully slide the wrench sideways around the protective cap, ensuring engage- ment with the sprinkler wrench flats. March 14, 2008 NlKjw4j Sprinkler 41c MicrofastHP® QUICK RESPONSE PENDENT SPRINKLERS The Viking Corporation, 210 N Industrial Park Road, Hastings Ml 49058 Telephone: 269-945-9501 Technical Services 877-384-5464 Fax: 269-945-4495 Email: techsvcs@vikingcorp.com V.I:1I SPRINKLER Ximurn mblen olor .V~e — ,uonM~ TempeU Ordinary 135 °F (57 °C) 100 OF (38 °C) Orange Ordinary 155 °F (68 °C) 100 OF (38 °C) Red Intermediate 175°F(79°C) 150°F(65°C) Yellow (Intermediate) (200°F(93°C)) (150°F(65 OC)) (Green) High 286°F(141°C) 225 'IF (107°C) Blue Sprinkler Finishes: Brass, Chrome-Enloy®, White Polyester, Black Polyester, and Black Teflon® Corrosion-ResistantCoatings4:White Polyester,BlackPolyester,andBlackTeflon® Footnotes The sprinkler temperature rating is stamped on the deflector. 2 Based on NFPA-13. Other limits may apply, depending on fire loading, sprinkler location, and other requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction. Refer to specific installation standards. The corrosion-resistant coatings have passed the standard corrosion test required by the approving agencies indicated on pages 41d. These tests cannot and do not represent all possible corrosive environments. Prior to installation, verify through the end-user that the coatings are compatible with or suitable for the proposed environment. For automatic sprinklers, the coatings indicated are applied to the exposed exterior surfaces only. Note that the spring is exposed on sprinklers with Polyester and Teflon® coatings. Figure 2: Wrench 12144W/B for Coated and/or Recessed Pendent Sprinklers Sprinkler 41 d March 14, 2008 MICROFAST® AND I MicrofastHP® QUICK sJII(JIIGj l:II[u.7M RESPONSE PENDENT SPRINKLERS The Viking Corporation, 210 N Industrial Park Road, Hastings MI 49058 Telephone: 269-945-9501 Technical Services 877-384-5464 Fax: 269-945-4495 Email: techsvcsvikingcorp.com rov :2 ________ Nominal Overall Listings and Approvals3 Sprinkler Thread SizJ Base SIN K-Factor Length (Refer also to Design Criteria on page 41e.) Part No.' NPT BSP U.S. metric2 Inches mm I cULus4 FM- I NYC'- VdS LPCB I CE I Standard Orifice (06662B) VK302) (15 mm " I I(c-I Large Orifice 06666B VK352 3/4" 20 mm 80 115.2 2-3/8" 60 AiX, BIY A2X, B2Y AiX, B1Y - A3X C313 - 12104 VK352 3/4" 20 mm 8.0 115.2 2-1/4" 58 - -- -- G3 -- - - 06765B VK352 1/2" 15 mm 8.0 115.2 2-3/8" 60 AiX, B1Y - AiX, B1Y A3 -- -- - Small Orifice' 06718B10 VK329 1/2" 15 mm 28 40.3 2-3/16 56 AiX, B1Y A2X A1X, B1Y -- -- -- - 06720B'° VK331 1/2" 15 mm 42 60.5 2-1/4" 58 AiX, B1Y - AIX, BIY - -- -- - 06932B VK331 -- 10 mm 4.2 60.5 2-3/8" 60 -- -- -- A3 -- G214 - Maximum 250 PSI (17 bar) WWP Standard Orifice Sprinkler Thread Size Nominal Overall Listings and Approvals3 Base SIN K-Factor Length (Refer also to Design Criteria onpage 41e.) Part No' NPT BSP U.S. melric2 Inches mm cULus4 FM NYC" VdS LPCB 12282 VK317 1/2" 15 mm 5.6 80.6 2-1/4" 58 AiX, B1Y - AiX - -- - - Maximum 250 PSI (17 bar) WWP Small Orifice9 1229010 VK342 1 1/2" 115 mm 1 2.8 1 40.3 2-3/16" 56 1 AiX, B1Y - AiX - -- - I - Approved Temperature Ratings Approved Escutcheons A 135°F (57 "C), 155°F (68 °C), 175 °F (79 "C), 200°F (93 "C), Approved Finishes X - Standard surface-mounted escutcheon or B - 135 "F (57 155"F (68 °C), 175 "F (79 °C), and 200 "F (93 "C) - Brass, Chrome-Enloy®, White Poly- the Viking Microfast® Model F-i Adjustable C - 155 °F (68 °C), 175 °F (79 °C), 200 °F (93 °C), and 286 °F ester78, Black Polyester78, and Black Escutcheon12 (141 "C) Teflon®7 Y - Standard surface-mounted escutcheon or D - 135 °F (57 °C), 155 "F (68 "C), 175 "F (79 °C), and 286 "F 2 - Brass and Chrome-Enloy® the Viking Microfast® Model F-i Adjustable (141 °C) 3-Brass, Chrome-Enloy®, White Polyester8, Escutcheon 12 or recessed with the 'liking : and Black Polyester8 Micromatic® Model E-1 or E-2 Recessed Escutcheon °F "C) G - 155 (68 Footnotes 1 Base part number is shown. For complete part number, refer to Viking's current price schedule. 2 Metric K-factor measurement shown is when pressure is measured in Bar. When pressure is measured in kPa, divide the metric K-factor shown by 10.0. This table shows the listings and approvals available at the time of printing. Check with the manufacturer for any additional approvals. Listed by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. for use in the U.S. and Canada. FM Approved for use only in wet-pipe sprinkler systems (or preaction systems qualifying as wet systems) for protection of occupancies described in the Factory Mutual Engineering and Research Loss Prevention Data Sheets and Technical Advisory Bulletins. 6 Accepted for use, City of New York Board of Standards and Appeals, Calendar Number 219-76-SA. cULus Listed as corrosion resistant. Other colors are available on request with the same Listings and Approvals as the standard colors. Listings and Approvals limited to Light Hazard Occupancies where allowed by the installation standards being applied, with hydraulically calculated wet syste only. Exception: 4.2K sprinklers may be installed on hydraulically calculated dry pipe systems where piping is corrosion resistant or internally galvanized. 10The sprinkler orifice is bushed. "Accepted for use, City of New York Department of Buildings, MEA Number 89-92-E, Vol. 16. 12The Viking Microfast® Model F-i Adjustable Escutcheon is considered a surface-mounted escutcheon because it does not allow the fusible element of the sprinkler to be recessed behind the face of the wall or ceiling. 13 ¶ Certified, Standard EN 12259-1, EC-certificate of conformity 0832-CPD-2001 and 0832-CPD-2003. 14 ( Certified, Standard EN 12259-1, EC-certificate of conformity 0786-CPD-40130 and 0786-CPD-40170. 154 MED Certified, Standard EN 12259-1, EC-certificate of conformity 0832-MED-1003 and 0832-MED-1008. March 14, 2008 Sprinkler 41e uvipr.jr, I priij TECHNICAL DATA MicrofastHP® QUICK I 'JIKING RESPONSE PENDENT I SPRINKLERS I The Viking Corporation, 210 N Industrial Park Road, Hastings Ml 49058 Telephone: 269-945-9501 Technical Services 877-384-5464 Fax: 269-945-4495 Email: techsvcsvikingcorp.com V!JWs2 FIEpg _ cULus Listing Reguirements: Microfast® and MicrofastHP® Quick Response Pendent Sprinklers are cULus Listed as indicated in the Approval Chart for installation in accordance with the latest edition of NFPA 13 for standard spray sprinklers. Designed for use in Light and Ordinary Hazard occupancies (exception: small orifice sprinklers are limited to Light Hazard where allowed by the installation standards being applied, with hydraulically calculated wet systems only). The sprinkler installation rules contained in NFPA 13 for standard spray pendent sprinklers must be followed. FM Anoroval Reauirements: For installation in accordance with the latest applicable FM Loss Prevention Data Sheets (including 2-8N) and Technical Advisory Bulletins. FM Global Loss Prevention Data Sheets and Technical Advisory Bulletins contain guidelines relating to, but not limited to: minimum water supply requirements, hydraulic design, ceiling slope and obstructions, minimum and maximum allowable spacing, and deflector distance below the ceiling. NOTE: The FM installation guidelines may differ from cULus and/or NFPA criteria. IMPORTANT: Always refer to Bulletin Form No. F_091699 - Care and Handling of Sprinklers. Also refer to page QRI-3 for general care, installation, and maintenance information. Viking sprinklers are to be installed in ac- cordance with the latest edition of Viking technical data, the appropriate standards of NFPA, FM Global, LPCB, APSAD, VdS or other similar organizations, and also with the provisions of governmental codes, ordinances, and standards, whenever applicable. Ceiling Opening Size 2-5/16' (58.7 mm) minimum 2-1/8' 2-1/2' (63.5 mm) maximum (54 mm) 1/2' NPT (15 mm) 2-1/4' 1-5/8' (58 mm) (41 mm) Pendent Sprinkler 06662B (VK302) 1-3/4' (44.5 mm) Installed with a standard 1/8' surface- mounted escutcheon. f\..__J 2' I HI 1-1/2' (38.1 mm) (50.8 mm) \ik ) ,11/ Minimum Maximum Installed with a Microf'ast Model F-i Adjustable Escutcheon Figure 3: Sprinkler VK302 Dimensions with a Standard Escutcheon and the Model F-I Adjustable Escutcheon Sprinkler 41f March 14, 2008 The Viking Corporation, 210 N Industrial Park Road, Hastings Ml 49058 Telephone: 269-945-9501 Technical Services 877-384-5464 Fax: 269-945-4495 Email: techsvcs@vikingcorp.com I 2-1/8" Ceiling Opening Size: 2-1/8" (54 mm) 2-5/16" (58,7 mm) minimum I(54 mm) I 2-1/2" (63,5 mm) maximum TF~M 'n (2 um Minimum - - \q Minimum 21/(2a6mm) Maximum Installed with a Micromatic Model E-1 Recessed Escutcheon Installed with a thread on Model E-2 Recessed Escutcheon Figure 4: Sprinkler VK302 Dimensions with the Model E-1 and E-2 Recessed Escutcheons Form No. F_081296 Replaces page 41a-f, dated October 12, 2007. (Added LPCB Approval and updated CE Approval for Sprinkler 0666613, Added Dry System note in approval chart for Small Orifice.) FireLock® Butterfly Valve SERIES 705W WITH WEATHERPROOF ACTUATOR The Series 705W butterfly valve features an approved weatherproof actuator housing approved for indoor or outdoor use. It has a ductile iron body and disc with EPDM disc coating. The body is coated with a heat fused polyphenylene sulfide blend to meet FM requirements. Designed for fire protection services only. Series 705W valve is UL Listed and FM Approved for 300p5i/2065kPa service. The Series 705W is also LPCB approved for 20 Bar and VdS approved for 16 Bar service. Contact Victaulic for details of agency approvals. WEATHERPROOF ACTUATOR Pre-wired supervisory switches that monitor the valve in the fully open position for all sizes. OPTIONAL SUPPLY-SIDE TAP Series 705W valves are available with a ½' NPT supply side tap designed to allow direct water supply connection to Victaulic FireLock actuated fire protection valves. See separate drawings below. This is an optional feature and must be clearly noted on all orders. MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS Body: Ductile iron conforming to ASTM A-536, coated with polyphenylene sulfide blend. Disc: Ductile iron conforming to ASTM A-536, various grades, EPDM coated. Disc Coating: Grade "E" EPDM EPDM (Green color code). Temperature range —30°F to +230°F/-34°C to +110°C. Recommended for cold and hot water service within the specified temperature range plus a variety of dilute acids, oil-free air and many chemical services. UL classified in accordance with ANSI/NSF 61 for cold +86°F/+30°C and hot +180°F/+82°C potable water service. NOT RECOMMENDED FOR PETROLEUM SERVICES. Stem Bearings: Teflon impregnated fiberglass with stainless steel backing. Stem Bearing Nuts: Type 416 Stainless Steel. Tap Plug: Carbon steel, plated. 0-Ring: EPDM Bracket: Carbon steel, painted. Actuator: 21/2 - 8/65 - 200mm: Bronze traveling nut on a steel lead screw, in a ductile iron housing. 10— 12/250-300 mm: Steel worm and cast iron quadrant gear, in a cast iron housing. JOB/OWNER CONTRACTOR ENGINEER System No. Submitted By Spec Sect Para__________ Location Date Approved Date www.victaulic.com VICTAULIC IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF vICTAuLIC COMPANY. © 2008 vIcTAuLIC COMPANY. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.. REV_H JtauIic' 10.18_i IPS CARBON STEEL PIPE - FIRE PROTECTION VALVES 10. 18 FireLock® Butterfly Valve SERIES 705W WITH WEATHERPROOF ACTUATOR DIMENSIONS - C®U$ <a> ILPCBI 4 e Dimensions - inches/milli meters Apr, Wgt. • Each T 4.21 6.08 3.00 0.00 0.75 2½ 2,875 3.77 8.76 8.3 65 73.0 95.6 222.5 - 106.9 154.4 76.2 . 4.21 6.08 3.00 0.0 19.1 3.8 751 mm 3.000 3.77 8.76 0.00 I 0.75 8.3 76.1 95.6 222.5 - 106.9 154.4 76.2 0.0 19.1 3.8 3 3.500 3.77 9.40 0.08 4.21 6.08 3.00 0.00 0.75 8.9 80 88.9 4.500 95.6 4.63 238.8 2.0 106.9 154.4 76.2 0.0 J_ 0.73 19.1 4.0 14.9 4 10.84 0.07 6.01 6.98 3.00 1.13 100 114.3 117.6 275.3 1.8 152.7 177.3 76.2 18.5 28.7 6.8 1397 mm 5.500 139.7 5.88 149.4 12.38 314.5 0.43 10.9 6.01. 152.7 8.57 217.7 4.50 114.3 - - 21.0 9.5 5 5.563 5.88 12.38 0.43 6.01 8.57 4.50 21.0 125 141.3 149.4 314.5 13.41 t 10.9 152.7 217.7 114.3 - - 1.88 9.5 165.1 mm 6.500 5.88 1.00 7.51 9.32 4.50 1.60 26.5 165.1 149.4 340.6 25.4 -190.8 236.7 114.3 -40.6 47.8 12.0 6 6.625 5.88 13.41 1.00 7.51 9.32 4.50 1.60 1.88 26.5 150 168.3 149.4 340.5 25.4 190.8 236.7 114.3 40.6 47.8 12.0 8 8.625 5.33 1650 1.27 9.65 10.98 6.30 0.00 0.68 43.0 200 2191 135.4 6.40 419.1 32.3 245.1 278.9 160.0 0.0 • 17.3 19.5 10 10.750 19.14 1.72 12.20 16.19 9.00 80.0 250 273.0 162.6 486.2 43.7 309.9 411.2 228.6 - - 36.3 12 12.750 6.50 21.54 2.66 14.25 17.22 9.00 102.0 300 323.9 165.1 547.1 67.6 362.0 437.4 228.6 - - 46.3 On Centerline * These dimensions apply only to a Series 705W Butterfly Valve with a ½-inch NPT, supply-side tap To prevent rotation of valves. it is recommended that Series 705W be installed with Victaulic Style 07 Zero-Flex Style 005 FireLock, Style 009/009V FireLock EZ, or Style HP-70 Rigid Couplings. If Victaulic flexible couplings are used. additional support may be required. Valve must not be installed with disc in full open position. Disc must be partly closed so that no part is protruding beyond end of valve body. Victaulic grooved end butterfly valves are permitted for use with grooved end pipe (IPS) only. Not permitted for use with plain end (IPS) pipe. Series 705W valves are designed for ambient weather conditions as opposed to submersible service. I 11.111 iiiiuii KIEJII'II!IlII' 2½ - 4-INCH/65 - 100-MM SIZES 5 - 12-INCH/125 - 300-MM SIZES www.victaulic.com VICTAULIC IS REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF VICTAULIC COMPANY. © 2008 vicTAuLic COMPANY. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 1O.18_2 JtauIicr REV_H IPS CARBON STEEL PIPE FIRE PROTECTION VALVES 10.18 FireLock® Butterfly Valve SERIES 705W WITH WEATHERPROOF ACTUATOR DIMENSIONS - C(Y)uS ILPCBI 0026 "Sm 76.1 mm 3 80 4 3.000 76.1 3.500 88.9 4.500 j 3.77 95.6 3.77 95.6 4.63 I I 8.76 222.5 j 9.40 238.8 J - 0.08 2.0 0.07 , 1 4.21 106.9 4.21 106.9 6.01 6.08 154.4 6.08 6.98 154,j,__J,_,114.3 4.50 ,f 114.3 4.50 4.50 0.00 0.0 0.00 } 0.0 0.73 10.84 100 114.3 I ...L 1521 1773j_L3 U185 139.7mm 5.500 5.88 12.38 0.43 6.01 8.57 7.87 139.7 149.4 314.5 1 10.9 152.7 217.7 200 - 6 6.625 5.88 13.41 1.00 7.51 9.32 I 7.87 1.60 150 8 168.3 8.625 149.4 5.33 340.6 16.50 25.4 1.27 190.8 9.65 L I 236.7 10.98 ,L 200 7.87 40.6 0.00 200 2191 J 1354j 419iJ 323 - , _1_ L Z__j_Q 0.0 10 10.750 I 6.40 I 19.14 1.72 12.20 I 16.19 I 9.84 250 273.0 + .---_- 162.6 ------ 486.2 _._-.--__----- 43.7 309.9 I .+-.._-.---- 411.2 250 ._ - -. -- - + 12 12.750 6.50 21.54 2.66 14.25 17.22 9.84 300 323.9 165.1 547.1 67.6 • 362.0 437.4 250 - 0.75 8.3 19.1 i 3.8 0.75 8.9 19.1 - 1.13 - . 14.9 28.7 6.8 21.0 9.5 1.88 26.5 47.8 12.0 0.68 43.0 17.3 19.5 80.0 36.3 '1O2:O - 46.3 On Centerline * These dimensions apply only to a Series 705W Butterfly Valve with a ½-inch NPT, supply-side tap To prevent rotation of valves. it is recommended that Series 705W be installed with Victaulic Style 07 Zero-Flex. Style 005 FireLock, Style 009/009V FireLock EL or Style HP-70 Rigid Couplings. If Victaulic flexible couplings are used, additional support may be required. Valve must not be installed with disc in full open position. Disc must be partly closed so that no part is protruding beyond end of valve body. Victaulic grooved end butterfly valves are permitted for use with grooved end pipe (IPS) only. Not permitted for use with plain end (IPS) pipe. Series 705W valves are designed for ambient weather conditions as opposed to submersible service. V I I lUll 111111 76.1MM - 4-INCH/65 - 100-MM NOMINAL SIZES SO 1 IIUiIIII!IIII www.victaulic.com \ICTAULIC IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF viclAuLic COMPANY. © 2008 VICTAULIC COMPANY. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. REV_H 4tauiicr 10.183 IPS CARBON STEEL PIPE - FIRE PROTECTION VALVES 10.18 FireLock® Butterfly Valve SERIES 705W WITH WEATHERPROOF ACTUATOR PERFORMANCE The chart expresses the frictional resistance of Victaulic Series 705W in equivalent feet/meters of straight pipe. Size Size ______ ,; 2½ 2.875 5 1 651 mm 6.500 8 65 730 16 1651 25 76.1 mm 3.000 5 6 6.625 8 761 1.6 150 168.3 2.5 3 3.500 5 8 8.625 11 80 88.9 1.6 200 219.1 34 4 4.500 12 10 10.750 12 100 114.3 1 3.7 1 250 1 273.0 37 1397 mm 5 .500 12 12 12 .750 14 139.7 3.7 300 323.9 4.3 - 5 5.563 12 125 141.3 3.7 MAXIMUM WORKINGS PRESSURE RATINGS 1 Maximum Working Pressure by Agency 2½ 65 2.875 L 73.0 300 300 20 - 20 16 76.1 mm 3.000 76.1 d 300 3.500 300 20 16 3 80 88.9 300 4.500 300 20 16 4 100 114.3 300 139.7 - 300 20 - 16 139.7 mm 300 5.563 141.3 300 20 - 5 125 300 6.500 300 20 - 165.1 165.1 300 82 300 20 16 150 300 8 200 8.625 219.1 300 20 16 300 10 250 1750 273.0 300 - 300 16 300P200 3 00 12.750 9 300 16 www.victaulic.com jtauIic vICTAuLIc IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF vicTAuLic COMPANY. 0 2008 vicTAuLic COMPANY. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 10.18_4 REV IPS CARBON STEEL PIPE - FIRE PROTECTION VALVES 10.18 FireLock® Butterfly Valve SERIES 705W WITH WEATHERPROOF ACTUATOR PERFORMANCE C, values for flow of water at +60°F/+16°C with a fully open valve are shown in the table below. For additional details, contact Victaulic. Formulas for C, Values: AP = Where: 0= Flow (GPM) = Pressure Drop (psi) 0 = ç x ..J2 ç = Flow Coefficient Formulas for Ky Values: AP = 0' Where: (m K Q=Flow 0 = K x JAP AP = Pressure (bar) K = Flow Factor www.victaulic.com \,4'tauIiC vICTAuLIC IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF VICTAULIC COMPANY. © 2008 vICTAuLIC COMPANY. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. REV_H 10.185 IPS CARBON STEEL PIPE - FIRE PROTECTION VALVES 10.18 FireLock® Butterfly Valve SERIES 705W WITH WEATHERPROOF ACTUATOR SWITCH AND WIRING 1. The supervisory switch contains two, single pole, double throw, pre-wired switches. Switches are rated: 10 amps @ 125 or 250 VAC/60 Hz 0.50 amps @ 125 VDC 0.25 amps @ 250 VDC Switches supervise the valve in the "open" position. One switch has two #18 MTW wires per terminal, which permit complete supervision of leads (refer to diagrams and notes below). The second switch has one #18 MTW wire per terminal. This double circuit provides flexibility to operate two electrical devices at separate locations, such as an indicating light and an audible alarm, in the area that the valve is installed. A #14 MTW ground lead (green) is provided. Switch #1 = 51 For connection to the supervisory circuit of a UL Listed alarm control panel Switch #2 = S2 Auxiliary switch that may be connected to auxiliary devices, per the authority having jurisdiction Closed: (2) Blue { Normally Common: (2) Yellow Normally Closed: Blue with Orange Stripe Normally Open: Brown with Orange Stripe S2 { Common: Yellow with Orange Stripe AcTED FIRE ALARM CONTROL EASEL MEN O-OF-uNE RESISTOR OR NEXTINDICATOR SUPRIMSORY ORCUW C 5005CR coNrncrtc2mlc TOO AT 125 MED cOREOUFOCONNECTORS OSOVAC. OSAAT12S UDC, OUSAT25OADC LIII 52 U • BELL ME NUTS ri OR VOLTAGE SOURCE ZN Switch i:alaadspettertctlnal swltcha:lInd pertaec,lnal NOTE: The above diagram shows a connection between the common terminal (yellow - Si and yellow-with-orange stripe —S2) and the normally closed terminal (blue - Si and blue-with-orange stripe - S2). In this example, the indicator light and alarm will stay on until the valve is fully open. When the valve is fully open, the indicator light and alarm will go out. Cap off any unused wires (e.g. brown with orange stripe). Only Si (two leads per terminal) may be connected to the fire alarm control panel. The connection of the alarm switch wiring shall be in accordance with NFPA 72 and the auxiliary switch per NFPA 70 (NEC). www.victaulic.com JttauIiC VICTAULIC IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF vicTAuLic COMPANY. 2OI VICTAULIC COMPANY. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 10.18_6 REV_H SERIES 705W WITH WEATHERPROOF ACTUATOR WARRANTY Refer to the Warranty section of the current Price List or contact Victaulic for details. NOTE This product shall be manufactured by Victaulic or to Victaulic specifications. All products to be installed in accordance with current Victaulic installation/assembly instructions. Victaulic reserves the right to change product specifications. designs and standard equipment without notice and without incurring obligations. INSTALLATION Reference should always be made to the installation sheet included with the valve. Verify you have the latest revision by visiting our website at www.victaulic.com. Further reference can be found in the 1-100 Victaulic Field Installation Handbook. III IIIIIIHIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIUIII III WCAS-7H FF85 For complete contact information, visit www.victaulic.com 10.18 2466 REV H UPDATED 812008 Aic--tau-he vICTAuLIC IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF vIcTAuLIc COMPANY. ce 2008 VICTAULIC COMPANY. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 10.18 MODEL 1000 LI The AGF Manufacturing Inc. Model 1000 TESTANDRAIN Provides Both The Test Function And The Express Drain Function For A Wet Fire Sprinkler System. LI The Model 1000 Complies With All Requirements Of NFPA-13, NFPA-13R, And NFPA-13D. LI The Model 1000 TESTANDRAIN Is A Single Handle Ball Valve That Is Light Weight And Compact, Includes A Tamper Resistant Test Orifice, Integral Tamper Resistant Sight Glasses, And Is 300 PSI Rated. LI Available In A Full Range Of Sizes From 3/4" To 2' NPT & BSPT, With All Specifiable Orifice Sizes 3/8", 7/16", 1/2", 17/32,5/8" (ELO), & 3/4' (ESFR). LI The Orifice Size Is Noted On The Indicator Plate And The Valve Is Tapped For A Pressure Gauge. LI Locking Kit Available Which Provides Superior Vandal Resistance And Prevents Unintentional Alarm Activation. 0our New AUt0 Visit us on the Internet /4 at / - AVAViTFT1I.W'(.1.i1 10/00 3/411 in i 1/4" 1 1/2" 211 MATERIAL LIST PART: MATERIAL: HANDLE STEEL STEM ROD BRASS BALL C.R BRONZE BODY BRONZE VALVE SEAT IMPREGNATED TEFLON INDICATOR PLATE STEEL HANDLE LOCK SPRING STEEL PlAN VIEW FRONT ViEW!VER11CAL INSTALLATION FRONT VIEW/HORIZONTAL INSTALLATION ORIFICE SIZE AVAILABLE - 3/8, 7/16, 1/2, 17/32, ELO(5/8), ESFR(3/4) DIMENSIONS - INCHES FROM BRANCH GAUGE INLET PROVIDED STREET TO DRAIN STREET EL OR PIPE TO DRAIN RIGHT HAND/STRAIGHT INSTALLATION APPROVALS: D UL and ULC Listed Cl FM Approved except 3/4" U NYC-BSA NO. 720-87-SM Ii CA. State Fire Marshall SIZE A B C D E F G H 5 1/1611 128mm 1 11211 31.58mm 2 16" 55.65mm 3 '811 93.23mm 3 18" 85.88mm 1 13/1611 45.30mm 4 ',6' 111.12mm 6 3/8" 162.42mm if 5 1/1611 128mm 1 1/211 31.58mm 2 16" 55.65mm 3 18" 93.23mm 3 /" 85.88mm 1 13/1611 45.30mm 4 9/16" 117.12mm 63/811 162.42mm 1 1/41, I 5 '16" 137.10mm 1 11/1611 42.70mm 2 '16" 65.36mm 4 1/411 108.36mm 3 116" 82.84mm 1 15/16" 50.89mm 5 16" 141.39mm 5 1/2" 192.28mm i 1/21, u 6 116" 163.38mm 1 13'm" 45.50mm 3 1/411 81.50mm 5 1/1611 127mm 3 1" 99.18mm 2 8" 66.91mm 81/411 206.63mm 107/811 213.60mm 211 6 71jel 163.38mm 1 13/16" 45.50mm 3 1/4" 81.50mm 5 1/1611 127mm 3 '8" 99.18mm 2 8" 66.91mm 8 1/4" 206.63mm 10 '8" 273 60m "Available on 1 1/4 to 2" size units only. ""3/4" UL Listed only. UL LISTING EX4019 AGF MANUFACTURING INC. 100 Quaker Lane Malvern, PA 19355 USA Telephone: (610) 240-4900 Fax: (610) 240-4906 www.testandrain.com MADE IN U.S.A. JOB NAME: - ARCHITECT: ENGINEER: - CONTRACTOR: Component of State of California OSHPD Approved Seismic Restraints System .-•-, H FIG. 98 Dimensions Rod Max. Rec. Load Lbs. Size For Service Temp 650°F 3/8 730 1/2 1350 5/8 2160 3/4 3230 7/8 4480 Fig. 98- Rod Stiffener Fig. 98B - Rod Stiffener w/Break-off Bolt Head Size Range - Secures 3/8" thru 7/8" hanger rod Material - Carbon Steel Function - Secures channel to hanger rod for vertical seismic bracing. Approvals - Included in our Seismic Restraints Catalog approved by the State of California Office of Statewide Health Plannina and Development (OSHPD). For additional load, spacing and placement information relatina to OSHPD oroiects. olease refer to the TOLCO Seismic Restraint Systems Guidelines Finish - Electro Galvanized Note - Available in HDG finish or Stainless Steel materials. Order By - Figure number Fig. 99 - All Thread Rod Cut to Length Size Range - Secures 3/8" thru 7/8" rod in 1" increments Material - Carbon Steel Maximum Temperature - 750°F Finish - Plain Note - Available in Electro-Galvanized and HDG finish or Stainless Steel materials. Order By - Figure number, rod diameter, rod length and finish Fig. 100 - All Thread Rod Full Length Size Range - Secures 3/8" thru 11/2" rod in 10' lengths Material - Carbon Steel Maximum Temperature - 750°F Finish - Plain Note - Available in Electro-Galvanized and HDG finish or Stainless Steel materials. Order By - Figure number, rod diameter and finish Dimensions • Weights Max Rec. Load Lbs. Rod For Service Temps Approx. Size 650°F wt./100 1/4 240 12 3/8 730 29 1/2 1350 53 5/8 2160 84 3/4 3230 123 7/8 4480 169 1 5900 222 11/4 9500 360 11/2 13800 510 OFFICE/MANUFACTURING FACILITY • 1375 SAMPSON AVE. • CORONA, CA 92879 • PH: 951.737.5599 • FAX: 951.737.0330 CUSTOMER SERVICE • 800.786.5266 www.tolco.com 2" Fig. 200 - "Trimline" Adjustable Band Hanger Fig. 200R (Import) - "Trimline" Adjustable Band Hanger wlRetainer Ring C®US LISTED Size Range - 1/2 thru 8" pipe Material - Carbon Steel, Mu. Galvanized to G90 specifications Function - For fire sprinkler and other general piping purposes. Knurled swivel nut design permits hanger adjustment after installation. Features - (1/2 thru 2") Flared edges ease installation for all pipe types and protect CPVC plastic pipe from abrasion. Captured design keeps adjusting nut from separating with hanger. Hanger is eas- ily installed around pipe. (21/2 thru 8") Spring tension on nut holds it securely in hanger before installation. Adjusting nut is easily removed. Approvals - Underwriters' Laboratories listed (1/2 thru 8") in the USA (UL) and Canada (cUL) for steel and CPVC plastic pipe and Factory Mutual Engineering Approved (3/4" thru 8). Conforms to Federal Specifications WW-H-1 71 F, Type 10 and Manufacturers Standardization Society SP-69, Type 10. Maximum Temperature - 650°F Finish - Mil. Galvanized. Stainless Steel materials will be supplied with (2) hex nuts in place of a knurl nub. Order By - Figure number and pipe size Note - Figure 200R (import) with retainer ring and non-captured knurl nut. Dimensions • Weights Pipe Rod Size Max. Rec. Approx. Size Inch Metric A B Load Lbs. Wt./100 1/2 3/8 8mm or 10mm 31/8 2/8 400 11 3/4 3/8 8mm or 10mm 31/8 21/2 400 11 1 3/8 8mm or 10mm 3/8 2/8 400 12 11/4 3/8 8mm or 10mm 33/4 2/8 400 13 11/2 3/8 8mm or 10mm 3/8 2/8 400 14 2 3/8 8mm or 10mm 41/2 3 400 15 21/2 3/8 10mm 5/8 41/8 600 27 3 3/8 10mm 5/8 4 600 29 31/2 3/8 10mm 73/8 51/4 600 34 3/8 10mm 73/8 5 1000 35 1/2 12mm 91/8 61/4 1250 66 1/2 12mm 101/8 63/4 1250 73 1/2 12mm 131/8 83/4 1250 136 OFFICE/MANUFACTURING FACILITY • 1375 SAMPSON AVE • CORONA, CA 92879 • PH; 951.737.5599 • FAX; 951.737.0330 CUSTOMER SERVICE • 800 786.5266 wwwtolco.com H Fig. 113 - Standard Hex Nut Size Range - Size 1/4 thru 1112 Material - Carbon Steel Finish - Plain Note - Available in Electro-Galvanized and HDG finish or Stainless Steel materials. Order By - Figure number size and finish Dimensions • Weights Width Width Rod Across Across Approx. Size Flats Points Thickness Wtf100 1/4 7/16 1/2 7/32 .7 5/16 1/2 37/64 17/64 1.1 3/8 9/16 21/32 21/64 1.6 1/2 3/4 55/64 7/16 3.7 5/8 15/16 13/32 35/64 7.3 3/4 1½ 15A6 41/64 12.0 7/8 15A6 1/64 3/4 19.0 1 1½ 13/4 . 55/64 28.0 11/4 1/8 211/64 11A6 54.0 1½ 21/4 219/32 1%2 94.0 Fig. 115- Flat Washer Size Range - Size 1/4 thru 11/2 Material - Carbon Steel Finish - Plain Note - Available in Electro-Galvanized and HDG finish or Stainless Steel materials. Order By - Figure number size and finish Dimensions • Weights Rod Size Outside Diameter Approx. WtJ100 1/4 3/4 .7 5/16 1 1.5 3/8 1% 3.9 1/2 13/4 7.7 5/8 15A6 7.3 3/4 2 11.0 7/8 21/4 19.0 1 23/4 22.0 1¼ 3 26.0 1½ 31, 39.0 Fig. 114 - Heavy Hex Nut Size Range - Size 1/4 thru 11/2 Material - Carbon Steel Finish - Plain Note - Available in Electro-Galvanized and HDG finish or Stainless Steel materials. (n, Dimensions • Weights Width Width Rod Across Across Approx. Size Flats Points Thickness WtJ100 1/4 1/2 37/64 15/64 1.2 5/16 9/16 21/32 19/64 1.7 3/8 11/16 51/64 23/64 3.1 1/2 7/8 11/6 31/64 6.5 5/8 11/is 115/64 39/64 12.0 3/4 11/4 129/64 47/64 19.0 7/8 17/1 E; 121/32 55/64 30.0 1 15/8 1/8 63/64 43.0 11/4 2 25/16 V/32 79.0 11/2 23/8 23/4 115/32 131.0 Fig. 117- Lock Washer Size Range - Size 3/8 thru 3/4 bolt Material - Carbon Steel Finish - Plain Note - Available in Electro-Galvanized and HDG finish or Stainless Steel materials. Order By - Figure number size and finish Dimensions • Weights Rod Size Outside Diameter Approx. WtJ100 3/8 11/16 .6 1/2 7/8 1.3 5/8 11A6 2.4 3/4 1¼ 4.0 OFFICEIMANUFACTURING FACILITY • 1375 SAMPSON AVE. • CORONA, CA 92879 • PH: 951.737 5599 • FAX 951.737.0330 CUSTOMER SERVICE • 800.786.5266 www.tolco.com FI¼. I U I I'... I %.JI FIG. 70S F- I Fig. 70 - Steel Rod Coupling Fig. 7013 - Steel Reducing Rod Coupling Fig. 70S - Short Pattern Steel Rod Coupling Fig. 71 - Steel Window Rod Coupling Size Range - 1/4 thru 11/2 rod Material - Carbon Steel Function - Used for coupling two threaded rods together of equal or reduced rod sizes, with or without inspection hole. Finish - Electro-Galvanized Note - Available in HDG finish or Stainless Steel materials. Fig. 70 Dimensions • Weiohts Rod Max Rec. Approx. Size Length Load Lbs. Wt./100 1/4 7/8 240 2 5/16 13/4 300 13 3/8 1N 610 11 1/2 13/4 1130 11 5/8 21/8 1810 16 3/4 21/4 2710 27 7/8 21/2 3770 57 1 23/4 4960 70 11/8" - 11/2" - Consult factory for specifications Fig. 70113 Dimensions • Weights Rod Max Rec. Approx. Size Length Load Lbs. Wt./100 3/8x1/4 7/8 240 4 1/2x3/8 1V4 610 7 5/8x1/2 21/8 1130 14 314x5/8 21/4 1810 21 718x3/4 21/2 2710 40 Fig. 70S/Fig. 71 Dimensions • Weights Rod Max Rec. Approx. Size Length Load Lbs. WtJ100 3/8 11/8 610 4 1/2 11/4 1130 6 For rod sizes 5/8 to 1 - consult factory D OFFICE/MANUFACTURING FACILITY • 1375 SAMPSON AVE. • CORONA, CA 92879 • PH: 951.737.5599 • FAX: 951.737.0330 CUSTOMER SERVICE • 800.786.5266 wwwtolco.com Fig. 75 - Swivel Attachment CUS USIED Size Range - 3/8 Rod Attachment Material - Carbon Steel * Function - There are three recommended applications for this product: May be used as a Branch Line Restraint for structural attachment to anchor bolt, beam clamp, etc. May be used in a pitched or sloped roof application, to meet requirements of NFPA 13 (2002) Sec 9.1.2.5. May be used as an upper attachment with short hanger rod to omit seismic bracing (per UBC97). Approvals - Underwriters' Laboratories Listed in the USA (UL) and Canada (cUL) to support up to 4" pipe. Meets requirements of Uniform Building Code (UBC) 1997 Table 0, Section 3.B. Finish - Electro-Galvanized Order By - Figure number [ U I 4J WP1E May be used as a structural attachment component of a branch line restraint OFFICE/MANUFACTURING FACILITY • 1375 SAMPSON AVE. • CORONA, CA 92879 • PH; 951.737.5599 • FAX; 951.737.0330 CUSTOMER SERVICE • 800.786.5266 www.tolco.com TITEN HID® Rod Hanger - Simpson Strong-Tie Anchor Systems® Page 1 of SIMPSó www.simpsonanchors.com TITEN HD® ROD HANGER Concrete Threaded Rod Anchors . Information on this page has been updated since the printing of the 2009-2010 Anchor Systems Catalog. .. To view the specific changes made to this page in detail, see Catalog Changes and Corrections. The Titen HD® rod hanger is a high-strength screw anchor that provides a fast and convenient way to suspend threaded rod from concrete slabs and beams. The anchors high load capacity and ease of installation make it ideal for hanging pipes, equipment and fixtures in overhead applications. Unlike traditional drop-in anchors, installation requires no special tool or secondary selling process; just drill a hole and drive the anchor. The serrated cutting teeth and patented thread design enable the Titen HD Rod Hanger to be installed quickly and with significantly less effort when compared to other screw type anchors. New Design Features 318" Shank, Code-Listed for Cracked and Uncracked Concrete Applications Simpson Strong-Tie Anchor Systems® now offers two new sizes that feature a 318' shank and are code-listed by ICC-ES for cracked and uncracked concrete applications under the 2006 and 2009 IBC. FEATURES I Compatible with 1/4", 3/8" and 1/2" diameter threaded rod High load capacity as a result of the full length threads that undercut the concrete and effectively transfer load into the base material Specialized heat treating process creates high hardness at the tip to facilitate culling while the body remains ductile No special installation tools required. Holes can be drilled with a rotary hammer or hammer drill with standard ANSI- size bit. Anchors are installed with standard-size sockets. Less installation time translates to lower installed cost MATERIAL I Carbon steel, heat treated FINISH I Zinc plated INSTALLATION I See below. CODES I [CC-ES ESR-271 3 (PDF) (cracked and uncracked concrete) (THD372I2RH and THD50234RH) City of Los Angeles RR25741 (PDF) (cracked and uncracked concrete) (THD372I2RH and THD50234RH) Florida Statewide Product Approval FL1 1506.8 (THD372I2RH and THD50234RH) iHD50234RI' 1TED37212RH % tha hank) (% dia shank) U.S. Patent 5,674,035 & 6,623,228 Load Values: Strength Design Values: in Tension for Installations in Concrete Strength Design Values: in Tension for Installations in the Lower and Upper Flute of Normal-Weight or Sand-Lightweight Concrete through Metal Deck Allowable Stress Design (ASD) Values with 1/4" and 3/8" Shanks Tension Loads in Normal-Weight Concrete Documents: Anchor Catalog Section (PDF) lopsee Catalog Addendum section (PDF) mhtml:file:I/C :\Users\Chandra\Documents\Submittals\Sprinkler Materials\TITEN HD® Rod ... 1/21/13 :.-.°- - -.. '"oO - C" ". ' 0 _ C' •. • •• "• — o _____ TITEN HD® Rod Hanger Simpson Strong-Tie Anchor Systems® Page 2 of 3 Factory Mutual 3031136 (THD372I8RH and THD50234RH) . Factory Mutual 3035761 (THD372I2RH) IM The load tables list values based upon results from the most recent testing and may not reflect those in current code reports. Where code jurisdictions apply, consult the current reports for applicable load values. Product Submittal (PDF) Titen HD Rod Hanger flier (PDF) Anchoring Solutions for Mechanical, Electrical and Plumbing Trades flier (PDF) Titen HD Rod Hanger Product Data e '11160161116.,nOu Accepts DnII Bit flia (in) Wrench Size (4ñ) Mm Enibe {mn) flualiIy Box - Carton 'A k Th:t25112RH 14 % 1½ 100 500 3x% THD3721814H 3. ¼ ½ 21/8 50 250 V~2 ThD37212RH ~ '4 2 50 200 ThD50234RH ½ % "M 2W 50 100. INSTALLATION I 3. Drill a hole using the specified diameter carbide bit into the base material to a depth of at least 1/2" deeper than the required embedment. Blow the hole clean of dust and debris using compressed air. insert anchor into the hole. Tighten the anchor with an impact wrench or a torque wrench into the base material until the hex washer head contacts the base material. Install threaded rod in the anchor to support pipes, wiring, etc. IMPORTANT: Install with an applied torque of 15 ft- lbs for the THD25II2RH & THD37218RH rod hangers using a torque wrench, driver drill, hammer drill or cordless 1/4" impact driver with a maximum permitted torque rating of 100 ft-lb. Caution: Oversized holes in the base material will reduce or eliminate the mechanical interlock of the threads with base material and will reduce the anchor's load capacity. Use a Titen HD Rod Hanger one time only. Installing the anchor multiple times may result in excessive thread wear and reduce load capacity. - Installation Sequence Qr%' r. . -j•. ') - ;•s''-' GC , ••- : o• .o ; c*°' ;o:o; -0 06 .-.. 00. .- .', .0 C'ç;. ,.Q-.' :ol. O -.O•. 0Q ID - GO 40, 00 4. ½" Min '0-.' d.. 0-•:.z~ o• .kCD mhtml:file://C:\Users\Chandra\Documents\Submittals\Sprinkler Materials\TITEN HID® Rod ... 1/21/13 TITEN HD® Rod Hanger Simpson Strong-Tie Anchor Systems® Page 3 of 3 Titen HD Rod Hanger Installation Information and Additional Data' CharacteTistic Symbol Units Catalog Number THD3721I2RH TH050234RH Itistaltatlun Information Rod HangerThamer I_do Drill Bit Diameter d in % Maximum Installation Torque2 I ft- b1 50 50 Maximum Impact Wrench Torque Rating' iinipact,max 114b1 150 150 Minimum hole Depth hhol. - - 3 Embedment Depth hnDm ( (LJ fl 2A 24 Effective Embedment Depth he I \i\ Iin 117 Critical Edge Distance cC[L :n tJJ ]J 2A Minimum Edge Distance Cm 1fl' 13/4 Minimum Spacing In. 3 Minimum Concrete Thickness in. 3% Anchor Data Yield Strength psi 97,000 L_.!!L __ 110.000 Minimum Tensile and Shear Stress Area A 0.099 0.099 Axial Stiffness in Service Load Range Uricracked Concrete lbfin. 715,000 Axial Stiffness in Service Load flange - Cracked Concrete Ct Ibn - 345000 The information presented in this table is to be used in conjunction with the design criteria of ACI 318 Appendix D. Tinst,max is the maximum permitted installation torque for installations using a torque wrench. Timpacmax is the maximum permitted torque rating for impact wrenches. Printed January 21, 2013 from file:///C:/Users/ChandralDocuments/Submittls/Spnnkler%20MateriaIsrnTEN%2OHD®%20Rod%20Hanger%20—% 20Simpson%20Strong-Tie%20Anchor%20Systems®mht © 2010 Simpson Strong-Tie® mhtml:file://C :\Users\Chandra\Documents\Submittals\Sprinkler Materials\TITEN HD® Rod 1/21/13 Fig. 980 — Universal Swivel Sway Brace Attachment C®US LISTED Size Range - One size fits bracing pipe 1 thru 2", TOLCO 12 gauge channel, and all structural steel up to 1/4" thick. Material - Carbon Steel Function - Multi-functional attachment to structure or braced pipe fitting. Features - This product's design incorporates a concen- tric attachment opening which is critical to the performance of structural seismic connections. NFPA 13 (2002) Figure 9.3.5.9.1 indicates clearly that fastener table load values are based only on concentric loading. Mounts to any surface angle. Break off bolt head assures verification of proper installation. Installation - The Fig.980 is the structural or transitional attachment component of a longitudinal or lateral sway brace assembly. It is intended to be combined with the "bracing pipe" and TOLCO "braced pipe" attachment, Fig. 1000, 1001, 2002, 4L, 4A or 4B to form a complete bracing assembly. NFPA 13 and/or OSHPD guidelines should be followed. ed m To Install - Place the Fig. 980 onto the "bracing pipe". Tighten the set bolt until set bolt head breaks off. Attachment can pivot for adjustment to proper brace angle. Approvals - Underwriters Laboratories Listed in the USA (UL) and Canada (cUL). Approved by Factory Mutual Engineering (FM). Included in our Seismic Restraints Catalog approved by the State of California Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development (OSHPD). For additional load, spacing and placement information relating to OSHPD projects, please refer to the TOLCO Seismic Restraint Systems Guidelines. Note - The Fig. 980 Swivel Attachment and the Fig. 1001, Fig. 1000, Fig. 2001 or Fig. 4A Pipe Clamp make up a sway brace system of UL Listed attachments and bracing materials which satisfies the requirements of Underwriters' Laboratories and the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Finish - Plain Note - Available in Electro-Galvanized finish. Order By - Figure number and finish. PATENT #6,273,372, PATENT #6,517,030, PATENT #6,953,174, PATENT#6,708,930, PATENT #7,191,987, PATENT #7,441,730 / KY, Lateral Brace Dimensions • Weights Max. Design **Max. Design Approx. A B Load Lbs. Load Lbs. wtjloo (cULus) (FM) 51/4 1/8 17/32 2765 2800 132 * Available with hole sizes to accommodate up to 3/4 fastener. Consult factory. ** Load shown is allowable with brace installed, between 30° - 90°. No reduction of load based on brace angle is required. TOLCO® brand bracing components are desgined to be compatible ONiY with other TOLCO® brand bracing components, resulting in a Listed seismic bracing assembly. DISCLAIMER - NIBCO does NOT warrant against the failure of TOLCO® brand bracing components, in the instance that such TOLCO® brand bracing components are used in combination with products, parts or systems which are not manufactured or sold under the TOLCO® brand. NIBCO shall NOT be liable under any circumstance for any direct or indirect, incidental or consequential damages of any kind, including but not limited to loss of business or profit, where non-TOLCO brand bracing components have been, or are used. OFFICE/MANUFACTURING FACILITY • 1375 SAMPSON AVE. • CORONA, CA 92879 • PH: 951.737.5599 • FAX: 951.737.0330 CUSTOMER SERVICE • 800.786 5266 www.folco.com P Fig. 4A - Pipe Clamp for Sway Bracing Component of State of California OSHPD Approved c Seismic Restraints System US USTED Size Range - 4" thru 8' pipe. For sizes smaller than 4" use TOLCO® Fig. 4. Material - Carbon Steel Function - For bracing pipe against sway and seismic disturbance. Approvals - Underwriters' Laboratories Listed in the USA (LJL) and Canada (cUL) 4" thru 8'. Included in our Seismic Restraints Catalog approved by the State of California Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development (OSHPD). Installation Instructions - The Fig. 4A is the "braced pipe' attachment component of a longitudinal, lateral or riser brace assembly. It is intended to be combined with the "bracing pipe" and TOLCO transitional and structural attachment component(s) to form a complete bracing assembly. NFPA 13 and/or OSHPD guidelines should be followed. To Install - Place the Fig. 4A over the pipe to be braced. Attach TOLCO transitional fitting, either Fig. 980, 910 or 909, to the clamp ears. Tighten bolts and nuts; torque requirement is a minimum of 50 ft. lbs. Transitional fit- ting attachment can pivot for adjustment to proper brace angle. Finish - Plain Note - Available in Electro-Galvanized and HDG finish or Stainless Steel materials. Order By - Figure number, pipe size and finish Fig. 4A - Longitudinal Brace Fig. 4A - Lateral Brace TOLCO® brand bracing components are desgined to be compatible ONLY with other TOLCO® brand bracing components, resulting in a Listed seismic bracing assembly. DISCLAIMER - NIBCO does NOT warrant against the failure of TOLCO® brand bracing components, in the instance that such TOLCO® brand bracing components are used in combination with products, parts or systems which are not manufactured or sold under the TOLCO® brand. NIBCO shall NOT be liable under any circumstance for any direct or indirect, incidental or consequential damages of any kind, including but not limited to loss of business or profit, where non-TOLCO brand bracing components have been, or are used. Dimensions • Weights Pipe Max. Horizontal Approx. Sizes A B C D Bolt Size Design Load WtJ100 4 81/2 9/16 33/8 311A6 1/2 2015 221 5 93/4 9/16 3/8 43/8 1/2 2015 253 6 11½ 5/8 5 51/8 1/2 2015 513 8 131/4 3/4 611Ae 61/8 1/2 2015 601 OFFICE/MANUFACTURING FACIUTY • 1375 SAMPSON AVE • CORONA. CA 92879 • PH: 951.737.5599 • FAX: 951.737.0330 CUSTOMER SERVICE • 800.786.5266 www.tolco.com Fig. 1000 - "Fast Clamp" Sway Brace Attachment Component of State of California OSHPD Approve, Seismic Restraints System Size Range - Pipe size to be braced: 1 thru 6" Schedule 10 thru 40 IPS.* Pipe size used for bracing: 1" and 11/4 Schedule 40 I PS. * Additionally (UL) approved for use to brace Schedule 7 sprinkler pipe up to 4" (maximum horizontal design load 655 lbs.) Torque requirement 6 - 8 ft. lbs. Material - Carbon Steel Function - For bracing pipe against sway and seismic disturbance. The pipe attachment component of a sway brace sys- tem: Fig. 1000 is used in conjunction with a TOLCO Fig. 900 Series Fitting and joined together with bracing pipe per NFPA 13* or TOLCO OSHPD Approved Seismic Manual, forming a complete sway brace assembly. Features - Field adjustable, making critical pre-engineering of bracing pipe unnecessary. Unique design requires no threading of bracing pipe. Can be used as a component of a 4-way riser brace. Can be used as longitudinal brace with Fig. 907. Comes assembled and individually packaged with illustrated installation instructions - sizes are clearly marked. Steel leaf spring insert provided to assure installer and inspector necessary minimum torque has been achieved. Installation - The Fig. 1000 is the braced pipe attachment component of a lateral sway brace assembly. It is intended to be combined with the bracing pipe and TOLCO structural attach- ment component, Fig. 980, 910 or 909 to form a complete bracing assembly. Follow NFPA 13 and/or OSHPD guidelines. To Install - Place the Fig. 1000 over the pipe to be braced, insert bracing pipe through opening leaving a minimum of 1" extension. Brace pipe can be installed on top or bottom of pipe to be braced. Tighten hex nuts until leaf spring is flat. It is recommended that the brace angle be adjusted before hex nuts are fully tightened. Approvals - Underwriters Laboratories Listed in the USA (UL) and Canada (cUL). Approved by Factory Mutual Engineering (FM). Included in our Seismic Restraints Catalog approved by the State of California Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development (OSHPD). For additional load, spacing and placement informa- tion relating to OSHPD projects, please refer to the TOLCO Seismic Restraint Systems Guidelines. Application Note - Position Fast Clamp and tighten two hex nuts until leaf spring flattens. A minimum of 1" pipe extension beyond the Fig. 1000 is recommended. Finish - Plain Note - Available in Electro-Galvanized and HDG finish or Stainless Steel materials. Order By - Order first by pipe size to be braced, followed by pipe size used for bracing, figure number and finish. Maximum Design Load 1' thru 4" pipe size - 2015 lbs. 6" size - 1265 lbs. FM Approved Design Loads* 1" - 21/2" - 600 lbs. 3' - 4' - 700 lbs. C®US LISTED TOLCOO brand bracing components are desgined to be compatible ONLY with other TOLCOO brand bracing components, resulting in a Listed seismic bracing assembly. DISCLAIMER - NIBCO does NOT warrant against the failure of TOLCO'5 brand bracing components, in the instance that such TOLCO® brand bracing components are used in combination with products, parts or systems which are not manufactured or sold under the TOLCO® brand. NIBCO shall NOT be liable under any circumstance for any direct or indirect, incidental or consequential damages of any kind, including but not limited to loss of business or profit, where non-TOLCO brand bracing components have been, or are used. OFFICE/MANUFACTURING FACILITY • 1375 SAMPSON AVE. • CORONA, CA 92879 • PH; 951.737.5599 • FAX: 951.737.0330 CUSTOMER SERVICE • 800.786.5266 wwwtolco.com SCHEDULE 10/40 n-T allied TUBE & CONDUIT Schedule-1O®/Schedule-40® Fully Listed and FM Approved Sprinkler Pipe When you specify Schedule-10/Schedule-40 sprinkler pipe you get a UL listed and FM approved product. Although these products do not require separate approvals, Schedule- 10/S chedule-40 gives you the extra quality assurance you demand. Our Sch-10 (114.- 8') pipe and Sch-40 (1"- 214) pipe have passed the same thorough lab testing as our other listed pipe products, and receive periodic mill inspections from both UL and FM agents to ensure consistent quality. Schedule-10/Schedule-40 product can be) "hot-dip" galvanized to meet FMJ requirements for dry systems inL accordance with the zinc coating) specifications of ASTM A- 123. Our advanced formula mill coating of- fers a clean, durable surface. It is also paint-ready for custom color applications without special preparation. The internal surface of all black Allied Tube & Conduit Fire Sprinkler pipe products up to 4.5000" in diameter is coated with our new Antibacterial For- mula, "ABF". In scientific laboratory test, ABS proved to have superior resis- tance to microbial colonization of pipe walls, thereby delaying or possibly pre- venting the onset of Microbiologically Influenced corrosion (MlC) when the First Sprinkler System is first installed. Meets "Buy American" requirement and is available through distributors in the USA, Canada and Mexico. f !'Specifications NPS Nominal I.D. WI. WI. (H20 Filled) Pcs/ WI/Lift (21') WI/Lift (24) WI/Lift (25') In; mm In; mm Lbs/Ft; Kg/rn Lbs/Fl; Kg/rn Lift Lbs; Kg Lbs; Kg Lbs; Kg 1.049 1.680 2.05 70 2,470 2,822 2,940 25 26.6 2.5 . 3.05 70 1,120 1,280 1,334 11/4" 1.380 2.270 2.93 51 2,431 2,778 2,894 32 35.1 4.36 4.36 51 1,103 1,260 1,313 11/2" 1.610 2.720 3.61 44 2,513 2,872 2,992 40 40.9 4.0 5.37 44 1,140 1,303 1,357 2.067 3.650 5.13 30 2,300 2,628 2,738 50 52.5 5.4 7.63 30 1,043 1,192 1,242 21/2' 2.469 5.790 7.86 19 2,310 2,640 2,750 65 62.7 8.6 11.73 19 1,048 1,197 1,247 tsISpecifications NPS Nominal I.D. WI. WI. (H20 Filled) Pc WI/Lift (21') WI/Lift (24) WI/Lift (25') In; mm In; mm Lbs/Fl Kg/rn Lbs/Fl; Kg/rn Lift Lbs; Kg Lbs; Kg Lbs; Kg 1.097 1.400 1.81 91 2,675 3,053 3,185 25 27.9 2.1 2.70 91 1,213 1,385 1,445 11/4" 1.442 1.810 2.52 61 2,319 2,664 2,760 32 36.6 2.7 3.75 61 1,052 1,208 1,252 11/2' 1.682 2.080 3.04 61 2,664 3,045 3,172 40 42.7 3.1 4.52 61 1,208 1,381 1,439 2.157 2.640 4.22 37 2,051 2,344 2,442 50 54.8 3.9 6.28 37 930 1,063 1,108 21/2" 2.635 3.530 5.89 30 2,224 2,542 2,648 65 66.9 5.3 8.77 30 1,009 1,153 1,201 3.260 4.330 7.94 19 1,728 1,975 2,057 80 82.8 6.4 11.82 19., 784 896 933 4.260 5.610 11.78 19 2,238 2,558 2,665 90 108.2 8.3 17.53 19 1,015 1,160 1,209 5.295 7.77 17.33 10 1,632 1,865 1,943 125 134.5 11.56 25.80 10 740 846 881 6.357 9.290 23.03 10 1,951 2,230 2,322 150 161.5 13.8 34.27 10 885 1,012 1,053 8" 8.249 16.490 40.15 7 2,424 2,770 2,885 200 209.5 24.5 59.75 7 1,100 1,256 1,309 Schedule-10/Schedule-40 pipe are in compliance with the following: ASTMA-135, and NFPA 13. Both pipe products have a working pressure rating of 300 psi maximum and also meet the stringent requirement for the following tests: Welded Outlets Hydrostatic Pressure Side Wall Rupture Vibration Test tqco/ Flow Control ' allied TUBE & CONDUIT @ <S> (~~ Listed Approved Listed 16100 S. Lathrop• Harvey, IL 60426 Customer Service: 11350 Norcom Rd. • Philadelphia, PA 19154 (800) 882-5543 2525 N. 27 th Ave. Phoenix, AZ 85009 Fax 708-339-1806 S5 -3 NO. 20 TEE NO. 10 ELBOW ALTERNATE STYLES Grooved End Fittings Victaulic offers a broad line of fittings in sizes through 48/1200mm in a variety of straight and reducing styles. Most standard fittings are cast of durable ductile iron to precise tolerances. Victaulic standard fittings pressure ratings conform to the ratings of Victaulic Style 77 couplings. All fittings are supplied with grooves or shoulders to permit fast installation without field prepara- tion. The grooved design permits flexibility for easy alignment. These fittings are not intended for use with Victaulic couplings for plain end pipe (refer to Section 14.04 for fittings available for plain end applications). Fittings are provided in various materials including ductile iron, steel or segmentally welded steel depending on styles and size. Fittings are painted orange enamel with a galvanized finish avail- able as an option, contact Victaulic for details. Victaulic fittings are designed specifically for use in grooved piping systems. Fittings are provided grooved or with shoulders conforming to standard steel pipe outside diameters. When connecting wafer or lug-type butterfly valves directly to Victaulic fittings with 741 or 743 Vic-Flange® adapt- ers, check disc clearance dimensions with I.D. dimension of fitting. Advanced Groove System - For 14-24/350-600 mm piping systems, Victaulic now offers the Advanced Groove System (AGS). Refer to Section 20.05 for AGS fitting details. Stainless Steel - Grooved end fittings are available in Schedule 10 Type 316 stainless steel (Schedule 5, 40 and Type 304 available as an option) in various sizes. Fitting center-to-end dimensions will vary depending upon type and schedule. Refer to Section 17.04 and 17.16 for details. Aluminum - Grooved end fittings are available in aluminum alloy 356 T6, in sizes from 1 - 8/25-200 mm. Refer to Section 21.03 or contact Victaulic for details. AGS - ADVANCED GROOVE SYSTEM Extra Heavy EndSeal® "ES" Fittings - EndSeal fittings are available in 2 - 12/50 - 300mm for use with "ES" grooved pipe and HP-70ES EndSeal couplings. "ES" fittings are painted black for easy identification. EndSeal (and standard) fittings may be easily internally coated (by others) for severe service requirements. Always specify "ES EndSeal fittings" when ordering. See Section 07.03 for information on EndSeal fittings. Fittings Machined for Rubber or Urethane Lining (MRL) - For severe abrasive services, Victaulic fittings may be rubber or urethane lined (by others). Lining may be inside diameter/end (abrasion resistance) or wrap-around (corrosion and/or abrasion) machined. Refer to Section 25.03 or contact Victaulic for specific details. JOB/OWNER CONTRACTOR ENGINEER System No. Submitted By Spec Sect Para__________ Location Date Approved Date www.victaulic.com VICTAULIC IS REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF VICTAULIC COMPANY. © 2006 VICTAULIC COMPANY. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED PRINTED IN THE USA. REVL \,htauIicr 07.01_i I PS CARBON STEEL PIPE GROOVED FITTINGS 07.01 Grooved End Fittings NO. 10 ELBOW NO. 20 TEE The chart expresses the frictional resistance of various Victaulic fittings as equivalent feet of straight pipe. Fittings not listed can be estimated from the data given, for example, a 22½0 elbow is approximately one-half the resistance of a 45° elbow. Values of mid-sizes can be interpolated. Size Feet/meters x 11TiLh[_ 1 1.315 1.7 0.8 4.2 1.7 25 33.7 0.5 - 0.2 - - 1.3 0.5 2 2.375 3.5 2.5 1.8 1.1 8.5 3.5 50 60.3 1.1 0.8 0.5 0.3 2.6 1.1 761 mm 3.000 4.3 2.1 10.8 4.3 76.1 1.3 - 0.7 - 3.3 1.3 3 3.500 5.0 3.8 2.6 1.6 13.0 5.0 80 88.9 1.5 1.2 0.8 0.5 4.0 1.5 - 108.0 mm 4.250 6.4 3.2 15.3 6.4 108.0 2.0 - 0.9 - 4.7 - 2.0 4 4.500 6.8 5.0 3.4 2.1 16.0 6.8 100 114.3 2.1 1.5 1.0 0.6 4.9 2.1 - 1330 mm 5.250 8.1 4.1 20.0 8.1 133.0 2.5 - 1.2 - 6.2 2.5 1397 mm 5.500 8.5 4.2 21.0 8.5 139.7 2.6 - 1.3 - 6.4 2.6 5 5.563 8.5 4.2 - 21.0 8.5 125 141.3 2.6 - 1.3 - 6.4 2.6 6.250 9.4 4.9 25.0 9.6 1590 mm 159.0 2.9 - 1.5 - - -7.6 2.9 1651 mm 6.500 9.6 S 5.0 25.0 10.0 165.1 2.9 1.5 - 7.6 3.0 6 6.625 10.0 7.5 5.0 3.0 25.0 10.0 150 168.3 3.0 2.3 1.5 0.9 7.6 3.0 8 8.625 13.0 9.8 6.5 4.0 33.0 13.0 200 219.1 4.0 3.0 2.0 1.2 10.1 4.0 10 10.750 17.0 12.0 8.3 5.0 41.0 17.0 250 273.0 5.2 3.7 2.5 1.5 12.5 5.2 12 12.750 20.0 14.5 10.0 6.0 50.0 20.0 300 323.9 6.1 4.4 3.0 - 1.8 15.2 *6.1 14 14.000 15.8 11.0 70.0 23.0 350 355.6 4.8 3.4 21.3 7.0 16 16.000 18.0 13.0 80.0 27.0 400 406.4 5.5 4.0 24.4 8.2 18 18.000 20.0 14.0 90.0 30.0 450 457.0 6.1 - 4.3 - 27.4 9.1 20 20.000 22.5 16.0 100.0 33.0 800 508.0 6.9 4.9 30.5 10.1 24 24.000 27.0 19.0 120.0 40.0 600 610.0 8.2 - - 5.8 36.6 - 12.2 26 26.000 28.0 20.5 130.0 43.0 650 660.4 8.5 - 6.3 - 39.6 13.1 30 30.000 34.0 24.0 150.0 50.0 750 762.0 10.4 7.3 45.7 180.0 15.2 36 36.000 10.5 28.5 60.0 900 914.0 12.3 8.7 - 54.9 18.3 42 42.000 47.0 33.0 210.0 70.0 1050 1067.0 14.3 10.1 64.0 21.3 www.victaulic.com VICTAULIC IS REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF VICTAULIC COMPANY. © 2006 VICTAULIC COMPANY. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. PRINTED IN THE USA. 07.O1_2 'Ltauiic REV_L FLOW DATA (Frictional Resistance) IPS CARBON STEEL PIPE - GROOVED FITTINGS 07.01 Grooved End Fittings NO. 10 ELBOW NO. 20 TEE MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS Fitting: Ductile iron conforming to ASTM A-536, grade 65-45-12. Ductile iron conforming to ASTM A-395, grade 65-45-15, is available upon special request. Or: Segmentally welded steel as shown under nipples Nipples: (adapter, swaged & hose) 3/4 - 4/20 - 100mm: Carbon steel, Schedule 40, conforming to ASTM A-53, Type F 5-6/125 - 150 mm: Carbon steel, Schedule 40, conforming to ASTM A-53, Type E or S, Gr. B 8— 12/200 - 300mm: Carbon steel, Schedule 30 or 40, conforming to ASTM A-53, Type E or 5, Gr.B Flanged Adapter Nipples: (Nipple - see above) Class 125 Flange: Cast iron conforming to ANSI B-16.1 Class 150 Flange: Carbon steel conforming to ANSI B-16.5, raised or flat face Class 300 Flange: Carbon steel conforming to ANSI B-16.5, raised or flat face Fitting Coatings: Orange enamel Optional: Hot dip galvanized and others. Some fittings supplied electroplated as standard - see product specifications. Flanged Adapter Nipple Coating: None (Unfinished) Optional: Orange enamel, hot dip galvanized and others. www.victaulic.com 14tauiic VICTAULIC IS REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF VICTAULIC COMPANY. © 2006 VICTAULIC COMPANY. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. PRINTED IN THE USA, REVL 07.013 IPS CARBON STEEL PIPE - GROOVED FITTINGS 07.01 Grooved End Fittings NO. 10 ELBOW NO. 20 TEE DIMENSIONS Elbows NO. 10 900 Elbow NO. 1145' Elbow NO. 12 22½° Elbow NO. 13 11'A° Elbow NO. 100 900 Long Radius NO. 110 45° Long Radius (Ductile Iron *) to E NO. 10 ME E Ct b C~-b NO. 11 NO. 12 h- C to E CtoE to NO. 13 NO. 100 NO. 110 Size 90' Elbow 22~"; E (sw) bov, I'-' Ellbc,,-, (sw) 90* Lone Radius Elbow (S) 45' Long Radius Elbow (S) --1KFCmF lwi Gm cm Cm 3/4 1.050 2.25 05 1.50 05 1.63 sw 1.38 sw 20 26.9 57 0.2 38 0.2 41 - 35 - - - - 1.315 2.25 0.6 1.75 0.6 3.25 @ 06 1.38 sw 0.3 25 33.7 57 03 44 0.3 83 - 0.3 35 01 - - - - 1 1/ 1.660 2.75 1.0 175 0.9 1.75 0.8 1.38 sw 0.5 32 42.4 70 0.5 44 0.4 44 04 35 0.2 - - - - 1½ 1.900 2.75 1.2 1.75 0.9 1.75 0.8 138 sw 0.5 40 48.3 70 0.5 44 0.4 44 0.4 35 0.2 - - - - 2 2.375 3.25 1.8 2.00 1.3 3.75 @ 1.4 1.38 1.0 4.38 2.5 2.75 1.8 50 60.3 83 0.8 51 0.6 95 0.6 35 0.5 111 1.1 70 0.8 2½ 2.875 3.75 3.2 2.25 2.2 4.00@ 2.3 1.50 1.1 5.00 4.1 3.00 2.8 65 73.0 95 1.5 57 1.0 102 1.0 38 0.5 127 1.9 76 1.3 76.1 mm 3.000 3.75 3.7 2.25 3.4 76.1 95 1.7 57 1.5 - - - - - . - 3 3.500 425 45 250 31 450@ 31 150 21 588 60 338 49 80 88.9 108. 2.0 64 1.4 114 1.4 38 1.0 149 2.7 86 2.2 3½ 4.000 4.50 5.6 2.75 4.3 2.50 sw 4.0 1.75 5w 2.7 90 101.6 114 2.5 70 2.0 64 1.8 44 1.2 - - - - 4 4.500 5.00 7.1 3.00 5.6 2.88 5.6 1.75 3.6 7.50 12.3 4.00 7.3 100 114.3 127 3.2 76 2.5 73 2.5 44 1.6 - 191 5.6 102 3.3 108.0 mm 4.250 5.00 11.0 3.00 5.6 108.0 127 5.0 76 2.5 - - - - - - - - 41/2 5.000 5.25 sw 10.0 3.13 sw 6.0 3.50 6.6 1.88 sw 4.2 120 127.0 133 4.5 79 2.7 89 3.0 48 1.9 - - - 5 5.563 5.50 11.7 3.25 8.3 2.88 5w 7.8 2.00 sw 5.0 18.2 14.8 125 141.3 140 5.3 83 3.8 73 3.5 51 2.2 + 8.3 + 6.7 133.0 mm 5.250 5.50 11.7 3.25 8.3 133.0 140 5.3 83 3.8 - - - - - - - - 139.7 mm 5.500 5.50 11.7 3.25 8.3 139.7 140 5.3 83 3.8 - - - - - - - 6 6.625 650 172 350 108 625@ 122 200 70 1075 304 550 174 150 168.3 - 165 7.8 89 - 4.9 159 5.5 51 3.2 273 13.8 140 7.9 159.0mm 6.250 6.50 18.6 - 3.50 10.8 1.0 59 165 8.4 89 4.9 - - - - - - - - . 165.1 mm 6.500 6.50 15.5 3.50 9.8 3.13 11.4 2.00 7.4 10.75 29.0 5.50 19.0 165.1 165 7.0 89 4.4 79 5.2 51 3.4 273 13.2 140 8.6 - www.victaulic.com _JtauIic' VICTALIC IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF VICTAULIC COMPANY. © 2006 VICTAULIC COMPANY. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. PRINTED IN THE USA. 07.01_4 REVL IPS CARBON STEEL PIPE - GROOVED FITTINGS ['aJ Grooved End Fittings NO. 10 ELBOW NO. 20 TEE ( \ EtoE .-C toE1 CtoE'" Ctoi tE NO. 10 NO. 11 NO. 12 C to E CtoE ' Cto I ~n ( ! NO. 13 NO. 100 NO. 110 Size No Actual 90' Elbow No. 13 45~ Elbow 221 Elbow W,) Elbow (s,) -7pprox. 7.75 29.9 4.25 20.4 7.75 @ 20.0 2.00 10.1 14.25 66.0 7.25 36.0 278 8.625 0219.1 10.750 197 9.00 13.6 [ 108 9.3 197 9.1 51 4.6 362 30.0 184 16.3 63.3 I 4.75 37.5 4.38 sw 30.0 2.13 Sw 11.8 j 15.00 107.0 6.25 57.0 273.0 229 28.7 J121 17.0 111 13.6 54 5.3 381 48.5 159 25.9 74.0 5.25 66.7 4.88 sw 40.0 2.25 sw 29.3 18.00 156.0 7.50 90.0 12 12.750 10.00 300 323.9 254 33.6 133 30.3 124 18.1 57 13.3 457 70.8 191 40.8 136.0 5.75 65.0 5.00 sw 46.0 3.50 sw 32.0 21.00s 164.0 8.75s 82.0 148 14.000 14.00 350 355.6 355.6 61.7 146 29.5 127 20.9 89 14.5 533 1 74.4 222 37.2 377.0mm 14.843 14.84 149.3 6.15 82.0 377.0 376.9 67.7 156.2 37.2 - - - - - - 168 16.000 16.00 171.0 6.63 88.0 5.00 sw 58.0 4.00 sw 42.0 24.00s 210.0 10.00s 100.0 400 406.4 - 406.4 77.6 168 39.9 127 26.3 102 19.1 610 95.3 254 45.4 426.0 mm 16.772 16.77 198.6 6.95 101.3 426.0 426.0 18.00 90.1 176.5 45.9 - - - 4.50 sw - 53.2 - - 273.0 - - 188 18.000 228.0 7.46 108.0 5.50 sw 65.0 27.00s 11.25s 135.0 450 457.0 457.2 103.4 189 50.0 140 29.5 114 24.1 686 123.8 286 61.2 4800 mm 1 18.898 18.90 291.0 7.83 141.7 480.0 480.0 20.00 132.0 298.0 198.8 8.28 64.3 138.0 - - - 5.00 sw - - 30.00s - 343.0 - - 208 20.000 6.00 sw 78.6 65.0 12.50s 174.0 500 508.0 508.0 135.2 210 62.6 152 36.0 127 29.5 762 155.6 318 78.9 - - 5300 mm t 20.866 20.87 355.0 8.64 179.0 530.0 530.0 161.0 219.4 81.2 - - - - - I - - - 248 24.000 I 24.00 438.0 9.94 221.0 ZOO SW 140.0 6.00 SW 60.0 36.00s 516.0 15.001 251.0 550 610.0 24.803 609.6 24.80 198.7 545.0 252 10.27 100.2 255.2 178 63.5 152 27.2 [_14 234.1 381 113.9 mm 6300 630.0 630.0 247.2 261.0 115.7 - - - - - - - 14-24 350-600 For AGS fitting information, see publication 20.05 @ Gooseneck design, end-to-end dimension '(sw) Segmentally welded steel 8 For use on cut grooved systems only. For roll grooved systems, Victaulic offers the Advanced Groove System (AGS). For pricing and availability of cut groove fittings in this size, contact your nearest Victaulic sales office. t Chinese standard sizes www.victaulic.com '4'tauiic VICTAULIC IS REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF VICTAULIC COMPANY. © 2006 vicTAuLic COMPANY. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. PRINTED IN THE USA. REVL 07.01_5 IPS CARBON STEEL PIPE - GROOVED FITTINGS 07.01 Grooved End Fittings NO. 10 ELBOW NO. 20 TEE Tees, Crosses and True Wyes NO. 2OTee f-CtoE-.1 NO. 35 Cross NO. 33 True Wye --- FIT -q NO. 29M Tee with C Threaded Branch (Ductile Iron *) NO. 20 c to E. Cto LE \ D N035 NO. 33 C to ron CtoTE NO. 29M .4' Threaded1Branch GOO 3/4 1.050 2.25 0.6 2.25 09 2.25 2.25 0.6 20 269 57 0.3 57 0.4 - - 57 57 03 1 1.315 2.25 1.0 225 1.3 2.25 225 1.1 2.25 2.25 1.0 25 33.7 57 0.5 57 0.6 57 * 57 0.5 - 57 57 05 1 Y4 1.660 2.75 1.5 2.75 2.1 2.75 2.50 1.5 2.75 2.75 1.5 32 42.4 70 0.7 70 1.0 70 64 0.7 70 70 0.7 1½ 1.900 2.75 2.0 2.75 2.5 2.75 2.75 1.8 2.75 2.75 2.0 40 48.3 70 1 0.9 70 1.1 70 70 0.8 1 70 70 0.9 2 2:375 3.25 3.0 3.25 3.8 3.25 2.75 2.5 3.25 4.25 3.00 50 60.3 83 1.4 83 1.7 1 83 70 1.1 83 108 1.4 21/2 2.875 3.75 4.3 3.75 6.1 3.75 3.00 4.3 3.75 3.75 4:3 65 73.0 95 2.0 95 2.8 95 76 2.0 95 95 2.0 761 mm 3.000 3.75 5.2 - - - 3.75 3.75 5.2 (sw) 76.1 95 2.4 - - 95 95 2.4 3 3.500 4.25 6.8 4.25 10.5 4.25 3.25 6.1 4.25 6.00 6.8 80 88.9 108 3.0 108 4.8 108 83 2.8 108 152 3.1 31/2 4.000 4.50(sw) 7.9 4.50 11.5 4.50 3.50 9.6 4.50 4.50 7.9(sw) 90 101.6 114 3.6 114 5.2 114 89 4.4 114 114 73.6 108.0mm 4.250 5.00 15.5 5.00 5.00 . 15.5 108.0 127 7.0 - - - - - 127 127 7.0 4 4.500 5.00 11.9 5.00 15.8 5.00 3.75 10.0 5.00 7.25 11.9 100 114.3 127 5.4 127 7.2 127 95 4.5 127 184 5.4 41/2 5.000 5.25(sw) 15.0 5.25 18.5 5.25 5.25 15.0(sw) 120 127.0 133 6.8 133 8.4 - - - 133 133 6.8 1330mm 5.250 5.50 17.8 5.50 550 17.8 133.0 140 8.1 - - - - 140 140 8.1 139.7mm 5.500 550 17.8 5.50 5.50 17.8 139.7 140 8.1 - - - - - 140 140 8.1 5 5.563 5.50 17.8 5.50 20.0 5.50 4.00 15.0 5.50 5.50 17.8 (Sw) 125 141.3 140 8.1 140 9.1 * 140 102 6.8 140 140 8.1 159.0mm 6.250 6.50 27.1 6.50 6.50 27.1 159.0 165 12.3 - - . - - 165 165 12.3 15.1 6 mm 6.500 6.50 22.0 6.50 28.0 6.50 6.50 22.0 165.1 165 10.0 165 12.7 - - 165 165 10.0 6 6.625 6.50 25.7 6.50 28.0 6.50 4.50 22.3 6.50 6.50 25.7(sw) 150 168.3 165 11.7 165 - 12.7 165 114 10.1 165 165 - 11.7 8 8.625 7.75 47.6 7.75 48.0 7.75 6.00 36.0 7.75 7.75 47.6 (Sw) 200 219.1 - 197 21.6 197 21.8 197 152 16.3 197 197 21.6 10 10.750 9.00 99.0 9.00 121.5 9.00 6.50 69.9 9.00 9.00 73.0 250 2730 229 44.9 229 55.1 229 155 31.7 229 229 33.1 12 12.750 10.00 133.0 10.00 1 254 110.0 10.00 7.00 80.0 10.00 10.00 99.0 300 323.9 254 60.3 49.9 254 178 36.3 254 254 44.9 www.victaulic.com 4tauuic VICTAULIC IS REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF VICTAULIC COMPANY. tO 2006 VICTAULIC COMPANY. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. PRINTED IN THE USA. 07.01_8 REV_L IPS CARBON STEEL PIPE - GROOVED FITTINGS 07.01 Grooved End Fittings NO. 10 ELBOW NO. 20 TEE Tees, Crosses and True Wyes NO. 20 Tee .-CtoE-1 NO. 35 Cross NO. 33 True Wye NO. 29M Tee with to Threaded Branch I - (Ductile Iron *) NO. 20 -CtoE I~Jl o N035 NO. 33 C to GE NO. 29M True Wye (s,-.,) Tee with Threaded Branch 4# 1377.Omm 14.000 11.00 145.0 I 11.00 198.0 11.00 7.50 I 134.2 50 355.6 279 11.00 65.8 - - 145.0 279 89.8 279 191 60.8 14.000 3556 279 65.8 168 16.000 12.00 186.0 12.00 250.0 12.00 8.00 1 167.0 400 406.4 305 84.4 305 113.4 305 203 75.7 - - 426.0 mm 16.000 12.00 186.0 406.4 305 84.4 - - - - - - - - 188 18.000 14.00 256.0 15.50 350.0 15.50 8.50 234.0 450 457.0 356 116.1 394 158.8 394 216 106.1 - 480.0 mmt 18.000 14.00 256.0 208 457.0 20.000 356 15.00 116.1 339.0 - 17.25 - 452.0 - 1 17.25 - 9.00 - 281.0 - - - 500 508.0 381 15.00 153.8 J_ 339.0 438 205.0 438 229 127.5 - - - 20.000 530.0mm t 508.0 381 153.8 - - - - - - - - 24# 550 24.000 610.0 17.00 432 170 473.0 214.5 T I 20.00 508 795.0 360.6 20.00 508 10.00 254 523.0 237.2 - - - 630.ommt 24.000 473.0 610.0 432 214.5 14- 24 350-600 AGS For AGS fitting information, see publication 20.05 (sw) Segmentally welded steel # For use on cut grooved systems only. For roll grooved systems, Victaulic offers the Advanced Groove System (AGS). For pricing and availability of cut groove fittings in this size, contact your nearest Victaulic sales office. t Chinese standard sizes IMPORTANT NOTE: Fittings size 26- 48/650 - 1050mm are available roll grooved for installation with Style 770 large diameter pipe couplings, Contact Victaulic for details. www.victaulic.com I :tauIjc.• VICTAULIC IS REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF VICTAULIC COMPANY. © 2006 VICTAULIC COMPANY. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. PRINTED IN THE USA. REVL 07.01_9 IPS CARBON STEEL PIPE - GROOVED FITTINGS 07.01 Grooved End Fittings NO. 10 ELBOW NO. 20 TEE Reducing Tee NO. 25 Grooved Branch NO. 29 Threaded Branch (Ductile Iron*) Std. w/ Thd. Branc • 1r 31 25 20 + + 0.5 11/4 '< 11/4 1 + 1.3 32 32 25 0.6 1½ 11/2 x 3/4 + + 1.5 40 40 20 -.- 0.7 + + 1.5 0.7 1 ' 1.7 1¼ 32 + + 0.8 2 '< 2 3/4 3.25 3.25 2.5 50 50 '<20 83 83 1.1 3.25 3.25 2.7 1 25 83 83 12- 1.8 11/4 32 + + 0.8 3.25 3.25(5w) 3.0 1½ 40 83 83 1.4 2½ 2½ 3/4 3.9 65 65 + + 1.8 3.75 3.75 )sw) 3.8 1 25 95 95 1.7 4.2 1¼ 32 + + - 1.7 3.75 3.75 3.9 1 ½ 40 95 95 1.8 3.75 3.75 (sw) 4.5 2 50 95 95 - 2.0 3 80 3 80 3/4 5.7 + 2.6 4.25 4.25 6.1 1 25 108 108 2.8 8.0 1¼ 32 + + 3.6 4.25 4.25 (sw) 6.5 1 ½ 40 108 108 2.9 4.25 4.25 (sw) 6.2 2 50 108 108 2.8 4.25 4.25 (sw) 6.4 21/2 65 108 108 2.9 4 100 '< 4 100 '<20 3/4 + + 8.0 3.6 - 5.00 5.00 7.8 1 25 127 127 3.5 bCt0El jCtoE1 f{to --i --fl 4 NO. 25 NO. 29 No.Size 2 1-dThd. Branch5 4 100 4 '< 100 1¼ '<32 + + 96 4.4 1 ½ 5.00 5.00 10.2 40 127 127 4.6 5.00 5.00 11.2 2 50 127 127 5.1 5.00 5.00 11.4 2½ 65 127 127 5.2 5.00 5.00 11.6 3 80 127 127 5.3 5 125 5 125 1 25 + + 14.0 6.4 + + 14.3 6.5 1½ 40 5.50(sw) - 5.50 (sw) 14.5 2 50 140 -140 6.6 5.50 5.50 (sw) 15.2 21/2 65 140 140 6.9 5.50 5.50(5w) 16.6 3 80 140 140 7.5 5.50 5.50(sw) 16.7 4 100 140 140 7.6 6 150 6 '< 150 1 '<25 + + 23.0 10.4 + + 24.0 10.9 1½ 40 6.50 6.50 21.6 2 50 165 165 9.8 6.50 6.50 21.4 21/2 65 165 165 11.7 14 -24 350 -600 AGS For AGS fitting information, see publication 20.05 + Contact Victaulic for details. Ductile iron except those that are marked (sw), which are segmentally welded steel. # For use on cut grooved systems only. For roll grooved systems, Victaulic offers the Advanced Groove System (AGS). For pricing and availability of cut groove fittings in this size, contact your nearest Victaulic sales office. IMPORTANT NOTE: No. 29 Threaded Outlet Reducing Tees are supplied NPT and are available with British Standard threads. For British Standard specify "BSP' clearly on order. www.victaulic.com VICTAULIC IS REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF VICTAULIC COMPANY. 6 2006 VICTAULIC COMPANY. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. PRINTED IN THE USA. X.Aic- -ta U -1i Cr 07.01_10 REV_L IPS CARBON STEEL PIPE - GROOVED FITTINGS 07.01 Grooved End Fittings NO. 10 ELBOW NO. 20 TEE Reducing Tee NO. 25 Grooved Branch NO. 29 Threaded Branch (Ductile Iron *) rCt0El to E L C C fo to NO. 25 NO. 29 -Size --Std. L', Thd. Branch I eight Each to E Size 12 12 1 770 300 300 25 + + 349 2 1 80.0 50 + 363 2½ 78.0 65 + + -35.4--- 3 10.00(5w) 10.00(5w) - 82.0 80 254 254 37.2 4 10.00(5w) 10.00(5w) 80.0 100 254 254 36.3 5 10.00(5w) 10.00 (5w) 75.0 125 254 254 34.0 6 10.00(5w) 10.00(5w) 75.0 150 254 254 34.0 8 10.00(5w) 10.00(5w) 80.0 200 254 254 36.3 10 10.00(5w) 10.00(5w) 84.0 250 254 254 38.1 #14 14 4 102.0 350 X 350 J29. - + - - + 46.3 6 108.2 150 + + 49.1 8 11.00 11.00 112.0 200 279 279 50.8 10 11.00 11.00 120.0 300 279 279 54.4 12 11.00 11.00 129.1 300 279 279 58.6 1116 16 4 130.0 400 X 400 100 + + 59.0 14-24 AOS For AIlS fitting information, see publication 20.05 350-600 + Contact Victaulic for details. Ductile iron except those that are marked (sw), which are segmentally welded steel. # For use on cut grooved systems only. For roll grooved systems, Victaulic offers the Advanced Groove System (AGS). For pricing and availability of cut groove fittings in this size, contact your nearest Victaulic sales office. IMPORTANT NOTE: No. 29 Threaded Outlet Reducing Tees are supplied NPT and are available with British Standard threads. For British Standard specify "BSP" clearly on order. www.victaulic.com -N A-c-ta-ulia VICTAULIC IS REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF VICTAULIC COMPANY. 0 2006 VICTAULIC COMPANY. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. PRINTED IN THE USA. REV _L 07.01_11 IPS CARBON STEEL PIPE - GROOVED FITTINGS 07.01 Grooved End Fittings NO. 10 ELBOW NO. 20 TEE Reducing Tee NO. 25 Grooved Branch NO. 29 Threaded Branch (Ductile Iron *) Size 0. 4I U #16 x 16 6 + + 133.5 400 400 150 - 60.6 12.00 12.00 145.0 8 200 305 305 65.8 - 12.00 12.00 149.5 10 250 305 305 67.8 12.00 12.00 154.0 12 300 305 305 69.9 167.0 14 350 + + 75.8 # 18 18 4 + 194.0 450 450 X 100 + 88.0 + 200.0 6 + 90.7 202.0 8 200 + + 91.6 15.50 15.50 212.0 10 250 394 394 96.2 15.50 15.50 222.6 12 300 394 394 101.0 15.50 - 230.1 14 350 394 - 104.4 15.50 - 247.6 16 400 394 - 112.3 #20 20 X 6 + + 240.0 500 500 150 108.9 + + 244.0 8 200 110.7 + + 256.0 10 250 116.1 + + 12 264.0 300 119.8 1 7.2 5 14 275.0 350 438 - 124.7 bCt0El fto fto NO. 25 NO. 29 Size No. 25 Sid. H iu # 20 500 X 20 500 16 400 17.25 438 - 288.6 130.9 17.25 297.0 18 450 438 - 134.7 #24 600 24 600 _9_ 8 20.00 508 20.00 508 340.0 154.2 20.00 20.00 343.9 10 250 508 508 156.0 20.00 20.00 352.8 12 300 508 508 160.0 20.00 360.0 14 § 350 508 - 163.3 20.00 378.0 16 400 508 - 171.5 20.00 380.0 18 § 450 508 - 172.4 20.00 373.0 20 500 508 - 169.2 14 - 24 A05 350-600 For AGS fitting -%-0- information, see publication 20.05 + Contact Victaulic for details. C Ductile iron except those that are marked (sw), which are segmentally welded steel. # For use on cut grooved systems only. For roll grooved systems, Victaulic offers the Advanced Groove System (AGS). For pricing and availability of cut groove fittings in this size, contact your nearest Victaulic sales office. IMPORTANT NOTE: No. 29 Threaded Outlet Reducing Tees are supplied NFl and are available with British Standard threads. For British Standard specify "8SF clearly on order. § Cast fitting available. Contact Victaulic for details. www.victaulic.com j/tauiic VICTAULIC IS REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF VICTAULIC COMPANY. 0 2006 VICTAULIC COMPANY. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. PRINTED IN THE USA. 07.0112 REVL IPS CARBON STEEL PIPE - GROOVED FITTINGS 07.01 Grooved End Fittings NO. 10 ELBOW NO. 20 TEE Standpipe Tee 11 C to Bull Plug NO. 27 I NO. 61 (Ductile iron) -. c (Steel) EOR —F NO. 27 IMPORTANT NOTE: Available with British Standard Pipe Threads, specify "BSP" clearly on order. Bullhead Tee C to-E0R-1 NO. 21 U (Ductile Iron) Cto EOB NO. 21 Eta E D NO. 61 No. 61 Size Bull Plug Nominal at Approx. Size Outside Diameter Eto E Weight Each Inches Inches Inches Lbs. mm ~~'l J :4j; 2 2.375 4.00 2.5 50 60.3 102 1.1 21/2 65 2.875 73.0 5.00 127 3.0 1.4 3 80 -- 3.500 88.9 6.00 152 4.5 2.0 4 100 - 4.500 114.3 7.00 178 - 7.5 3.4 5 125 5.563 141.3 8.00 203 12.0 5.4 6 150 6.625 158.3 10.00 254 17.0 _7.7 IMPORTANT NOTES: Steel dish caps available through 24/600 mm, contact Victaulic. No. 61 Bull Plugs should be used in vacuum service with Style 72 or 750 couplings www.victaulic.com vicuic IS REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF VICTAULIC COMPANY. © 2006 VIcTAuuc COMPANY. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. PRINTED IN THE USA. REVL JAi itauIicr 07.0113 IPS CARBON STEEL PIPE - GROOVED FITTINGS 07.01 Grooved End Fittings NO. 10 ELBOW NO. 20 TEE Cap NO. 60 (Ductile Iron) lb NO. 60 i _ ze _ 8 ' Cap 1/4 1.050 088 0.2, 20 26.9 22 0.1 1 1.315 0.88 0.3 25 33.7 22 0.1 11/4 1.660 0.88 0.3 32 42.4 22 0.1 1½ 1.900 0.88 0.5 40 48.3 22 0.2 2 2.375 0.88 0.6 50 60.3 22 0.3 21/2 2.875 0.88 1.0 65 73.0 22 0.5 3.000 0.88 1.2 76.1 mm 76.1 22 0.5 3 3.500 0.88 1.2 80 88.9 22 0.5 31h 4.000 0.88 2.5 90 101.6 22 1.1 08.0mm 4.250 1.00 2.3 108.0 25 1.0 4 4.500 1.00 2.5 100 114.3 25 1.1 41h 5.000 1.00 2.5 120 - 127.0 25 1.1 133.0mm 5.250 1.00 4.5 133.0 25 2.0 5.500 1.00 4.5 1397mm 139.7 25 2.0 5 5.563 1.00 4.6 125 141.3 25 - 2.1 159.0mm 6.250 1.00 6.8 159.0 25 3.1 Size No. 60 Cap rnn 1651 mm 6.500 1.00 7.3 165.1 25 3.3 6 6.625 1.00 6.1 150 168.3 25 2.8 8 8.625 1.19 13.1 200 219.1 30 5.9 10 10.750 1.25 21.0 250 273.0 32 9.5 12 12.750 1.25 35.6 300 323.9 32 16.2 148 14.000 9.50 350 355.6 241 168 16.000 10.00 400 406.4 254 188 18.000 11.00 450 457.0 - 279 208 20.000 12.00 500 508.0 305 248 24.000 600 610.0 - 14 -24 AGS For AGS fitting information, see publication 20.05 350-600 IMPORTANT NOTES: Steel dish caps available through 24/600 mm, contact Victaulic. No. 60 cap is not suitable for use in vacuum service with Style 72 or 750 couplings. No. 61 bull plugs should be used, see pg. 35. # For use on cut grooved systems only. For roll grooved systems, Victaulic offers the Advanced Groove System (AGS). For pricing and availability of cut groove fittings in this size, contact your nearest Victaulic sales office. www.victaulic.com -1141. A-C-ta-uiie VICTAULIC IS REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF VICTAULIC COMPANY. © 2006 VICTAULIC COMPANY. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. PRINTED IN THE USA. REV_L 07.01_19 II'S CARBON STEEL PIPE - GROOVED FITTINGS 07.01 Grooved End Fittings NO. 10 ELBOW NO. 20 TEE Concentric/Eccentric Reducer NO. 50 Concentric NO. 51 Eccentric to E [to E (Ductile Iron ) IIIll1 NO. 50 NO. 51 No' 50 No 51 Size Concentric Reducer Eccentric Reducer Nominal Size - - + 32 20 0.9 1 + 1.9 25 0.9 - - - 1'/2 3/. 1.4 - 40 20 + 0.6 1 2.50)sw) 0.8 8.50 4.5 25 64 0.4 216 2.0 1.0 11/ 2.50(sw) 32 64 0.5 - - 2 3/ 2.50 • (Sw) 0.9 9.00 2.0 50 > 20 64 - 0.3 1 229 0.9 1 2.50 (Sw) 0.7 9.00 2.3 25 64 0.3 229 1.0 11/4 2.50 • (SW) 1.2 9.00 4.6 32 64 0.5 229 2.1 11/2 2.50 * (Sw) 1.0 9.00 4.6 40 64 + 0.5 _J_ 1.3 229 I + 2.1 3.3 2/2 65 20 0.6 1.5 9.50 1 3.6 9.50 3.5 25 64 J 1.5 241 1.6 11/4 2.50 (sw) 3.3 9.50 32 64 1.5 241 j + 11/2 2.50 (Sw) 3.6 9.50 3.7 40 64 ..L 1.6 241 1.7 4.3 2 2.50 (Sw) 3.9 9.50 50 64 1.8 241 + 2.0 4.5 1.5 + 80 20 0.7 2.0 1 2.50 (Sw) 1.3 9.50 4.8 25 64 0.6 241 2.2 3.0 1 '/4 4.8 32 + 1.4 + 2.2 9.50 241 11/1 40 2.50 • (sw) 64 I 5.1 2.3 5.1 2.3 2 2.50* (Sw) 1.6 3.50 (Sw) 6.0 50 64 0.7 89 2.7 2.50 • (Sw) 2'/2 1.8 3.50 (sw) 7.0 65 64 j 0.8 89 3.2 2.1 761 2.50 )sw) 64 1.0 - - No Size Concent,1 Nominal Size 50 No. 51 c Reducer Eccentric Reducer Inches 31/2 3 2.50 (sw) 2 0 19 5 7.0 __ 90 80 64 0.9 241 3.2 3.0 13.00 6.5 _ 1 100 3.00 (Sw) _ 330 2.9 6 11 -ii -1--.- 10.00 8.1 I'/2 10.00 6.9 40 254 3.1 254 3.7 2 3.00 (Sw) 2.4 4.00 (sw) 3.3 50 76 1.1 - 102 - 1.5 21/2 3.00 • (sw) 2.7 j 4.00 (sw) 3.4 65 76 1.2 .L 102 1.5 4.00 (Sw) 3.5 3 3.00 (Sw) 3.2 80 76 1.4 102 1.6 3/2 3.00 (Sw) 2.9 10.00 8.0 90 76 1.3 9.0 254 3.6 5.2 5 2 x 11.00 11.00 125 50 279 4.1 279 2.4 2/2 11.00 11.0 11.00 10.8 65 279 5.0 279 4.9 4.00 )sw) 55 11.1 3 11.00 80 102 2.5 279 5.0 3.50 (sw) 4.3 12.0 4 5.00 (Sw) 100 89 1.9 __127 5.4 - 6 1 x 4.00 (Sw) 5.0 11.50 14.5 150 25 102 2.3 292 6.6-- 5.5 1 1/2 40 + 2.5 + + 2 4.00 )sw) 6.6 11.50 14.5 50 102 3.0 292 j_ 6.6 4.00 (sw) 11.50 I 14.2 21/2 6.4 65 102 2.9 292 6.4 3 4.00 (Sw) 6.4 5.50 )sw) 15.0 80 102 2.9 140 6.8 4 4.00 (Sw) 6.5 5.50 )sw) t 17.0 100 102 2.9 140 7.7 I 17.0 5 4.00 (sw) 6.4 5.50 (Sw) 125 102 2.9 140 7.7 8 21/2 x 16.00 (Sw) 7.9 12.00 26.1 200 65 406 3.6 305 11.8 3 5.00 (Sw) 9.3 j 12.00 22.0 80 127 4.2 305 1 10.0 www.victaulic.com VICTAULIC IS REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF VICTAULIC COMPANY. © 2006 VICTAULIC COMPANY. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. PRINTED IN THE USA. XtAc- -ta-luhe REV_L 07.01_23 IPS CARBON STEEL PIPE - GROOVED FITTINGS 07.01 Grooved End Fittings NO. 10 ELBOW NO. 20 TEE Concentric/Eccentric Reducer NO. 50 Concentric NO. 51 Eccentric (Ductile Iron t) fi E to E Eld NO. 50 NO. 51 - ii _J rtri !L_ _JIL.ee_ ir 8 4 X 5.00 (sw) 10.4 12.00 23.0 200 100 127 4.8 305 10.4 5 5.00 (sw) 11.6 12.00 23.0 125 127 5.2 305 10.4 6 5.00 (sw) 11.9 6.00 (sw) 24.0 150 127 - 5.4 152 10.9 10 4 6.00 (SW) 19.7 13.00 32.0 250 X 100 152 8.9 330 14.5 5 34.3 34.6 , 15.6 + 15.7 --- 6 6.00 )sw) 20.0 13.00 36.9 150 -.152 9.1 330 16.7 8 6.00 (sw) 22.0 7.00 (sw) 21.6 200 152 10.0 178 9.8 12 4 44.0 14.00 48.0 300 .._129. + 20.0 356 21.8 6 _.. 7.00 (sw) 24.6 14.00 50.0 150 178 11.2 356 - 22.7 8 7.00 (sw) 52.0 14.00 53.5 200 178 23.6 356 24.3 10 7.00 (sw) 39.0 14.00 57.0 250 -178 17.7 356 25.9 # 14 6 13.00 65.0 13.00 60.0 350 X 150 330 29.5 330 27.2 8 13.00 65.0 13.00 60.0 200 330 29.5 330 27.2 10 13.00 66.0 13.00 65.0 250 330 29.9 330 29.5 - - 12 13.00 68.0 13.00 66.0 300 330 30.8 330 29.9 #16 8 14.00 73.0 14.00 73.0 400 200 356 33.1 355 33.1 105 14.00 73.0 14.00 73.0 250 356 - 33.1 355 33.1 12 14.00 73.0 14.00 73.0 300 356 - 33.1 355 33.1 14 14.00 73.0 14.00 73.0 350 356 - 33.1 355 33.1 #18 10 15.00 91.0 15.00 91.0 450 250 381 41.3 381 41.3 1P4 - 50 No. 51 SThuc*.,.iiiiiiiiiiiii 1*T I #18 x 12 15.00 91.0 15.00 91.0 450 300 381 41.3 - 381 41.3 14 15.00 91.0 15.00 91.0 350 381 - 41.3 381 - 41.3 16 15.00 91.0 15.00 91.0 400 381 41.3 381 41.3 #20 10 20.00 110.0 20.00 177.0 500 250 508 49.9 508 80.3 12 20.00 120.0 20.00 120.0 300 508 54.4 508 54.4 14 20.00 149.0 20.00 149.0 350 508 67.9 508 67.9 16 20.00 120.0 20.00 120.0 400 508 54.4 508 54.4 18 20.00 136.0 20.00 136.0 450 508 61.7 508 61.7 #24 10 20.60 142.0 20.00 142.0 600 250 508 64.4 508 64.4 12 20.00 150.0 20.00 150.0 300 508 68.0 508 68.0 14 20.00 162.0 20.00 162.0 350 508 73.5 508 73.5 16 20.00 162.0 20.00 162.0 400 508 73.5 - 508 73.5 18 20.00 162.0 20.00 162.0 450 508 73.5 508 73.5 20 20.00 151.0 20.00 190.0 500 508 68.5 508 86.2 14- 24 AGS For AGS fitting information, see publication 20.05 350 - 600 + Contact Victaulic for details. Available with male threaded small end No. 52. * Ductile Iron except those marked (sw) which are segmentally welded steel. IMPORTANT NOTE: Steel eccentric reducers available through 30/750 mm, contact Victaulic for dimensions. # For use on cut grooved systems only. For roll grooved systems, Victaulic offers the Advanced Groove System (AGS). For pricing and availability of cut groove fittings in this size, contact your nearest Victaulic sales office. § cast fitting available for J.l.S. size. Contact Victaulic for details. www.victaulic.com jtauIic. VICTAULIC IS REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF VICTAULIC COMPANY. © 2006 VICTAULIC COMPANY. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. PRINTED IN THE USA. 07.01_24 REV_L Mechanical-I® ® <:> (j (J IL PC- BI SEE VICTAULIC PUBLICATION 10.01 FOR DETAILS STYLES 920 AND 920N Victaulic MechanicalT® Outlet provides a direct branch connection at any location a hole can be cut in pipe. The hole is cut oversize to receive a "holefinder" locating collar which secures the outlet in position permanently. A pressure responsive gasket seals on the pipe O.D. Cross-type connections can be achieved by utilizing two upper housings of the same style and size, with the same or differing branch size connections. NOTE: Style 920 and Style 920N housings cannot be mated to each other to achieve a cross connection. Style 920 and Style 920N Mechanical-T outlets are available with grooved or female threaded outlet. Specify choice on order. Units are supplied painted with plated bolts. Galvanized hous- ings are available, supplied with plated bolts. All sizes of Style 920 and 920N are rated at 500 psi/3450kPa working pressure on Schedule 10 and 40 carbon steel pipe. They may also be used on high density polyethylene or poly- butylene (HDPE) pipe. Pressure ratings on HDPE are dependent on the pipe rating. Contact Victaulic for ratings on other pipe. Style 920 and 920N are not recommended for use on PVC plastic pipe. Standard piping practices dictate that the Mechanical-T Styles 920 and 920N must be installed so that the main and branch connections are a true 90° angle when permanently attached to the pipeline surface. Additionally, the Vic-Tap Il® hole cutting tool, which allows for hole cutting capabilities on pressurized systems, utilizes the Style 920 Mechanical-T in conjunction with the Series 726 Vic-Ball Valve to create the Style 931 Vic-Tap II Mechanical-T unit. See page 8 for further information. 0 STYLE 920 CROSS PATENTED STYLES 920 AND 920N MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS Housing/Coating: Ductile iron conforming to ASTM A-536, grade 65-45-12, with orange enamel coating. Ductile iron conforming to ASTM A-395, grade 65-45-15, is available upon special request. Optional: Hot dipped galvanized Gasket: (Specify choice*) Grade "E" EPDM EPDM (Green color code). Temperature range —30°F to +230°F/-34°C to +110°C. Recommended for cold and hot water service within the specified temperature range plus a variety of dilute acids, oil-free air and many chemical services. UL Classified in accordance with ANSI/NSF 61 for cold +86°F/+30°C and hot +180°F/+82°C. NOT RECOMMENDED FOR PETROLEUM SERVICES. Grade "T' nitrile Nitrile (Orange color code). Temperature range —20°F to +180°F/-29°C to +82°C. Recommended for petroleum products, air with oil vapors, vegetable and mineral oils within the specified temperature range. Not recommended for hot water services over +150°F/+66°C or for hot dry air over +140°F/+60°C. *Services listed are General Service Recommendations only. It should be noted that there are services for which these gaskets are not recommended. Reference should always be made to the latest Victaulic Gasket Selection Guide for specific gasket service recommendations and for a listing of services which are not recommended. Bolts/Nuts: Heat-treated plated carbon steel, trackhead meeting the physical and chemical requirements of ASTM A-449 and physical requirements of ASTM A-183. JOB/OWNER CONTRACTOR ENGINEER System No. Submitted By Spec Sect Pa ra Location Approved www.victaulic.com vicTAuLic IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF VICTAULIC COMPANY. © 2010 VICTAULIC COMPANY. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. REVK JtauIic 11.02_i CARBON STEEL PIPE - HOLE CUT PRODUCTS 11.02 Mechanical-I® Bolted Branch Outlets STYLES 920 AND 920N Dimensions 2 x 1/2 (a) a 920N 500 1.50 1 200 253 1.61 5.35 2.75 31 50 15 345O 38.1 51 64 - 41 136 70 15 - 500 1.50 1.97 253 1.61 5.35 275 31 3/4 (a) U 920N 20 3450 38..J_..~o 64 - 41 136 70 1.5 - 920 N 500 1.50 1.85 2.53 1.61 5.35 2.75 3.0 1 25 3450 38.1 47 64 - 41 136 70 1.4 - 920N 500 1.75 2.05 2.75 3.00 1.61 5.35 3.00 3.5 3.2 11/4 (a) to 32 3450 44.5 52 70 76 41 136 76 1.7 1.5 920N 500 1.75 2.03 2.75 3.12 3.2 1½ (a) to 1.61 5.35 3.25 3.6 40 3450 44.5 52 70 79 41 136 83 1.7 1.5 2½ ½ (a) 0 92 N 500 1.50 2.21 2.74 91.82 5.64 2.75 3.0 65 15 3450 38.1 56 70 - + 46 143 70 1.4 - 500 5.64 2.75 V. (a) 920 N 1.50 2.18 2.74 1.82 3.0 20 3450 38.1 ,[ 55 70 - 46 143 70 1.4 - 500 1.50 2.06 2.74 1.82 5.64 2.75 2.9 1(a) 920N 25 3450 38.1 52 70 - 46 143 70 . 1.4 - 1 ¼ t (a) a ' 920N 500 1.75 2.30 3.00 3.25 1.82 6.29 3.00 3.5 3.2 32 3450 44.5 58 76 83 46 160 76 1.7 1.5 500 2.00 2.28 3.00 3.25 1.82 626 3.25 3.6 3.3 1½ t (a) a 920 N 40 3450 50.8 58 76 83 46 159 83 1.7 1.6 ½ (a) 76.1 X 92 N 0 300 1.50 2.22 2.75 2.25 6.46 3.18 3.9 15 2065 38.1 56 70 - 57 164 81 1.8 - 920N 300 1.50 2.19 2.75 2.25 6.46 1/4 (a) 3.18 3.9 20 2065 38.1 56 70 - 57 164 81 1.8 - 920N . 300 1.50 2.07 2.75 2.25 6.46 3.18 3.8 I (a( 25 2065 38.1 53 70 - 57 164 81 1.7.--- 500 1.75 2.30 3.00 1,92 6.29 3.00 3.5 3.2 1 V4 (a) u 920N 3.31 32 3450 44.5 58 76 84 49 160 76 1.6 1.5 2 9 0N 500 2.00 2.28 3.00 3.31 6.29 1½ (a) a 1.92 3.25 3.5 . 3.3 40 920N 3450 50.8 58 76 84 49 160 83 1.6 1.5 3 ½ (a) X 500 1.50 2.52 3.05 2.28 6.15 2.75 3.4 80 15 [ 3450 38.1 64 78 - 58 156 70 1.6 - 500 1.50 2.49 3.05 2.28 6.15 2.75 3.4 1/4 (a) a 920N 20 L 3450 38.1 . 63 78 58 156 J 70 1,6 - 150 2.38 3.06 2.28 6.15 2.75 3.3 1(a) 920N I 500 25 3450 38.1 61 78 - 58 156 70 1.6 - 1,75 2.55 3.25 2.28 6.15 3.00 3.8 3.7 1¼ (a) to 920 N 500 3.56 32(b) 1 ½(a) to 3450 500 44.5 2.00 65 2.78 83 3.50 90 3.56 58 2.28 156 J 76 1.8 1.8 6.15 I' 3.25 4,1 3.8 40(b) 920 N 3450 1 50.8 71 1 89 90 58 156 83 1.9 1.8 2 (a) U 50 920N 500 3450 2.50 63.5 2.75 70 3.50 89 3.56 90 2.28 58 6.75 172 3.88 99 4.9 2.3 4.6 2.1 3½ 2 920N 500 2.50 3.00 3.75 2.44 6.72 3.88 3.8 90 50 3450 63.5 76 - 95 62 171 99 1.8 TABLE CONTINUED ON PG. 3 Center of run to engaged pipe end, female threaded outlet only (dimensions approximate). t Available with grooved or female threaded outlet. Specify choice on order. * Center of run to end of fitting. # Female threaded outlets are available to NPland BSPT specifications. @ See page 7 for Fire Protection approvals and pressure ratings. (a) British Standard female pipe threaded outlet is available as listed. Specify "BSPT" clearly on order. (b)For 76.1 mm threaded outlet, specify 21/2" BSPT clearly on order. § Vds approved for fire protection services LPCB approved for fire protection services 0 Approved for use in China by Tianjin Approvals Company. DIMENSIONS I r"18 11a " S GROOVED OUTLET 0 + IR FEMALE THREADED OUTLET Provides a direct branch connection at any location where a hole can be cut in the pipe A pressure responsive gasket provides the seal Request Publication 11.03 foir Mechanical-T cross assemblies Pressure rated up to 500 psi/3450 kPa on steel pipe; also available for use with HDPE pipe Sizes from 2 x ½'750 x 15 mm through 8 x 4/200 x 100 mm IMPORTANT NOTES: Style 920 and Style 920N housings cannot be mated to one another to achieve cross connections. www.viCtaulic.Com ,It A-c-ta-uhid vIcTAuLIC IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF VICTAIL LIC COMPANY. © 2010 vlc'rAuuc COMPANY. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 11.02_2 REV _K CARBON STEEL PIPE - HOLE CUT PRODUCTS 11.02 Mechanical-I® Bolted Branch Outlets STYLES 920 AND 920N DIMENSIONS ( V --Z O - TABLE CONTINUED FROM PAGE 2 V 4 ½ 92 N 500 150 3.03 356 269 I 701 2.75 37 I 100 X 0 j_ 3450 j 38J 77 - - 68 178 70 18 4 - ~ (a) 920N 500 1.50 3.00 356 2.69 701 275 37 -- 20 - j 3450 381 __ 76 j90 68 178 70 - 1.8 4 - 1 (a) D 920N 500 ) 1.50 2.88 3.56 269 7.01 275 36 25 3450 f381 73 90 - 68 178 70 18 - GROOVED OUTLET 1¼ (a) ta920N 500 j 175 ( 3.08 378 400 269 701 300 4.0 36 19L44. 5J _L96 102 .L 68 178 76 - 194 1.8 11/2 (a) tD 92081 500 2.00 328 400 400 1 269 701 325 42 39 -z--i . L 3450 508 83 . 102 1024 68 178 83 2.0 4 19 2 )a)ta 500 4 250 325 400 . 4.00 269 701 388 5.0 46 50 920N 3450 635 83 102 102 68 178 99 23 2.1 2.88 ! V 76.1 mm 65 :+fl r73t 102 ! 73 _68 186L 2 6.4 9 3(a)t 500 350 . 331 450 412 269 4 773 512 8.4 64 80 920 3450 88.9 84 114 105 I 68 196 130 38 29 FEMALE THREADED OUTLET 1¼ (a) - 4 500 ~ 175 3.08 t 378 - p263 4 764 305 50 445 1 108.0 X32 920N 13450 4 4 78 196 - - j_&7 194 78 23 1 ½ )a) 500 2.00 3 28 400 ) 263 764 2S 50 Provides a direct branch connection at 40 92081 3450 50.8 I 83 102 1 - 67 I 194 83 23 - any location where a hole can be cut 2(a) 920N 45001 250 I25 t4001 - 263 764 40040 in the pipe 50 - 3450k 63.5 + 834 102 67* 194i02 i 19 761 920 500 I 2.75 I 288 400 I 400 2.63 764 429 80 78 A pressure responsive gasket provides .Iiim _4J' 73 102 4 102 4 67 194 4- 109 36 3.5 the seal 3(a) 920 500 3.50 331 4.50 I 450 263 763 488 68 65 80 3450 88.9 84_J 114 4 114 67 1 194 4 124 4 31 L 30 Request Publication 11.03 for 5 x 1½(a) t 920 500 2.00 403 475 475 316 ) 9.70 369 74 7.6 Mechanical-T cross assemblies 125 40 3450 508 4 102 121 121 4 80 4 246 4 94 34 34 2 (a) t 920 500 250 4.00 475 4.75 316 P 970 1 4.38 8.2 80 Pressure rated up to 500 psi/3450 kPa 50 - 3450 635 102 121 121 I 80 246 111 37 36 on steel pipe; also available for use 2½)a) t I 500 275 363 475 4754 316 4 970 1 463 83 1 79 with HDPE pipe 65 920 3450 699 J_ 92 1,21. 121 4 80 246 41_ 38 36 761 920 500 275 3.75 ) 4.75 3.16 970 463 80 Sizes from 2x½"/50x15mm . me, - 3450 69°L 95 121 804 246118 p3.6 through 8 x 4/200 x 100mm 3(a) 920 500 350 381 500 463 316 I 970 531 84 88 80 3450 1 88.9 97 4 127 118 80 i 246 135 38 40 ± t + 2 500 2.50 375 450 317 800 388 80 133.0 x 50 920N 3450 I 635 95 I 114 - 81 I 203 99 3.6 - 3 SOOt 350 I8lS.00ff p3004 946 80 920 3450 I 88.9 97 127 - 76 240 135 3.6 - TABLE CONTINUED ON PG. 4 IMPORTANT NOTES: Center of run to engaged pipe end, female threaded outlet only (dimensions approximate). Style 920 and Style 920N housings cannot be t Available with grooved or female threaded outlet. Specify choice on order. mated to one another * Center of run to end of fitting. to achieve cross connections. # Female threaded outlets are available to NPT and BSPT specifications. @ See page 7 for Fire Protection approvals and pressure ratings. (a) British Standard female pipe threaded outlet is available as listed. Specify 'BSPT' clearly or, order. (b)For 76.1 mm threaded outlet, specify 21/2' BSPT clearly on order. § Vds approved for fire protection services o LPCB approved for fire protection services 0 Approved for use in China by Tianjin Approvals Company. www.viCtauliC.com vicTAuLic IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF VICTAULIC COMPANY. 0 2010 VICTAULIC COMPANY. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. REV_K \4taulicf 11.02_3 CARBON STEEL PIPE - HOLE CUT PRODUCTS 11.02 Mechanical-I® Bolted Branch Outlets STYLES 920 AND 920N DIMENSIONS GROOVED OUTLET FEMALE THREADED OUTLET Provides a direct branch connection at any location where a hole can be cut in the pipe A pressure responsive gasket provides the seal Request Publication 11.03 for Mechanical-T cross assemblies Pressure rated up to 500 psi/3450 kPa on steel pipe; also available for use with HDPE pipe Sizes from 2 x 1/2750 x 15 mm through 8 x 4/200 x 100 mm IMPORTANT NOTES: Style 920 and Style 920N housings cannot be mated to one another to achieve cross connections. Size Style N Ma x. Work Pre sure@ Iilhlbl•I1L.I.L Appr ~. Weight Each TABLE CONTINUED FROM PAGE 3 1½ t 139.7 >< 920N 500 200 3.78 450 330 823 I 3.25 70 40 3450 508 96 114 - 84 209 83 32 - 2 -t 920N 500 2.50 3.75 450 330 823 I 3.88 90 50 3450 63.5 95 114 - 84 209 99 41 - 6 1¼ (a) '< 920N 500 1.75 4.43 513 513 3.79 9.15 325 51 48 150 32(b) 3450 44.5 112 130 130 96 232 83 23 22 116 (a) to 920N 500 2.00 4.40 5.13 5.13 3.79 915 325 5.4 5.1 40(b) 3450 50.8 112 130 130 96 232 83 2.4 23 920N 500 2.50 4.38 5.13 5.13 3.79 9.15 3.88 60 56 2(a) to 50 3450 63.5 111 130 130 96 232 99 27 25 76.lwmo 920 500 2.75 415 5.21 3.69 105. 463 84 3450 69.9 105 - 132 94 267 118 - 3.8 3.50 4.31 5.50 3.69 1051 5.31 99 84 3(a) t 920 500 5.13 80 3450 88.9 110 140 130 94 267 135 4.5 3.8 920 500 4.50 3.81 5.75 3.69 10.51 625 10.1 10.1 4(a) to 5.38 100 3450 114.3 97 146 137 94 267 159 46 46 1½ (a) 159.0 x 920N 500 2.00 4.41 5.13 3.63 9.40 3.25 78 40 3450 50.8 112 130 - 92 239 83 35 - 2(a) 920N 500 2.50 4.38 5.13 3.63 9.40 3.88 80 50 3450 1 63.5 111 130 - 92 239 99 3.6 500 2.75 4.38 5.50 5.13 3.63 9.40 ' 4.63 9.5 9.5 76.1 mm 920 3450 69.9 111 140 130 92 239 118 4.3 4.3 3 920 500 3.50 4.31 5.50 5.13 3.63 9.40 5.31 8.1 14.0 80 3450 88.9 110 140 130 92 239 135 3.7 6.4 108.0mm 92 0 500 4.50 4.45 5.38 3.63 9.40 6.12 10.0 3450 114.3 113 - 137 92 239 155 - 4.5 4 920 500 4.50 3.81 5.75 3.63 9.40 6.25 18.0 100 3450 114.3 96.80 146 - 92 239 159 8.2 - TABLE CONTINUED ON PG. 5 Center of run to engaged pipe end, female threaded outlet only (dimensions approximate). t Available with grooved or female threaded outlet. Specify choice on order. t Center of run to end of fitting. # Female threaded outlets are available to NPT and BSPT specifications. @ See page 7 for Fire Protection approvals and pressure ratings. (a) British Standard female pipe threaded outlet is available as listed. Specify "BSPT" clearly on order. (b)For 76.1 mm threaded outlet, specify 21/2" BSPT clearly on order. § Vds approved for fire protection services o -PCB approved for fire protection services 0 Approved for use in China byTianjin Approvals Company. www.victaulic.com vicTAuLic IS REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF VICTAULIC COMPANY. © 2010 vicTAuLic COMPANY. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 11.024 4tauiicr REVK CARBON STEEL PIPE - HOLE CUT PRODUCTS 11.02 Mechanical-I® Bolted Branch Outlets STYLES 920 AND 920N DIMENSIONS GROOVED OUTLET FEMALE THREADED OUTLET Provides a direct branch connection at any location where a hole can be cut in the pipe A pressure responsive gasket provides the seal Request Publication 11.03 for Mechanical-T cross assemblies Pressure rated up to 500 psi/3450 kPa on steel pipe; also available for use with HDPE pipe Sizes from 2 x ½150 x 15mm through 8 x 4/200 x 100 mm TABLE CONTINUED FROM PAGE 4 1 165.1 X 25 920N 500 3450 1.50 38.1 3.88 4.56 I 99 116 I - I f -- -t - .+--t 3.79 96 I 9.34 I 237 2.75 8.0 70 1 3.6 - 1¼ U 920N 500 1.75 t-- 4.43 5.13 . 3.79 9.34 t 3.25 I 8.4 32 1½ (a) to 3450 .4 500 44.5 2.00 113 4.41 - i13O 5.13 5.13 96 3.79 9.34 - 83 38 3.25 8.4 5.4 40 920N . 3450 I 50.8 112 130 130 +--- -- 96 237 83 3.8 2.4 2(a) t 50 920N i 500 3450 2.50 63.5 t----±' 4.38 111 --'F --1----+ 5.13 5.13 130 130 3.79 96 .......- 934 237 I + 3.88 8.5 6.0 99 3.9 2.7 76.1 MM 500 2.75 4.01 I 5.13 5.21 3.63 10.51 4.63 I 8.6 7.6 80 I 20L° 3450 500 69.9 3.50 ---.-- 110 I 4.31 130 132 I -.-.+-------- 5.50 5.13 92 3.63- 92 267 I - 10.51 267 118 3.9 3.4 ..--+- t 5.31 10.2 8.4 135 4.6 ( 8a9j I 11011401301 I 1 4 (a) to 100 920 920 ----..--f 500 3450 500 3450 4.50 114.3 2.75 69.9 3.81 97 I 5.44 I 138 5.38 j I 146 j 137 ----f.- I 6.19 6.25 157 159 3.63 92 --- 4.81- 122 10.51 267 1 I1 12.42 t I 316 I 6.25 10.5 8.4 159 4.8 3.8 - 4.50 I 11.6 11.6 114 I 5.3 I 5.3 8 2(a) 3 200 50 2½ (a) t 2.75 --t ----t ---- 5.07 6.19 6.19 -- 4.81 12.42 ---±- -f 4.50 11.6 11.6 - T.345(0 920500 ( 65 - 69j 129 j 157 157 122j 316 11415.35.3 76.1 mm 920 ---.-- 500 3450 2.75 I 69.9 ----f 5.25 I 133 I 6.25 - 159 -+ f--4---+ 4.81 122 12.42 316 1 12.42 ~......... 4.56 ( 11.6 116 - 5.3 5.31 12.6 11.6 3(a) to 80 920 j 500 3450 I 3.50 1889 5.31 f135 6.50 6.50 165 165 4.81 122J 316 134_5.7 j5.3 4(a) to 920 500 4.50 4.81 T 6.75 6.38 4.81 12.42 6.25 15.3 12.5 100 I 3450 114.3 122 171 162 1 122 1 316 159 6.9 5.7 Center of run to engaged pipe end, female threaded outlet only (dimensions approximate). t Available with grooved or female threaded outlet. Specify choice on order. * Center of run to end of fitting. # Female threaded outlets are available to NPT and BSPT specifications. @ See page 7 for Fire Protection approvals and pressure ratings.' (a) British Standard female pipe threaded outlet is available as listed. Specify "BSPT" clearly on order. (b)For 76.1 mm threaded outlet, specify 21/2" BSPT clearly on order. § Vds approved for fire protection services o LPCB approved for fire protection services 0 Approved for use in China by Tianjin Approvals Company. IMPORTANT NOTES: Style 920 and Style 920N housings cannot be mated to each other to achieve cross connections. www.victaulic.com VICTAULIC IS REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF vicrAuLic COMPANY. 02010 vICTAULIC COMPANY. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. REVK \4tauljcf 11.02_5 CARBON STEEL PIPE - HOLE CUT PRODUCTS 11.02 Mechanical-I® Bolted Branch Outlets STYLES 920 AND 920N FLOW DATA Flow test data has shown that the total head loss between point (1) and (2) for the Style 920, 920N and 929 MechanicalT® fittings can best be expressed in terms of the pressure difference across the inlet and branch. The pressure difference can be obtained from the relationship below. C, and Ky Values Values for flow of water at +60°F/+16°C are shown in the table below. Formulas for C51K Values: AP = Where: AP = Q2 Where: cv2 Q = Flow (GPM) Q = Flow (m3/h) AP = Pressure Drop (psi) AP = Pressure Drop (bar) = ç x C = Flow Coefficient Q = x JAT K = Flow Coefficient Exaggerated for clarity Hazen-Williams coefficient of friction is 120. Pipe with a wall thickness of 0.165in14.2rnm. www.victaulic.com Jtauiicr vICTAuLIC IS REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF VICTAULIC COMPANY. © 2010 VICTAULIC COMPANY. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 11.026 REV_K CARBON STEEL PIPE - HOLE CUT PRODUCTS 11.02 Mechanical-I® Bolted Branch Outlets STYLES 920 AND 920N FIRE PROTECTION APPROVALS AND PRESSURE RATINGS The information provided below is based on the latest listing and approval data at the time of publication. Listings/Approvals are subject to change and/or additions by the approvals agencies. Contact Victaulic for performance on other pipe and the latest listings and approvals. 21/2 -6 2.875 - 6.625 All 10,40 400 400 400 290 65-150 73J3-168.3 2.875 - 4.500 I I All t .. OF .1 2155 4 300 300 300 .i 1999 290- 21/2-4 65-100 73.0-114.3 2065 2065 2065 1999 - 21/2 -4 2.875 - 4.500 All SF i 300 300 } 300 290 65-100 73.0- 114.3 6.625 168.3 6.625 8.625 I 34 10 30 40 4 2065 300 2065 300 400 4 2065 300 2065 300 2065 250 1724 300 I 4..J2. 1999 290 1999 290 t 6 150 6 150 8 200 219.1 8.625 1 21/2 1 1040 2755 300 1 - - 250 - 8 34 10 - - 200 219.1 - 8.625 I . 34 30 40 I 2065 .-.-.... 300 - 1724 300 f. - _____ 8 200 219.1 I 2065 2065 j NOTES: 10 refers to Listed/Approved Schedule 10 steel sprinkler pipe. 40 refers to Listed/Approved Schedule 40 steel sprinkler pipe. DE refers to Listed/Approved Dyna-Flow steel sprinkler pipe manufactured by American Tube Company. SF refers to Listed/Approved Super-Flo steel sprinkler pipe manufactured by Allied Tube and Conduit Corporation. 232 362 1599 2496 232 362 1599 2496 232 362 1599 i 2496 232 362 1599 2496 232 362 1599 2496 145 1000.- 145 1000 145 1000 - VIC-TAP II HOLE CUTTING TOOL FOR The Vic-Tap II hole cutting tool is designed for use with the Style 931 Vic-Tap II Mechanical-T unit, 4 - 8/100 - 200MM CARBON STEEL PIPE which is a combination of the Style 920 Mechanical-T and Series 726 Vic-Ball Valve. The Vic-Tap II is capable of tapping into carbon steel pipe systems under pressures up to 500 psi/3450kPa. The Style 931 Vic-Tap II Mechanical-T unit is a full port ball valve which can be mounted on 4/100mm, 5'/125 mm, 67150mm and 87200 mm diameter pipe. The Style 931 comes with a 21/2765mm grooved outlet. The drill motor is an electric motor with ground fault circuit interrupter (GFCI) in accordance with safety codes. For more information, refer to publication 24.01 www.victaulic.com VICTAULIC IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF VICTAULIC COMPANY. © 2010 VICTAULIC COMPANY. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. REVK \4taulicr 11.027 Mechanical-I® STYLES 920 AND 920N INSTALLATION Reference should always be made to the 1-100 Victaulic Field Installation Handbook for the product you are installing. Handbooks are included with each shipment of Victaulic products for complete installation and assembly data, and are available in PDF format on our website at www.victaulic.com. WARRANTY Refer to the Warranty section of the current Price List or contact Victaulic for details. NOTE This product shall be manufactured by Victaulic or to Victaulic specifications. All products to be installed in accordance with current Victaulic installation/assembly instructions. Victaulic reserves the right to change product specifications, designs and standard equipment without notice and without incurring obligations. For complete contact information, visit www.victaulic.com 11.02 1480 REV K UPDATED 4/2010 ictauIic vICTAuLIC IS REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF vIcTAuLIc COMPANY. © 2010 VICTAUUC COMPANY. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 11.02K FireLock® Rigid Coupling STYLE 005 WITH VIC.PLUSTM GASKET SYSTEM (NORTH AMERICA ONLY) FireLock® Style 005 rigid coupling has a unique, patented angle-pad design which allows the housings to offset while clamping the grooves. By permitting the housings to slide on the angled bolt pads, rigidity is obtained. Support and hanging requirements correspond to NFPA 13 Sprinkler Systems. Angle-pad design permits assembly by removing one nut/bolt and swinging the housing over the gasket. This reduces components to handle during assembly. Style 005 FireLock coupling are designed and recommended for use ONLY on fire protection systems. Vic.PlusTM Gasket System: In North America, Victaulic® offers a gasket system which requires no field lubrication on wet pipe systems that are hydrostatically tested. The VicPlusTM System (patented) is dry, clean, and non-toxic. It reduces assembly time substantially and eliminates the mess and chance of over- lubrication. Please refer to the latest copy of the Victaulic Field Installation Handbook (1-100) for supplemental lubrication requirements and dry pipe fire protection system notes. V ( [J!!J ç;;•'i § LPC and VdS Approved, LJwe notes on page 4 SEE VICTAULIC PUBLICATION 10.01 FOR DETAILS PATENTED (PIua Gasket System LISTING/APPROVALS The information provided below is based on the latest listing and approval data at the time of publication. Listings/Approvals are subject to change and/or additions by the approvals agencies. Contact Victaulic for performance on other pipe and the latest listings and approvals. °FM approved for service in 1 ½ 4' pipe. # UL Listed for service up to 4' pipe only. @ UL Listed for service up to 3' only. JOB/OWNER CONTRACTOR ENGINEER System No. Submitted By Spec Sect Pa ra Location Approved www.victaulic.com VICTAULIC IS REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF vicTAuLic COMPANY. © 2006 VICTAULIC COMPANY. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. PRINTED IN THE USA. REV_I /tauIic' 10.02_i IPS CARBON STEEL PIPE - FIRE PROTECTION PRODUCTS 10.02 FiréLock® Rigid Coupling STYLE 005 WITH VIC-PLUSTM GASKET SYSTEM (NORTH AMERICA ONLY) Size Max. Work, Pressure § Max. End Load AlImV. Pipe End Sep. Bolt/NutC No - Size _Dimensions - Inches/mm I 11/4 1.660 350 755 0.05 2-Vax2 /4 275 450 188 12 32 42.4 2413 3370 12 70 114 148 0.5 1½ 1.900 350 990 0.05 3.00 4.75 1.88 1.2 40 483 2413 4415 1.2 - 2 Va 2V 76 121 148 0.5 2 2.375 350 1550 0.07 2-Vax2½ 3.50 5.2S 1.88 1.6 50 60.3 2413 6900 1.7 2 133 148 0.7 21/2 2.875 350 2270 0.07 - 2 'A 2½ 4.00 5.75 1.88 1.9 65 73.0 2413 10110 1.7 102 146 148 . .09 761 mm 3.000 350 2475 0.07 X 2 V8 2½ 4.13 5.75 1.88 1.9 76.1 2413 11010 1.7 105 146 148 0.9 3 3.500 350 3365 0.07 - 2 Va 2½ 4.63 6.13 1.88 2.1 80 88.9 2413 14985 1.7 118 156 148 1.0 4 4.500 350 5565 0.16 2-%x2% 5.75 7.25 2.13 3.1 100 114.3 2413 24770 4.1 146 184 54 1.4 080 mm 4.250 300 4255 0.16 - 2 Va X 2½ 5.63 7.25 2.13 3.1 . 108.0 2068 18940 4.1 143 184 54 1.4 S 5.563 300 7290 0.16 6.88 9.00 2.13 4.5 125 141.3 2068 32445 4.1 - 2 ½ 3 175 229 54 2.0 133.0mm 5.250 300 6495 0.16 2-½x23/4 6.63 9.00 2.13 4.5 133.0 2068 28900 4.1 168 229 54 2.0 139.7 mm 5.500 300 7125 0.16 2- ½ x 2/4 6.88 9.00 2.13 4.8 139.7 2068 31715 4.1 175 229 54 2.2 6 6.625 300 10340 0.16 2- /2 x 3 203 8.00 10.00 2.13 5.0 150 168.3 2068 46020 4.1 254 53 2.3 159.0 mm 6.250 300 9200 0.16 2- /2 x 2 /4 7.63 10.00 2.13 5.5 159.0 2068 40955 4.1 194 254 54 2.5 6.500 300 9955 0.16 8.15 10.00 2.13 5.5 165.1 mm 165.1 2068 44295 4.1 2- 1h x 3 207 254 54 2.5 8 8.625 300 17525 1 0.19 - 2 Va 4' 10.50 13.14 2.63 113 200 219.1 2068 78000 4.8 267 334 67 5.1 a Working Pressure and End Load are total, from all internal and external loads, based on standard weight (ANSI) steel pipe, standard roll or cut grooved in accordance with Victaulic specifications. Contact Victaulic for perfor- mance on other pipe. WARNING: FOR ONE TIME FIELD TEST ONLY, the Maximum Joint Working Pressure may be increased to 11/2 times the figures shown. t The allowable pipe separation dimension shown is for system layout purposes only. Style 005 couplings are con- sidered rigid connections and will not accommodate expansion or contraction of the piping system. @ Number of bolts required equals number of housing segments. Metric thread size bolts are available (color coded gold) for all coupling sizes upon request. Contact Victaulic for details. § Style 005 couplings are VdS and LPC Approved to 12 Bar/175 psi. DIMENSIONS ilL IiJlL' 111AFIX I WI Edl 10] - SO - M Rated for wet and dry sprinkler systems at 350 psi/2413 kPa for 1 ¼ - 4732 - 100 mm sizes and 300 psi /2068 kPa for 41/4 - 87108 -200 mm sizes; Schedule 10 roll grooved or Schedule 40 cut or roll grooved steel pipe. Style 005 is rigid and does not accommodate expansion, contraction or angular deflection. www.victaulic.com taulicr VICTAULIC IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF VICTAULIC COMPANY. © 2006 VICTAULIC COMPANY. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. PRINTED IN THE USA. 10.02_2 REV-1 IPS CARBON STEEL PIPE - FIRE PROTECTION PRODUCTS 10.02 FireLock® Rigid Coupling STYLE 005 WITH VIC-PLUSTM GASKET SYSTEM (NORTH AMERICA ONLY) MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS Housing: Ductile iron conforming to ASTM A-536, grade 65-45-12. Ductile iron conforming to ASTM A-395, grade 65-45-15, is available upon special request. Housing Coating: Orange enamel (North America); red enamel (Europe) Optional: Hot dipped galvanized Gasket: Grade "E" EPDM - Type A Vic-PIus°' Gasket System A (Violet color code). FireLock products have been Listed by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. and Approved by Factory Mutual Research for wet and dry (oil free air) sprinkler services up to the rated working pressure using the Grade "E" Type A Vic-Plus°° Gasket System, requiring no field lubrication for most installation conditions. Grade L" Silicone Recommended for dry heat, air without hydrocarbons to +350°F and certain chemical services. For dry services, Victaulic continues to recommend the use of Grade E" Type A FlushSeal® Gasket. Contact Victaulic for details. Bolts/Nuts: Heat-treated plated carbon steel, trackhead meeting the physical and chemical requirements of ASTM A-449 and physical requirements of ASTM A-183. A Standard gasket and FlushSeal gasket approved for dry pipe systems to -40°F/-40°C. Based on "typical" pipe surface conditions, supplemental lubricant is recommended for services installed below O°F/-18°C and for all dry pipe systems or systems to be subjected to air tests prior to being filled with water. Supplemental lubrication may also be required on pipe with raised or undercut weld seams or pipe that has voids and/or cracks at the weld seams. Victaulic continues to recommend the use of FlushSeal gaskets for dry services. www.victaulic.com VICTAULIC IS REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF VICTAULIC COMPANY. © 2006 VICTAULIC COMPANY. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. PRINTED IN THE USA. REV-1 -1 il,, A~ _C_ ta u Ij c r 10.603 FireLock® Rigid Coupling STYLE 005 WITH VIC-PLIJSTM GASKET SYSTEM (NORTH AMERICA ONLY) GENERAL NOTES WARNING: Depressurize and drain the piping system before attempting to install, remove, or adjust any Victaulic piping products. WARRANTY Refer to the Warranty section of the current Price List or contact Victaulic for details. NOTE This product shall be manufactured by Victaulic or to Victaulic specifications. All products to be installed in accordance with current Victaulic installation/assembly instructions. Victaulic reserves the right to change product specifications, designs and standard equipment without notice and without incurring obligations. INSTALLATION Reference should always be made to the 1-100 Victaulic Field Installation Handbook for the product you are installing. Handbooks are included with each shipment of Victaulic products for complete installation and assembly data, and are available in PDF format on our website at www.victaulic.com. For complete contact information, visit www.victaulic.com 10.02 1538 REV UPDATED 9/2006 VICTAULIC IS REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF VICTAULIC COMPANY. 0 2006 VICTAULIC COMPANY. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. PRINTED IN THE USA. 10.02 11 1111111111111111111111111 WCAS-697KR4 \JtauIicr STYLE 75 Style 75 is available where moderate pressures are expected or weight considerations are a factor. Up to 50% lighter in weight than the Style 77, the Style 75 coupling is recommended for service up to 500 psi/3450kPa depending on size. Housings are cast in two identical pieces in all sizes. Hot-dip galvanized and special coatings are available for all sizes. Exaggerated for clarity MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS Housing: Ductile iron conforming to ASTM A-536, grade 65-45-12. Ductile iron conforming to ASTM A-395, grade 65-45-15, is available upon special request. Housing Coating: Orange enamel. Optional: Hot dipped galvanized and others. Gasket: (specify choice*) Grade "E" EPDM EPDM (Green color code). Temperature range —30°F to +230°F/-34°C to +110°C. Recommended for hot water service within the specified temperature range plus a variety of dilute acids, oil-free air and many chemical services. UL classified in accordance with ANSI/NSF 61 for cold +86°F/+30°C and hot +1807/+82°C potable water service. NOT RECOMMENDED FOR PETROLEUM SERVICES. Grade "1" nitrile Nitrile (Orange color code). Temperature range —20°F to +180°F/-29°C to +82°C. Recommended for petroleum products, air with oil vapors, vegetable and mineral oils within the specified temperature range; except hot, dry air over +140°F/+60°C and water over +150°F/+66°C. NOT RECOMMENDED FOR HOT WATER SERVICES. * Services listed are General Service Recommendations only. It should be noted that there are services for which these gaskets are not recommended. Reference should always be made to the latest Victaulic Gasket Selection Guide for specific gasket service recommendations and for a listing of services which are not recommended. Bolts/Nuts: Heat-treated plated carbon steel, trackhead meeting the physical and chemical requirements of ASTM A-449 and physical requirements of ASTM A-183. JOB/OWNER CONTRACTOR ENGINEER System No. Submitted By Spec Sect Para__________ Location Date Approved Date__________________________________ www.victaulic.com - tauIi vicTAuLic IS REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF vicTAuLic COMPANY. © 2008 VICTAULIC COMPANY. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.. .c REV_i 06.05_1 CARBON STEEL PIPE - GROOVED COUPLINGS Flexible Coupling STYLE 75 DIMENSIONS Size r __ _______ 1i .I IF'' II II II il______ 1 25 1,315 L 334 500 3450 680 3025 J_0_1.6 0-006 2-43 - 057 48 2-~x2 2.38 f 61_j 427 1.77 108 45 13 06 1¼ 1660 500 1080 0-0.06 045 268 461"lT' 177 14 32 1½ p422 1 900 3450 500 4805_ 1.420 0-16 0-0.06 2 10' 56' 38 0.40 2 54 2 x 2 291 V 68t117145 482 177 406 1 5 40 48,3 3450 6320 0-1.6 - 33 742- J_122 ,J 45 ,J_ 06 2 2.375 500 2.215 0-0.06 1 31 0.32 - 2 54 2 343 522 188 17 50 60.3 r" 2.875 3450 9860 0-1.6 26 87 133 48 4 08 2½ 500 3245 0-006 026 ' 3.88 568 188 19 65 761 mm * 73.0 3450 14.440 0- 1 6 0-006 0-1.6 r - 15' r - 12 I L 22 026 22 2 -54x2 98 _j 144 48 590 188 L. 150 48 j 09 19 09 3.000 76.1 500 3450 3.535 15730 2-%x2 400 j 102 500 4.800 0-0.06 3 80 3.500 1 2' 022 2-1/2x23/4 450 j 700 1.88 2.9 889 3450 21360 0-1.6 4 ':4...!Z! _J._ 500 6.300 0-006 019 3½ 4.000 a. - 54 I 2- V x 2 500 7.50 1.88 29 90 4 101.6 4.500 3450 28035 7.950 0-16 0-013 16 034 j, 127_J 580 191 48 I 803 213 13 41 500 , - 100 114.3 3450 35380 0-32 .- 1 -6 28 2-½x24 147 -_-t----*.--V---.------- I 204 54 1.9 --------.1-.----± I 0.35-- 1080mm 4.250 450 6.380 0-013 1• 41' 2-12 x 700 779 2.13 3.7 08.0 3000 _395 ._2-32 429 141 198 54 17 41/2 5.000 450 8.820 0-013 1• 26' 025 - 2 54 314 613 943 2.13 55 120 127.0 3100 39250 0-32 - 21 _J 156 240 54 25 450 3100 10.935 48660 0-013 0-3.2 1007 256 213 54 58 2.6 5 125 5.563 141.3 r - i' 027 23 2-54 x 344 688 I 175 450 9.735 . mm 5.250 0-0.13 , 028 655 - 16 X 937 213 6.0 133.0 3100 43325 0-3.2 - 24 166 238 54 2.7 450 10.665 213 .mm* 5.500 t 1397 0-0.13 r 18' 0.28 31,4 680 959 139.7 3100 47460 O-32 24 173 P2 6.000 450 12.735 1524 mm 0-0.13 1 12' 0.21 63 18 - 31,4 738 1048 188 62 6 -. 5 ±L.i0I?_ 450 T 15.525 J....0-32 0-0.13 V 0.23 - 187 800 - 8 266 1107 4 213 _2.8 7.0 6.625 150 168.3 3100 69085 0-32 1• 18 - 2 54 314 203 281 54 32 Continued on page 3. t @ * Refer to notes on page 3. 111111 oil A l IF. 511 1 JIiA www.victaulic.com VICTAULIC IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF VICTAULIC COMPANY. 0 2008 VICTAULIC COMPANY. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 06.052 JtauIic REV_i CARBON STEEL PIPE - GROOVED COUPLINGS 06.05 Flexible Coupling STYLE 75 DIMENSIONS 159.0mm 6.250 450 13.800 0-0.13 1 9 0.24 2-16 x 82.5 7.63 1 10.49 2.13 6.8 159.0 3100 61405 0-3.2 20 194 266 54 i 3.1 t + 203.2mm# 8.000 450 22.635 0-0.13 54 0.16 2_45 9.72 I 13.33 231 12.6 I.... .j. ...'.P9 100725 0-3.2 13 1247 1.. . 58 5.7 8 8.625 450 26.280 0-0.13 , 0 -50 0.18 2-N34/4 10.34 13.97 232 12.4 200 219.1 3100 116945 0-3.2 I 14 263 355 59 5.6 t......- 10.000 f-...f 350 27.500 ._j. 0-0.13 .--.- t-- 0.15 -----1- 12.16 I 15.81 2.53 20.8 254.0mm 9 . , , 0 -43 2- ,8 x 5½ 254.0 + 2400 .+ 122375 ......4 0- 3.2 11 + 309 -f 402 64 + 9.4 12.000 350 39,500 0-0.13 .. . 0.13 I 14.16 17.69 2.53 23.6 - mm 8 304.8 I 2400 175775 0-3.2 i - 9 - X 360 449 . 64 10.7 Working Pressure and End Load are total, from all internal and external loads, based on standard weight (ANSI) steel pipe, standard roll or Cut grooved in accordance with Victaulic specifications. Contact Victaulic for performance on other pipe. WARNING: FOR ONE TIME FIELD TEST ONLY, the Maximum Joint Working Pressure may be increased to 11/2 times the figures shown. t Allowable Pipe End Separation and Deflection figures show the maximum nominal range of movement available at each joint for standard roll grooved pipe. Figures for standard cut grooved pipe may be doubled. These figures are maximums; for design and installation purposes these figures should be reduced by: 50% for 3/4 - 31/2/20 - 90mm: 25% for 471100 mm and larger. @ Number of bolts required equals number of housing segments. Metric thread size bolts are available (color coded gold) for all coupling sizes upon request. Contact Victaulic for details. www.victaulic.com .JtaUuic1' VICTAULIC IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF vIcTAuLIC COMPANY. 0 2008 '/ICTAuLIC COMPANY. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. REV_i 06.05_3 STYLE 75 WARRANTY Refer to the Warranty section of the current Price List or contact Victaulic for details. NOTE This product shall be manufactured by Victaulic or to Victaulic specifications. All products to be installed in accordance with current Victaulic installation/assembly instructions. Victaulic reserves the right to change product specifications, designs and standard equipment without notice and without incurring obligations. INSTALLATION Reference should always be made to the 1-100 Victaulic Field Installation Handbook for the product you are installing. Handbooks are included with each shipment of Victaulic products for complete installation and assembly data, and are available in PDF format on our website at www.victaulic.com. III I III 101 U IUIIII II II 110101111111 WCAS-7BDNAR For complete contact information, visit www.victaulic.com 06.05 1470 REV J UPDATED 1/2008 1.6.Aat-au-hcr vIcTAULIc IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF vICTAULIc COMPANY. 0 2008 vicTAuLic COMPANY. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 06.05 hViLSta - Welded Outlet Fittings 4oMonof nar For Fire Protection & &MERIT. Other Low Pressure Piping Systems Merit WeldMiserTM Tee-Let® Welding Branch Outlet Fittings offer the user a high strength, low cost forged threaded and grooved line of fittings specifically designed and manufactured to be installed on Schedules 5 thru 10, proprietary thin wall flow pipe and standard wall pipe. Merit Tee-Lets are forged steel welding outlet fittings. The material used in manufacture meets the chemical and physical requirements of ASIM A 53, Grades A or B, Type E, A-i 35, A-795, Tee-Lets employ a low weld volume design to provide for either a partial or full penetration weld employing a single pass with minimum burn-through and pipe distortion. Weld Miser Tee-Lets are recommended for use on proprietary thin wall, Schedules 5, 10 and 40 pipe. Threads comply with ANSI B1.20.1 or ISO7/1. They are UL Listed and FM Approved for use conforming to the requirements of Bulletin 13 1999 of the National Fire Protection Association. When used in fire sprinkler systems, Tee-Lets are rated for 300 psi. When used in mechanical systems, maximum pressures are calculated using criteria developed for ASME B31 piping code. Submittal Sheet 9~~g APPROVED For Listing / Approval details contact your AnvilStarm Representative. 'C III 'A 4U *.!f!1 , FM Approval Guide Chapter 1 - Pipe Fittings) Outlet Model Outlet Pipe Size Header Pipe Size Rated Pressure In. In. psig Tee-Let Type A (F-Threaded End) ½,/4,1 11/4, ]I 2, 2½, 3,4 ½ - 8 (Sch. 10, 40) 300 6 (EL-Flow) 1h -4 (Sch. 5, DynaFlow) 2 4 (EL-Flow) 2,4 Tee-Let Type C (Grooved Fad) 1h/4 8 1/4-8 (Sch.10,40) 300 21/2 -8 1/2 -4 (Sch. 5, DynaFlow) Tee-Let Type C/R 11/4 6 (Roll _Grooved _End) 11/4 8 (All Schedules) 300 Merit® Tee-Lets & Drop Nipples For the latest IJL/ULC Listed and FM Approved pressure ratings, versus pipe schedule, )Vi REV. 03.03.06-001 go to www.anvilstar.com or contact your local AnvilStar representative AIWA.Star Nelded Outlet Fittings Fire Products Division of Anvil' International 4 &MERIT. Submittal Sheet UNIFIED OESIGNTm SERIES Merit's Unified Design Series carries all important I design considerations into its entire line of welding I branch outlet fittings. I Merit® WeldMiserTM TeeLets® are designed - - - - and Manufactured to reduce the amount of weld I required to install the Tee-Lets on thin wall or proprietary flow pipe. Typically only one weld-pass I completes the installation. Merit Tee-Lets install with less weld volume than any other brand of welding outlet fittings for fire sprinkler applications. To accomplish this: The contoured end of the fittings employs a reduced outside diameter. Two major advantages are immediately apparent: The thinner wall on the contoured end permits welding temperatures to be matched to the thickness of the branch line or main thereby insuring complete penetration without cold welds, weld roll-off, burn- through or excessive distortion. On smaller sizes a heavier section is maintained on the threaded end of the fitting. This protects the threads from damage during shipping and handling prior to installation as well as from weld distortion. Each outlet size 11/2" and larger, whether male or female threaded, cut grooved or beveled requires the same hole size in the header pipe. This simplifies the installation process. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS Tee-Let welding outlet fittings are manufactured from highly weldable steel which conforms to the chemical and physical requirements of ASTM A-53, Grades A or B, Type E. Ease of installation is assured when automatic welding equipment is used to install Merit Tee-lets. Threads are cut in accordance with the requirements of ANSI B1 .20.1, national standard for tapered pipe threads, or ISO-7-1 threads are available. Tee-Let threaded and grooved welding outlet fittings are UL/ULC Listed and FM Approved for use in the fire sprinkler systems installed in accordance with the requirements of NFPA Bulletin 13. They are rated for 300 PSI operation in fire sprinkler systems, and higher pressures in other non-critical piping systems. Tee-lets are offered in a wide variety of header sizes. The consolidated header sizes shown in the following charts allow the fittings to be installed on more than one header size, permitting the first size listed to fit the header perfectly, while a small gap along the longitudinal center line of the header will appear for the second size listed. Merit® WeldMiserTM Tee-Lets® are identified by a lot number that provides full traceability per ISO 9000 specifications. FOR YOUR PIPING SYSTEMS SPECIFY WELD-MISER TEE-LET5 Branch Outlet Fittings shall be Merit Weld-Miser Tee-let, Lightweight forged steel, employing low weld volume profile to provide for full penetration welds with minimum burn through and pipe distortion on Schedule 5 thru 10, proprietary thin wall, and standard wall pipe. Threads are to be ANSI B1.20. 1, or ISO-7-1, and the bore of the fittings calculated to improve flow. Welding outlets to be UL Listed, FM Approved for use conforming to NFPA, Bulletin 13 and pressure rated for 300 PSI maximum. PAGE 2 OF 5 Merit® Tee-Lets & Drop Nipples For the latest UL/ULC Listed and FM Approved pressure ratings, versus pipe schedule, REV. 03.03.06-002 go to www.anvilstar.com or contact your local AnvilStar representative ,0 &MERIT. * Submittal Sheet Type A Female Three AMA.Star \Welded Outlet Fittings Fire Products Division of WELD-MISE RIy ART g ](I1k"I1_u]k'U NUMBERS Nominal Nominal Outlet Inside Outlet Header Length Diameter Make Up Part Number A B C 0 M Weight Each NPT (BSPT) In (mm) In (mm) In (mm) In (mm) In (mm) Lb. (kg) 1002002 'lax 11/4 .8 0.080 - 6x 6 -200 1 004 1005012 1'/a -1½ 1 1.063 0.700 0.500 0.171 - 32-40 27.0 17.8 12.7 1 0.08 11/2 -2 1.063 0.700 0.500 1 0.171 1005015 - /2X 40-50 27.0 17.8 12.7 L 0.08 2-2½ 1 1.063 1 0.100 1 0.500 1 0.171 1005020 13x - 50-65 27.0 17.8 12.7 0.08 1005025 2½-8 I 1.063 0.700 0.500 0.169 65-200 27.0 17,8 12.7 0.08 1007012 1/4-1½ 1 1.125 1 0.900 1 0.500 0.260 - 32-40 28.6 22.9 12.7 0.12 1½- 2 1.125 1 0.900 1 0.500 0.260 1007015 - 3/4x 40-50 28.6 22.9 12.7 0.12 2-2½ 1.125 0.900 0.500 0.260 1007020 19x - 50-65 28.6 22.9 12.7 0.12 2½-8 1 1.125 1 0.900 1 0.500 0.256 1007025 - 65-200 1 28.6 22.9 1 12.7 0.12 1010012 ]/4],5 1 1.250 1 1.145 1 0.500 0.331 7170012 32-40 31.8 29.1 72.7 0.15 1½-2 1.250 1.145 0.500 0.331 1010015 11700/5 40-50 31.8 1 29.7 /2.7 0.75 1010020 2-2½ 1.250 1 1./45 0.500 0.320 1110020 is 50-65 31.8 29.1 12.7 0.15 2½-3 1.250 1.145 0.500 0.314 1010025 25x 1110025 65-80 31.8 29.1 12.7 0.14 3-4 1.250 1.145 0.500 0.309 1010030 1110030 80-100 31.8 29.1 12.7 0.14 1010050 5-8 1.250 1.145 0.500 0.291 125-200 1 31.8 29.1 /2.7 0.13 1012012 1Y4-1½ 1 1.315 1 1.490 1 0.500 1 0.432 1112012 32-40 1 34.9 1 37.8 1 12.7 .019 1½-2 1 1.375 1 1.490 1 0.500 0.421 1012015 1112015 4050 1 34.9 1 37.8 1 /2.7 1 .019 1012020 2-2½ 1 1.375 1 1.490 1 0.500 1 0.421 1112020 11/4 50-65 34.9 1 37.8 1 /2.7 .019 2½-3 1.375 1.490 1 0.500 0.411 1012025 32x 1112025 65-80 34.9 37.8 12.7 .019 3-4 1.375 1.490 0.500 0.389 1012030 11/2030 80-100 1 34.9 37.8 12.7 .018 5-8 1.375 1.490 0.500 0.389 1012050 1112050 /25-200 34.9 37.8 /2.7 .018 1015015 1½ 1 1.625 1 1.610 1 0.875 1 0.411 11/5015 40 1 41.3 1 40.9 1 22.2 1 .022 2 1 1.625 1 1.610 1 0.815 1 0.411 1015020 1/15020 50 41.3 40.9 22.2 .022 1015025 2½ 1.625 1.610 0.875 0.471 1115025 1½x 65 41.3 ' 40.9 22.2 .022 3-4 1.625 1.610 0.815 0.411 1015030 40x 1115030 80-100 41.3 40.9 22.2 .022 1015040 4 1.625 1.610 0.815 0.411 1115040 /00 41.3 40.9 22.2 1 .022 5-8 1.625 1 1.610 1 0.815 1 0.417 1015050 1115050 125-200 1 41.3 1 40.9 1 22.2 1 .022 WELD -MISER Tm juI DI ME ART NUMBERS I.I ]1II Nominal Nominal Outlet Inside Part Outlet Header Length Diameter Make Up Number A B C D M Weight Each NPT(BSPT) In (mm) In (mm) In (mm) In (mm) In (mm) Lb. (kg) 1020020 2 1.150 2.067 0.875 0.857 1120020 50 44.5 52.5 22.2 0.38 1020025 21/2 1.150 2.067 0.875 0.829 1120025 65 44.5 52.5 22.2 0.38 1020030 3 1.750 2.061 0.875 0.829 1120030 2 x 80 44.5 52.5 22.2 0.39 1020040 4 1.150 2.067 0.815 0.800 1120040 50x 100 44.5 52.5 22.2 0.36 1020050 5 1.150 2.061 0.875 0.743 /120050 125 44.5 52.5 22.2 0.34 1020060 6 1.750 2.067 0.875 0.743 /120060 150 44.5 52.5 22.2 0.34 1020080 8 1.750 2.061 0.875 0.743 200 44.5 52.5 22.2 0.34 1025025 21/2 2.215 2.469 1.125 1.250 1125025 65 54.0 62.7 28.6 0.55 1025030 3 2.215 2.469 1.125 1.200 1/25030 80 54.0 62.7 28.6 0.55 1025040 4 2.215 2.469 /.125 1.150 1125040 2½x 65x 100 54.0 62.7 28.6 0.52 1025050 5 2.215 2.469 1.125 1.150 1/25050 /25 1 54.0 1 62.7 1 28.6 0.52 1025060 6 2.215 2.469 1.125 1.150 1/25060 /50 54.0 62.7 28.6 0.52 1025080 8 2.215 2.469 1.125 1.150 200 54.0 62.7 28.6 1 0.52 1030030 3 1 2.500 1 3.068 1 1.500 1 1.750 - 80 1 63.5 1 77.9 1 38.1 1 0.79 /030040 4 1 2.500 1 3.068 1 1.500 1 1.700 - 3 x /00 1 63.5 1 77.9 1 38.1 0.77 1030050 5 1 2.500 1 3.068 1 1.500 1.700 - 80 /25 1 63.5 1 77.9 1 38.1 1 0.77 1030060 6 1 2.500 1 3.068 1 1.500 1 1.650 - 750 1 63.5 1 77.9 1 38.1 1 0.75 1030080 8 1 2.500 1 3.068 1 1.500 1 1.650 200 1 63.5 1 77.9 1 38.1 1 0.75 1040040 4 1 3.000 1 4.026 1 2.000 1 3.000 - 700 1 76.2 1 102.3 1 50.8 1 1.36 1040050 5 1 3.000 1 4.026 1 2.000 1 2.900 - 4x 100 /25 1 76.2 1 102.3 1 50.8 1 1.32 1040060 6 1 3.000 1 4.026 1 2.000 1 2.800 - 750 76.2 102.3 50.8 1.27 1040080 8 3.000 4.026 2.000 2.800 - 200 76.2 /02.3 50.8 1.27 NOTE: Port #1002002 is not UL Listed or FM Approved. All size-on-size (i.e. 2 x 2) Tee-Lets are not FM Approved. PAGE 3 OF 5 Merit® Tee-Lets & Drop Nipples For the latest UL/ULC Listed and FM Approved pressure ratings, versus pipe schedule. REV. 03.03.06-003 go to www.anvilstar.com or contact your local AnvilStar representative iNJkStar \lIelded Outlet Fittings Fire Products Division of Anvil' International Type B Male Thread Standard Weight Type C Cut Groove Standard Weight Submittal Sheet WELD -MI SER_______ °- .]IYIMa ]11tj[!j' iiAL SIZES V THRU Cut Outlet Male Thread Groove Nominal Outlet Nominal Header Length Inside Diameter Outside Diameter Wall Thickness Std. Wt. Std. Wt. A B C D E F NPT(BSPT) NPT (BSPT) In.(mm) In(mm) !n.(mm) In.(mm) In.(mm) !n.(mm) 1310012 2010012 1/4-1½ 3 1.049 1.315 0.133 32-40 80 26.6 33.4 3.4 1310015 2010015 11/2.2 1 3 1 1.049 1.315 0.133 lx 40-50 J 80 1 26.6 33.4 34 1310020 T 2010020 2-214 1 3 1.049 1.315 0.133 25x 50-65 80 26.6 33.4 3.4 1310025 2010025 - 2/-4 3 1.049 1.315 0.133 65-100 80 26.6 33.4 3.4 1310050 2010050 5-8 3 1.049 1.315 0.133 725-200 1 80 26.6 33.4 3.4 1312012 2012012 ]1/4 3 1.368 1,660 0.140 32 1 80 34.1 42.2 3.6 1312015 2012015 1½ 1 3 1.368 1.660 0.140 1/4x 40 80 34.7 42.2 3.6 1312020 2012020 2-2½ 3 1.368 1.660 0.140 32x 50-65 80 1 34.7 42.2 3.6 1312025 . 2012025 3-4 3 1.368 1.660 0.140 80-100 80 34.7 42.2 3.6 1312050 2012050 5-8 3 1.368 1.660 0.140 725-200 1 80 34.7 42.2 3.6 1315015 2015015 1½ 1 3 1.610 1.900 0.145 40 1 80 40.9 1 48.3 1 3.7 1315020 2015020 2 1 3 1.610 1 1.900 0.145 1½x 50 1 80 40.9 1 48.3 3.7 1315025 2015025 21h 3 1.610 1 1.900 0.145 40x 65 80 40.9 1 48.3 3.1 1315030 2015030 3-4 3 T 1.610 1 1.900 0.145 80-700 80 40.9 1 48.3 3.7 1315050 2015050 5-8 3 1 1.610 1 1.900 1 0.145 /25-200 1 80 1 40.9 1 48.3 1 3.7 1320020 2020020 2 1 3 2.067 1 2.375 0.154 50 1 80 52.5 1 60.3 3.9 1320025 2020025 21h 1 3 2.067 1 2.375 0.154 65 1 80 52.5 1 60.3 3.9 1320030 1 2020030 3 1 3 2.061 1 2.375 0.154 2x 80 80 52.5 1 60.3 3.9 1320035 2020035 4 3 2.067 1 2.315 0.154 50x 100 80 52.5 1 60.3 3.9 1320050 2020050 5 3 2.067 1 2.375 1 0.154 125 80 52.5 1 60.3 1 3.9 1320060 2020060 6 3 2.06/ 1 2.3/5 1 0.154 150 80 52.5 60.3 3,9 1320080 2020080 8 3 2.067 2.315 0.154 200 80 1 52.5 60.3 3.9 NOTE: Tee-Lets are manufactured to lit size-on-size, that is the contoured shape on a given Tee-Let is made to fit perfectly an the first listed header size. if installed on the second header size marked on the fitting, a slight gap of approximately 1/32 will appear along the longitudinal centerline of the header. For example, a 1' x 2 - 21/2" Tee-Let, is a 1" outlet fitting manufactured to fit perfectly on the 2" header size listed, while leaving a l/2" gap along the longitudinal centerline of the 21b" size, if a perfect fit is required for a 21/2" header pipe, then a 1" x 21/2 - 3" Tee-Let would be ordered. Size consolidations are employed to reduce inventory and provide for greater flexibility. PAGE 4 OF 5 Merit® Tee-Lets & Drop Nipples For the latest UL/ULC Listed and FM Approved pressure ratings, versus pipe schedule, I. REV. 03.03.06-004 go to www.anvilstar.com or contact your local AnvilStar representative A1ñiIStar IVelded Outlet Fittings Fire Products OMcton of Anvil' International Type B Male Thread Standard Weight Type C Cut Groove Standard Weight Submittal Sheet Type C/R Roll Groove Schedule 10 IWELD-MISER 1JTEE-LETO DI MENSIONS (NOMINAL SIZES 21/2" I:1UI: Inside Diameter - D Wall Thickness - F Male Nominal Nominal Schedule Thread Cut Roll Groove Outlet Header Outlet Length Schedule Outside Diameter Std. Wt. Groove Std. Wt. Sch. 10 A B C Standard Weight 10 E Standard Weight 10 NPT (ISO-7- 1)NPT (ISO-7- 1) NPT (ISO-7- 1)In.(mm) In(mm) In(mm) In(mm) In(mm) In(mm) In(mm) In(mm) 1325025 2025025 2225025 21/2 3 2.469 2.635 2.875 0.203 0.120 2/25025 65 1 80 1 62.7 1 67.0 1 76.2 1 5.0 3.0 1325030 2025030 2225030 3 3 2.469 2.635 2.875 0.203 0.120 2125030 80 80 62.7 67.0 76.2 5.0 3.0 1325035 2025035 2225035 4 3 2.469 2.635 2.875 0.203 0.120 2125035 2',x 65x /00 80 62.7 67.0 76.2 5.0 3.0 1325050 2025050 2225050 5 3 2.469 2.635 2.875 0.203 0.120 2125050 125 j 80 1 62.7 67.0 76.2 5.0 3.0 1325060 2025060 2225060 6 j 3 2.469 2.635 2.875 0.203 0.120 2125060 /75 80 62.7 67.0 76.2 5.0 3.0 2025080 2225080 8 3 2.469 2.635 2.875 0.203 0.120 1325080 2/25080 200 80 62.7 67.0 76.2 5.0 3.0 1330030 2030030 2230030 3 3 3.068 3.260 3.500 0.216 0.120 80 80 78.0 83.0 88.0 5.0 3.0 1330035 2030035 2230035 3/2 3 3.068 3.260 3.500 0.216 0.120 85 80 78.0 83.0 88.0 5.0 3.0 1330040 2030040 2230040 4 3 3.068 3.260 3.500 0.216 0.120 3 it 80x 100 80 78.0 83.0 88.0 5.0 3.0 1330050 2030050 2230050 5 3 3.068 1 3.260 3.500 0.216 0.120 /25 80 78.0 1 83.0 . 88.0 5.0 3.0 1330060 2030060 2230060 6 3 3.068 3.260 3.500 0.216 0.120 /50 80 78.0 83.0 88.0 5.0 3.0 1330080 2030080 2230080 8 3 3.068 3.260 3.500 0.216 0.120 200 80 78.0 83.0 88.0 5.0 3.0 1340040 2040040 2240040 4 4 4.026 4.260 4.500 0.237 0.120 100 1 /00 1 /02.0 108.0 /14,0 6.0 3.0 1340050 2040050 2240050 5 4 4.026 4.260 4.500 0.237 0.120 4x 100 125 100 102.0 /08.0 1/4.0 6.0 3.0 1340060 2040060 2240060 6 4 4.026 4.260 4.500 0.237 0.120 /50 /00 /02.0 /08.0 114.0 6.0 3.0 1340080 2040080 2240080 8 4 4.026 4.260 4.500 0.237 0.120 200 1 /00 /02.0 /08.0 1/4.0 6.0 3.0 - 2060060 2260060 6 1 4 6065 6.357 6.625 0.280 0.134 6x 150x 150 1 100 155.0 161.5 /68.3 7.1 3.0 - 2060080 2260080 8 4 6.065 6.357 6.625 0.280 0.134 200 100 /55.0 161.5 168.3 7.1 3.0 - 2080080 - 8x 8 4 7.981 8.329 8.625 0.322 0.148 200x J 200 /00 203.0 2/2.0 2/3.0 8.0 1 3.0 : Tee-Lets are manufactured to fit size-on-size, that is the contoured shape on a given Tee-Let is mode to fit perfectly on the first listed header size. If installed on the second header size marked on the fitting, a slight gap of approximately 1/2 will appear along the longitudinal centerline of the header. For example, o lx 2 - 21/2" Tee-Let, is 1 outlet fitting manufactured to fit perfectly on the 2' header size listed, while leaving a gap along the longitudinal centerline of the 21/2' size. If a perfect fit is required fora 21/7 header pipe, then a 1' x 2½- 3" Tee-Let would be ordered. Size consolidations are employed to reduce inventory and provide for greater flexibility. PAGE 5 OF 5 Merit® Tee-Lets & Drop Nipples For the latest UL/ULC Listed and FM Approved pressure ratings, versus pipe schedule, ' - REV. 03.03.06-005 go to www.anvilstar.com or contact your local AnvilStar representative 'w. CASTIIRONII'!DEGREE ELBOW NOMINAL SIZE (INCH) ITEM CODE MAX. WORKING P.S.I. DIMENSIONS WEIGHT A B EACH PIECE 1 CB90033 300 1.50 1.50 0.95 11/4 CB90044 300 1.75 1.75 1.34 1 1/2 1 CB900551 300 1.94 1.94 1 1.80 2 1 CB90066 300 1 225 1 225 1 2.90 21/2 1 CB900771 300 1 2.70 1 2.70 1 4.75 LLLy CAST IRONiRED. COUL I [C NOMINAL SIZE (INCH) ITEM CODE MAX. WORKING P.S.I. DIMENSION WEIGHT EACH A PIECE 1X1/2 CRC031 300 1.70 0.62 1X3/4 CRC032 300 1.70 0.80 T IRON STRAIGHT TEE NOMINAL SIZE (INCH) ITEM CODE MAX WORKING P.S.I. DIMENSIONS WEIGHT EACH PIECE A I B 1 CT333 300 1.50 1.50 1.21 11/4 CT444 300 1.75 1.75 1.87 11/2 CT555 300 1.94 1.94 2.51 2 CT666 300 2.25 2.25 3.96 21/2 CT777 300 2.70 2.70 6.45 I.1I IIRON 45 DEGREE ELBOW NOMINAL SIZE (INCH) ITEM CODE MAX. WORKING P.S.I. DIMENSIONS WEIGHT EACH PIECE A B 1 CB45033 300 1.12 1.12 0.84 11/4 CB45044 300 1 1.29 1.29 1.40 11/2 1 CB450551 300 1.43 1.43 1 1.80 2 1 CB450661 300 1 1.68 1 1.68 1 2.79 C.I. THREADED FITTINGS (q * <*> LISTED LISTED APPROVED For fire protection services request submittal GRS 1.3 FITTINGS .1 A Division fStar Pipe Pn,d,,as CAST IRON THREADED FITTINGS ARE UL, ULC LISTED AND FACTORY MUTUAL APPROVED FOR 300 PSI SERVICE. GRAY IRON PER ASTM A126 CLASS B. DIMEN- SIONS CONFORM TO ANSI 1316.4 CLASS 125 EXCEPT PLUGS CONFORM TO ASME 1316.14. THREADS ARE NPT PER ANSI/ASME 131.20.1. CAST iIIRON IRED. ',,: DEG. ELBOW NOMINAL SIZE (INCH) ITEM CODE MAX. WORKING P.S.I. DIMENSIONS WEIGHT EACH PIECE - A - B 1X1/2 CB90031 300 1.26 1.36 0.64 1X3/4 CB90032 300 1.37 1.45 0.87 1 1/4X1/2 CB90041 300 1.34 1.53 0.96 1 1/4X3/4 CB90042 300 1.45 1.62 1.13 1 1/4X1 CB90043 300 1.58 1.67 1.16 1 1/2x1 1/2 CB90051 300 1.41 1.66 1.17 1 1/2x3/4 CB90052 300 1.52 1.75 1.28 1 1/2X1 CB90053 300 1.65 1.80 1.51 1 1/2X1 1/4 CB90054 300 182 1.88 1.62 2X1/2 CB90061 300 149 1.88 2.00 2X4 CB90062 300 1.60 1.97 2.05 2X1 CB90063 300 1.73 2.02 2.10 2X1 1/4 CB90064 300 1.90 2.10 2.30 2X1 1/2 CB90065 300 2.02 1 2.16 2.60 Page 38 CAST IRON PLUGS I NOMINAL SIZE (INCH) I ITEM CODE MAX. WORKING P.S.I. IDIMENSIONI WEIGHT' EACH PIECE A 1/2 CPL001 300 0.94 0.10 3/4 CPL002 300 1.07 0.17 1 CPL003 300 1.25 0.28 11/4 CPLOO4 . 300 1.36 0.44 11/2 CPLOO5 300 1.45 0.62 2 CPLOO6 300 1.56 0.91 Th: :1fr I C.I. THREADED FITTINGS FITTINGS .A Divieio, efSwr Pipe Prod (q * <t~> LISTED LISTED APPROVED For fire protection services request submittal GRS 1.3 CAST IRON CROSS NOMINAL SIZE (INCH) ITEM CODE # MAX WORKING P.S.I. DIM IONS WAGIff EACH PIECE A B 1 CX033 300 1.50 1.50 1.54 11/4 CX044 300 1.75 1.75 2.40 11/2 CX055 300 1.94 1.94 3.10 2 CX066 300 2.25 2.25 4.00 1 1/4X1 CX043 300 1.58 1.67 2.05 1 1/2X1 CX053 300 1.65 1.80 2.40 2X1 CX063 300 1.73 2.02 2.75 CAST lIIRON IREDUCING II NOMINAL SIZE (INCH) ITBilI CODE ________ MAX. WORKING P.S.I. (MSSIONS WEIGHT EACH PIECE A B C 1X1X1I2 CT331 300 x 1.26 1.26 1.36 0.959- 11X3/4 CT332 300 1.37 1.37 1.45 1.10 IX1I2X1 CT313 300 1.50 1.36 1.50 1.08 1X3/4X1 CT323 300 1.50 1.45 1.50 1.18 1X1X1 114 CT334 300 1.67 1.67 1.58 1.52 1 X1X1 1/2 CT335 300 1.80 1.80 1.65 1.73 1 1/4X1 X1/2 CT431 300 1.34 1.26 1.53 1.17 1 1/4X1X3/4 CT432 300 1.45 1.37 1.62 1.38 1 174X1X1 CT433 300 1.58 1.50 1.57 1.47 1 1/4X1X1 1/4 CT434 300 1.75 1.67 1.75 1.80 1 1/4X1X1 1/2 CT435 300 1.88 1.80 1.82 2.05 1 1/4X1 1/4X1/2 CT441 300 1.34 1.34 1.53 1.37 1 1/4X1 1/4X314 CT442 300 1.45 1.45 1.62 1.54 1 1/4X1 1/4X1 CT443 300 1.58 1.58 1.67 1.65 1 1/4X1 1/4X1 1/2 CT445 300 1.88 1.88 1.82 2.21 1 1/4X1 1/432 CT446 300 2.10 2.10 1.90 2.55 1 1I2X1X1/2 CT531 300 1.41 1.34 1.66 1.41 1 112X1 X3/4 CT532 300 1.52 1.37 1.75 1.65 1 1/2X1X1 CT533 300 1.65 1.50 1.80 ----f.799 I 1/2X1X1 1/4 CT534 300 1.82 1.67 1.88 2.00 1 1/2X1X1 1/2 CT535 300 1.94 1.80 1.94 2.30 1 1/2X1 1/4X1/2 CT541 300 1.41 1.34 1.66 1.58 1 1/2X1 114X3/4 CT542 300 1.52 1.45 1.75 1.72 1 1/2X1 1/4X1 CT543 300 1.65 1.58 1.80 1.85 1 1/2x1 1/4x1 1/4 CT544 300 1.82 1.75 1.88 2.22 1 1/2x1 1/4x1 1/2 CT545 300 1.94 1.88 1.94 2.45 1 1/2X1 1/4X2 CT546 300 2.16 2.10 2.02 2.80 1 1/2X1 1/2X1/2 CT551 300 1.41 1.41 1.66 1.76 1 1/2X1 1/2X3/4 CT552 300 1.52 1.52 1.75 1.87 1 1/2X1 1/2X1 CT553 300 1.65 1.65 1.80 1.94 1 1/2X1 1/2X1 1/4 CT554 300 1.82 1.82 1.88 2.29 1 1/2X1 1/2X2 CT556 300 2.16 2.16 2.02 3.28 2X1X2 CT636 300 2.25 2.02 2.25 3.40 2X1 1/4X2 CT646 300 2.25 2.10 2.25 2.80 2X1 1/2X1/2 CT651 300 149 1.41 1.88 2.09 2X1 1/2X3/4 CT652 300 1.60 1.52 1.97 2.40 2X1 1/2X1 CT653 300 1.73 1.65 2.02 2.54 2X1 112X1 1/4 CT654 300 1.90 1.82 2.10 2.85 2X1 1/2X1 1/2 CT655 300 1.49 1.41 1.88 2.24 2X1 1/2X2 CT656 300 2.25 2.16 2.25 3.75 2X2X1/2 CT661 300 1.49 1.49 1.88 2.60 2X2X3/4 I CT662 300 1.60 1.60 1.97 2.71 2X2X1 CT663 300 1.73 1.73 2.02 2.97 2X2X1 1/4 CT664 300 1.90 1.90 2.10 3.32 2X2X1 1/2 CT665 300 2.02 2.02 2.16 3.72 2x2x2 1/2 CT667 300 2.60 1 2.60 2.39 5.10 Page 39 DETECTION POTTER SIGNAL PFC-4410 RELEASING PANEL (information for t his Calculation For m, is taken form the PUTTER SIGNAL PFC-4410 Installation, Operation and Maint Manua l) Date: 18-Jan-13 Project: VIASAT 6161 EL CAMINO REAL CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BATTERY CALCULATIONS DEVICE/MODULE QUANTITY Standby mA Current Load Total Standby mA Current Load Alarm mA Per Unit Total Alarm Current Load PFC-4410 1 0.115 amp 0.115 amp 0.215 amp 0.215 amp Suprevisory Horn-MT-12/24-R 1 0 amp 0 amp 0.026 amp 0.026 amp Alarm Bell-MB-G6-24-R 1 0 amp 0 amp 0.03 amp 0.03 amp Release Solenoid 1 0 amp 0 amp 0.41 amp 0.41 amp Initiating Circuits 5 0.004 amp 0.02 amp 0.01 amp 0.05 amp Photoelectric Smoke Detector 1 0.000045 amp 0.000045 amp 0.00015 amp 0.00015 amp Total AH in Standby: 0.135045 amp Total AN in Alarm: 0.73115 amp Total AH required for 24 hr Standby: 3.24108 AH AH req. for 5 mm. Alarm: 0.060685 AH PineI AU Stihtôtak 11711765 AH Battery AH Rating Provided: 7 AH Battery Derated 2091.: Reserve AH:J 5.6 AH 2.298235 AH Voltage Drop Calculation Sheet Project: VIASAT Circular Mils 4110 Location Appliance Circuit Device Type Current per Device Number of Devices Total Current Distance in Feet I Total Voltage Dropped Volts Dropped Percent RISER SUPV. TAMPER CIRCUIT 0.01 1 0.01 1 0.01 10 0.001 0.00% CEILING ZONE I HEAT CIRCUIT 0.01 1 0.01 1 0.01 120 0.006 0.03% CEILING ZONE 2 CIRCUIT 0.01 1 0.01 PHOTO DETECTOR 0.00015 1 0.00015 2 0.01015 10 0.001 0.00% RISER ZONE 3 WATERFLOW CIRCUIT 0.01 1 0.01 1 0.01 10 0.001 0.00% RISER ZONE 4 LOWAIR CIRCUIT 0.01 1 0.01 1 0.01 10 0.001 0.00% FLOOR PLAN GEN. ALARM BELL 0.03 1 0.03 - 1 0.03 5 0.001 0.00% FLOOR PLAN SUPERVISORY HORN 0.026 1 0.026 1 0.026 5 0.001 0.00% RISER RELEASE SOLENOID 0.41 1 1 0.41 1 0.41 10 0.022 0.09% (E)POTTER The Symbol of Protection Dimensions: 18 ¼" x 14 1/2 x 4 3/4 UL and ULC Listed, FM Approved, NYMEA Accepted, and CSFM Approved General Description The Potter Model PFC-44 1ORC is aflexible multi-hazard releasing control panel that is well suited for a number of applications. The PFC-4410RC is listed for use with pre-action and deluge sprinkler suppression systems and agent based fire suppression systems. The panel utilizes a microprocessor-based system that has 19 Standard Programs, which covers a majority of installations. The simple to follow Menu Structure programs the entire system in a matter of minutes. In addition to the Standard Programs, the panel allows custom programming to accommodate any installation. PFC-44 1ORC RELEASING CONTROL PANEL Multi-Hazard Operation Four Class B Initiating Circuits Two Class B Supervisory Circuits ** Four Class B Output Circuits Programmable Cross Zoning Supervised Microprocessor 32 Character Alpha-Numeric LCD Display Custom Banner Message and Zone Description text Custom Zone Description Text On Board Menu Driven Programming Controls Releasing Circuits Protected From False Activation Continuous or Timed Discharge 40 Event History Buffer Walktest with Automatic Time-out Alarm, Trouble Supervisory, and Waterfiow relays Optional Class A Initiating Zone and output module 34 character LED supplemental display 19 Standard Programs in Panel Memory Password Protection for all Programming 24 Hour Clock Suitable for agent or water-based extinguishing Programmable pre-discharge timers* One Class B Abort circuit* (Defaults to additional supervisory zone in water based mode.) Three Abort modes* * Available in Chemical mode only ** One zone programmable as abort in chemical mode. The panel is Ninth Edition UL listed, IILC listed, Factory Mutual, California State Fire Marshal (CSFM) andNewYork Materials Equipment Acceptance (MEA) approved. The PFC-4410RC is housed in a durable steel cabinet with removable door and key lock. The panel is available in either a red or white finish and an optional flush mount trim ring is available. The cabinet contains knockouts on the side, back and top of the cabinet to ease installation. In addition, the cabinet will house up to 18 amp-hour batteries that will provide in excess of 90 hours of standby power. Ordering Information Model Number Description Stock Number PFC-4410RC 4 Zone Releasing Control (White Cabinet) 3006144 PFC-4410RC 4 Zone Releasing Control (Red Cabinet) 3006142 PFC-TW Bezel for Semi-Flush Mounting (White) 5090157 PFC-TR Bezel for Semi-Flush Mounting (Red) 5090155 BT-40 Battery, 12V4AH for 24 hour standby (2 Req'd) 5130092 BT-80 Battery, 12V 8AH for 60 hour standby (2 Req'd) 5130084 BT-120 Battery, 12V 12AH for 90 hour standby (2 Req'd) 5130090 BT-180 Battery, 12V, 18AH for 90 hour standby (2 Req'd) 5130086 CA2Z 2 Zone Class A Initiating Circuit Module 3006013 CAM Class A Indicating Circuit Module 3005300 ARM-44 Relay Module for PFC-4410RC . 3006221 ARM-2 Auxiliary Relay Module 3004725 RA-4410RC Remote Annunciator 3006400 BB-RA-44R Surface Mount Back Box for RA-4410RC (Red) 3006401 Potter Electric Signal Co., LLC• St. Louis, MO • Cust Service: 866-240-1870 • Tech Support: 866-956-1211• Canada 888-882-1833 www.pottersignal.com PRINTED IN USA MFG #5401250 - REV A PAGE 1 OF 2 12/09 (E)POTTER The Symbol of Protection Architects/Engineers Specifications The control panel for the extinguishing agent releasing system shall be a microprocessor based control capable of protecting multiple hazards in one control panel. It shall be Underwriters Laboratories Inc. listed under Standard 864 Ninth Edition and Underwriters Laboratories of Canada for Local Control Units for Releasing Service. The control shall also be approved by Factory Mutual Research Corporation and be compliant with the requirements of NFPA-72 (Local: A, M, SS service types; DAC and NC signaling type) and NFPA12, NFPA12A, NFPA-13, NFPA-15, NFPA-16, NFPA-17, NFPA-17A, NFPA-750, and NFPA-2001. The control shall be housed in an 18 gauge steel cabinet that has a hinged, removable door with a key lock. The finish shall be baked enamel and available in red or off-white with contrasting trim and logo. An optional matching bezel should be available for semi-flush mounting. The cabinet shall have adequate space to house 18 AH standby batteries capable of operating the system for at least 90 hours. The control shall include a fully supervised integral power supply/battery charger capable of providing 200mA to the auxiliary power circuit. It shall also be capable of providing 2.5 Amps to all releasing and notification appliance circuits combined. All initiating, output and auxiliary power circuits shall be power limited. The control shall have a 32 character (16 characters, 2 lines) backlit LCD display and a 34 LED supplemental display. All diagnostic and alarm event information shall be viewable in text form on this display. A field programmable custom banner message with the current date and time shall be displayed when no current alarm or diagnostic information exists. All operational features of the control panel shall be field programmable using menu driven selections on the alpha-numeric display and on board controls. No special programmer will be required and jumpers or switches to configure operational features shall not be permitted. Alarm and trouble indications shall resound when required. The control panel shall be equipped with 19 programs built into the panel memory, 13 for water based extinguishing and 6 for agent extinguishing. In addition, the panel shall have the ability to add custom programs. All programming functions shall be password protected. The control shall have four fully supervised Class B (Style B) initiating circuits capable of supporting the operation of 25 compatible 2-wire smoke detectors on each circuit. The individual circuits shall be selectable through the programming sequence to operate in one of the following modes: Conventional, PFC-44 1ORC RELEASING CONTROL-PANEL Waterfiow, Linear Heat Detection (up to 10,000 feet per zone), Manual Release, Low Air Alarm, Supervisory, Tamper, Low Air or High Air. Optional Class A modules, CA2Z, may be added for Class A operation. The panel shall have a Low Air Zone that creates a supervisory condition and map to an output. UL and ULC Listed, FM Approved, NYMIEA Accepted, CSFM Approved The control shall have two fully supervised Class B (Style B) supervisory circuits. These circuits shall be selectable through the programming sequence to operate in one of the following modes: Supervisory, Tamper, Low Air or High Air. The control shall have one fully supervised class B (style B) Abort circuit with 3 different operating modes, TILl, IRI, and NYC. The control shall have four fully supervised Class B (Style Y) output circuits. These circuits shall be selectable through the programming sequence to operate as one of the following: Alarm Notification Appliance, Supervisory Notification Appliance, Trouble Notification Appliance or Releasing. The optional CAM module may be added to convert the outputs to Class A. The panel shall have an RS-485 output and auxiliary power outputs for connection and supervision of up to 4 remote annunciators or an ARM-44 Relay Module and 3 annunciators. V The releasing circuits shall be supervised for short circuit conditions and shall be programmable for cross zoning operation when required. The discharge timer for these releasing circuits shall be programmable for times of 7, 8, 9, 10, 20 minutes or continuous. All initiating and output circuits shall be capable of being individually disabled or enabled. In addition, when in the agent extinguishing mode there shall be a pre-discharge timer adjustable from 0-60 seconds from an alarm zone or 0-30 seconds from a manual release zone. The control shall have a test mode that will automatically disable all releasing circuits. The test mode shall operate in such a manner as to automatically reset the initiating circuit and indicating circuits after detecting each alarm condition initiated by the test. All testing shall be recorded in the 40 event history buffer. The test mode will automatically terminate after twenty minutes of inactivity. The control shall have four integral relay contacts rated 3 Amps at 30 VDC for connection to external auxiliary equipment. One relay shall operate when an alarm condition occurs, another when a trouble signal occurs, the third when a supervisory condition occurs, and the fourth during a waterfiow condition. UL and ULC Listed, FM Approved, NYMEA Accepted, CSFM Approved. PRINTED IN USA MPG t5401250 - REV PAGE 2 OF 2 12/09 Releasing Panel for Water and Agent Extinguishing Systems (All specifications subject to revision.) PFC-441ORC Installation, Operation, and Instruction Manual @POTTER The Symbol of Protection St. Louis, MO (866) 956-0988 Manual #5403550 - Rev G www.pottersigna1.com 6/09 PFC-4410RC • 5403550 • REV G • 6/09 Installation Precautions A This is the safety alert system. It is used to alert you to potential personal injury hazards. Obey all safety messages that follow this symbol to avoid possible injury or death. AwA,,r,%'NT'NG The detection and suppression system employing this release panel must be designed by people trained and competent in the design and layout of fire alarm and/or suppression systems for special hazard locations. The system shall be designed and installed in accordance with all local and national codes and ordinances as well as the approval of the Authority Having Jurisdiction. Only trained, qualified and competent individuals should install, program and/or service the PFC-4410RC. Competent people would be aware of these warnings, limitations, and requirements. The abort circuit will not abort the release or stop the predischarge timer activated by zones programmed as MANUAL RELEASE. If it is desired to have the abort circuit stop the release activated from a Manual Release zone, program that zone as a DETECTION zone instead. High voltage electrocution hazard. Do not handle live AC wiring or work on the device while AC power is active. This manual is designed to help with the specification, installation, and programming of the PFC-44 lORC Release Panel. It is imperative that this manual be completely read and understood before the installation or programming of the panel. Save this manual for future reference. Zones programmed as MANUAL RELEASE will override any cross zoning features. If it is desired to not have a manual station override the cross zoning, program the zone as DETECTION and map accordingly. Per ULC requirements; if this equipment is running on battery power only, it will shut off and cease to operate when the battery voltage reaches approximatly 19-20 volts. Locate the panel and all system components in the following nominal environment: * Temperature 32-120°F, Humidity 93% non-condensing. * Verify that the wire sizes are adequate for all initiating, notification, and release circuits. * Make certain the panel is properly grounded. * Remove all electronic assemblies prior to any drilling, filing, reaming, or punching of the enclosure. When possible make all cable entries from the sides, bottom, or rear of the cabinet. Verify that they will not interfere with the batteries or other components. * The panel and system must be tested and maintained in accordance with all local and national codes and ordinances. Operating Instructions Form Fill in the name, address and telephone number of the servicing agency on the instruction sheet provided and frame and place adjacent to control panel at eye level. The following documentation shall be delivered to the owner or their representative upon final acceptance of the system: An owners manual and installation instructions covering all system equipment. Wiring diagrams A detailed description of the programming and operating sequence of the system PFC-4410RC • 5403550 • REV G - 6/09 Fire Alarm System Limitations Smoke detectors may not detect smoke when the smoke does not reach the detector. Such as smoke within walls, on the other side of walls, on other floors, behind closed doors, explosions, etc. Smoke detectors will not operate if they are not properly connected to the fire/release panel. The detectors and bases must be UL listed as being compatible with the panel. The detectors have a visible flashing light that indicates power is supplied to the detectors. Notification appliances may not alert people if the people are not able to hear or see the appliances such as if they are in separate areas of the building or room. A fire alarm/release panel will not operate without electrical power. The panel must have sufficient backup battery capability to power the panel for a specified amount of time in the event of an AC power failure. The batteries and release panel shall be tested and maintained in accordance with the testing and maintenance requirements of NFPA 72. In order for emergency forces, (Fire departments, etc.), to respond to events associated with this panel, the panel must transmit trouble, supervisory, and alarm signals to a monitoring facility either directly or through a main building fire panel. A problem in an audible or visual device may not be apparent when the panel is in a normal condition. Design Guidelines People trained in the design of special hazard systems shall determine the selection and placement of the initiating devices and notification appliances connected to the PFC-4410RC. This responsible party shall also be familiar with the premises being protected. The equipment shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturers instructions, the applicable version of NFPA 72 and all local codes and ordinances. For systems employing cross zoning of two smoke detectors for the activation of the release circuit, this can include but is not limited to the installation of photoelectric and ionization types of detectors on separate zones. One of each type of detector on separate zones shall be installed in the coverage area selected for a single detector (not to exceed 0.7 times the linear spacing). The detectors would be installed in close proximity to each other. [he responsible party shall also determine the theory of operation regarding the programming sequence. NOTICE TO ALL USERS, INSTALLERS, AHJ'S, AND OTHER INVOLVED PARTIES This product incorporates field programmable software. In order to comply with the requirements in the Standard for Control Units and Accessories for Fire Alarm Systems, UL 864, certain programming features or options must be limited to specific values or not used at all, as indicated below. Program Feature or Option Permitted in UL 864 Possible Settings Settings Permitted in UL 864 NY Abort (Mode 3) No Mode 1,2,3,or4 Modes 1 and 30-Second Abort (Mode 4) No Mode 1, 2, 3, or 4 Abort on Pre-action or Deluge No Supervisory, Tamper, Low air, Supervisory, Tamper, Low Systems High Air, Abort Air, High Air General Description The Model PFC-4410RC is a listed and approved, microprocessor based fire control/releasing panel. It is primarily designed for use as a releasing panel for pre-action and deluge, water based extinguishing systems or for agent extinguishing systems. The PFC-4410RC may also be used as a stand alone fire control panel. This unit complies with NFPA-12, NFPA-12A, NFPA-13, NFPA-15, NFPA-16, NFPA-17, NFPA-17A, NFPA-72, NFPA-750, NFPA-2001. The PFC-4410RC complies with UL Standard 864, ULC S527-99, Canadian Electrical Code Part 1 C22.1., ULC S524, FM, CSFM and NYMEA. System Features Four Class B (Style B) Initiating zones. Each initiating zone can be set up for any of the following: Alarm Zones Detection alarm zone Waterfiow Linear Heat Detection (700 ohms per zone.) Manual Release PFC-4410RC • 5403550 • REV G • 6/09 Supervisory Zones Supervisory Tamper Low Air Supervisory High Air Low Air Alarm NOTE: Only zones programmed as Detection, Waterfiow, Linear Heat, Manual Release, and Low Air Alarm can be mapped to outputs programed as release. Remote Annunciator Output for connection to RA-4410RC: RS-485 communication, (2-wire shielded cable required) Regulated 24VDC annunciator power Two Supervisory Zones, Class B (Style B). This zone can be set up for any of the following: Supervisory Tamper Low Air Supervisory High Air * Abort (Supervisory zone 1 only) NOTE: * Abort on a water-based extinguishing system is not a UL Listed function. Four Class B (Style Y) Output circuits. Each output can be set up for any of the following: Notification Appliance circuit, (First or Second alarm notification in chemical extinguishing mode) Releasing circuit Pulse Releasing circuit (called eAEROSOL, 1/16th sec on 15/16th sec off. Chemical mode only, will cycle 200 times before turning off) Supervisory Bell circuit Trouble Bell circuit One Abort Circuit (Available in Chemical Mode only) Programmable for four different operating modes ULI - Stops the pre-discharge timer at 10 seconds IRJ - Abort must be activated before the second alarm is received NYC (not UL listed) A one time operation that adds 90 seconds to the remaining predischarge time * 30 Second Abort (stops or reverts the pre-discharge timer at 30 seconds) NOTE: * Not a UL Listed function I A CAUTION I An eAEROSOL output shall only be used with Aerosol Generators (listed on page 90). Using a standard releasing circuit for an Aerosol Generator can prevent the Aerosol agent from being released. A CAUTION Abort does not function and has no effect on panel operation from zones programmed as MANUAL RELEASE. Fifteen Standard Programs for water based systems or custom program capability Nine Standard Programs for Chemical based systems or custom program capability User selectable between Water Based or Chemical Extinguishing Releasing Zones can be set up for either normal or cross zoning operation Discharge time is user selectable for either 7, 8, 9, 10, 20 minutes or continuous in the custom program All circuits inherently power limited per NEC 760 and UL 864 Section 14.4 Initiating Circuit Disable feature Output Disable feature One-Man Wallctest feature with automatic 30 minute restoration and releasing circuit disable Class B (Style B) Abort circuit available in Chemical mode. Three Abort modes available Pre-Discharge timer from 0-60 seconds available in Chemical mode only Manual Release 0-30 seconds predischarge timer in Chemical Mode only Notification Appliance Circuits can be programmed to operate upon 1 or 2' alarm in Chemical Mode for pre-discharge signal Diagnostic Indicators PFC-4410RC • 5403550 • REV G - 6/09 Signal Silence button Buzzer Silence button Manual event scroll buttons Automatic resound of silenced trouble signals after 24 hours Built-in Trouble buzzer Common Contacts for AlarmlTrouble/SupervisoryfWaterflow 32 Character Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) 34 LED display User Generated Banner Message User Generated Zone Labeling 24 or 90 hour Battery Standby available (Where required by FM and Others) 24 Hour Clock Password Protection Remote annunciator output 4-Wire resettable smoke detector power Options See Appendix B at the back of the manual for product data sheets. CAM - Module to convert one Class B Indicating Appliance Circuit to one Class A circuit. CA2Z - Module to convert two Class B Initiating Device Circuits to two Class A circuits. ARM-2 - Module to provide two Form C contacts activated by Indicating or Releasing, polarity reversing circuits. ARM-44 - Module to provide 8 Form C contacts activated by corresponding initiating zones and outputs. RA-4410RC - Remote annunciator provides 34 LED's for each zone in alarm supervisory or trouble, each output activated or in trouble, AC power, Power trouble, System trouble, Ground fault, Supervisory, Supervisory trouble, Alarm, Alarm silence and Pre-discharge/Discharging. The annunciator also has a lamp test switch. Abort switch RCDS-1 - Releasing Circuit Disable Switch Ordering Information 1odel No. Description Stock No. RA-4410RC Remote annunciator 3006400 BB-RA-44R Surface mount back box for RA-44 l0RC 3006401 EOLP-R End of Line Plate f/Resistor 3002182 EOLP-D End of Line Plate f/Diode Assy 3002181 P32-iT Manual release station 1000447 Abort Switch 3001000 PFC-TW Bezel for semi-flush mounting (white) 5090157 PFC-TR Bezel for semi-flush mounting (red) 5090155 BT80 Battery, for 24 hour standby, 12V, 8.OAH (2 req'd) 5130084 BT120 Battery, for 60-90 hour standby, 12V, 12.OAH (2 req'd) 5130090 CA2Z 2-Zone Class A initiating module 3006013 CAM Class A indicating circuit module 3005300 ARM-1 Auxiliary Relay Module 4 Pole 3004726 ARM-2 Auxiliary Relay Module 3004725 ARM-44 8 Relay Module 3006221 RCDS-1 Releasing Circuit Disable Switch 3001002 Spare or Replacement Parts EOL Resistor 5080593 EOL Resistor and Diode Assembly for releasing circuit 3005012 EOL Resistor with 6" wire leads 3005013 eMatch Protection Assembly for eAEROSOL circuit 3005014 Main Circuit Board Module 3006424 This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause interference to radio communications. It has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A computing device pursuant to Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC Rules which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a commercial environment. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference in which case the user at his own expense will be required to take whatever measures may be required to correct the interference. PFC-4410RC 5403550 • REV G - 6/09 Specifications PFC-44 10RC Type - 18 gauge sheet steel with hinged, removable, locked door Size - 181/2" x 14 1/4" x 43/4" Finish - Off-white or red cabinet with red on black logo. Knockouts - 1/2" and 3/4", one of each on left side, two 3/4" and one 1/2" on right side, four 1/2", two 3/4" on top, and two 1/2" and one 3/4" on the back Option - Bezel for semi-flush mounting PFC-4410RC Visual Indicators LED Indicators (red = alarm) 32 Character Alpha-Numeric Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) LCD - A 2 line 32 character alpha-numeric liquid crystal display shows the condition, status and circuit for all Alarm, Supervisory and Trouble conditions. CONDITION STATUS CIRCUIT Alarm Silenced <user Defined Message> (Up To 10 Characters) Trouble Disabled Output #1 Supervisory Acknowledged Output #2 Tamper Output #3 Low Air Output #4 High Air Battery Aborted A.C. Pre-discharging Supervisory Releasing Zone #1 Released Zone #2 Zone #3 Zone #4 Ground PFC-4410RC Visual Indicators In accordance with ULC S527-99 option B: LED Annunciator Module Red LED's: Initiating Device Circuits Active (4), Notification/Release Circuits Active (4) Common Alarm (1) Green LED: AC Power Yellow LED's: Initiating Device Circuits Troubles (4), Output Circuits Troubles (4) Supervisory Initiating Zone (4) Supervisory Bell Output Active (4) (1) each: Supervisory 1, Supervisory 2, Power Trouble, Supervisory Trouble, System Trouble, Ground Fault, Pre-Discharge/Discharging, Alarm Silenced CONDITION STATUS LED State Trouble Non-Silenced Flashing Trouble Silenced Steady ON Alarm Non-Silenced Flashing Alarm Silenced Steady ON Supervisory Non-Silenced Flashing Supervisory Silenced Steady ON Pre-discharge Flashing Discharging Steady ON PFC-4410RC • 5403550 • REV G - 6/09 Control Buttons Signal Silence - Momentary, silences signaling circuits, (except those activated by zones programmed as WATERFLOW) System Reset - Momentary, resets all alarm circuits if condition has been corrected, removes power from initiating device circuits. Scroll Up - Scrolls LCD display to most recent events Scroll Down - Scrolls LCD display to previous events NOTE: Buzzer silence is accomplished by scrolling through all events. Circuit Parameters (All voltages regulated DC) - Initiating Device Circuits Initiating Device Zones: For connection of dry contact initiating devices and compatible 2 wire smoke detectors. (All values nominal) 4 Class B, Style B (Class A Style D module available) Power limited, current limited to protect 2 wire smoke detectors Maximum 2 wire 24VDC smoke detector load per zone - 2.5 mA (Use only detectors that are listed in compatibility list.) Maximum Line resistance - 100 ohms (Except linear heat detection cable, 700 ohms per zone) End-of-Line Resistance - 5.1K ohm Normal standby current - approximately 4.0 mA Standby voltage - 25VDC maximum, 13.4 minimum Maximum short circuit current - approximately 36mA Maximum Impedance for Alarm - 1400 ohms Normal supervisory current - approximately 4mA Low current trouble activation - approximately 3.3mA Alarm activation current -approximately lOmA Ripple voltage - .4VDC Maximum operating voltage range: 22.5 - 25.9VDC Frequency - continuous Dedicated Supervisory Zone For dry contact supervisory devices such as tamper, low air, or high air switches 2 Class B Style B circuit, latching Power limited, current limited End-of-Line resistance - 5.1K ohms Ripple Voltage - . 1VDC Frequency - continuous Maximum voltage - 25VDC Maximum short circuit current - approximately 36mA Maximum line resistance - 100 ohms Normal supervisory current - approximately 4mA Low current trouble activation - approximately 3.3mA Supervisory current condition - approximately lOmA Notification/Release Circuits The indicating circuits of the PFC4410RC are Non-coded. This allows the use of visual and audible appliances on the same circuit. If temporal notification appliances are required for evacuation, selectable tone appliances such as the AMSECO 1-124WR horn or SH24W Series strobe/horns or a temporal module such as AMSECO TMP1-3A or equivalents shall be used. The notification outputs do not provide synchronization. See table for sync options and devices on page 90. The notification ap- pliances shall be compatible with the sync module selected. The sync' module shall be installed as per manufacturers instructions. Synchronization is limited to only one circuit and not between circuits. Systems intended for the release of Halon 1301 as de- scribed in NFPA 12A, or clean agents as described in NFPA 2001, shall have provision for a pre-discharge notification circuit. If the signal is required to be separate and/or distinct from the evacuation signal, two notification circuits are required. One shall be programmed as FIRST ALARM. It will provide a steady output upon activation of any initiating zone programmed as an alarm zone. This is the evacuation signal. If a temporal signal is required, notification appliances such as AMSECO model H24WR or others that can produce a temporal tone shall be used. This allows the use of strobes and horns on the same circuit. The other no- tification circuit shall be programmed as SECOND ALARM. It will provide a steady output upon activation of a second initiating one programmed as an alarm zone. This is when the pre-discharge timer would start and would be the pre-discharge signal. If a emporal or other type of signal is required, notification appliances such as AMSECO model H24WR or equivalent shall be used. This allows the use of strobes and horns on the same circuit. If a separate signal for discharge were required, a third notification 10 PFC-4410RC • 5403550 • REV G • 6/09 circuit would be used that would be programmed to operate whenever the release circuit is activated. Equivalent sync modules are shown on page 89. Zones programmed as MANUAL RELEASE will activate outputs programmed as SECOND ALARM, even if the MANUAL RELEASE zone is the first alarm zone activated. SECOND ALARM is intended to be used as a pre-discharge signal for cross zone applications. Refer to page 50 for a complete description of first and second alarm requirements and operation. 4 Class B Style Y (Class A Style Z module available for notification) Reverse polarity upon activation Power limited, Current limited 24VDC Special Application, rated 1 amp each, 2.5 amps total for all 4 circuits End-of-Line-Resistor - 5.1k ohms Frequency - continuous Maximum voltage - 27VDC Ripple voltage - .3VDC Maximum resistance for outputs programmed as RELEASING: 1 divided by the current draw of the solenoid when activated Normal standby supervisory current - approximately .38mA Low current trouble activation - .11mA High current trouble activation - .63mA Maximum impedance - 5 ohms Release Abort Circuit Available chemical mode only 1 momentary non-latching Class B Style B circuit Power limited, current limited Maximum loop resistance - 100 ohms - End-of-Line-resistance - 5.1k ohms Frequency - continuous Normal supervisory current - approximately 4mA Low current trouble activation - approximately 3.3mA Abort current condition - approximately lOmA Maximum voltage - 23VDC NOTE: Mode 3 is not UL Listed Mode 1 - (ULI) Activation of the abort circuit stops the pre-discharge timer at 10 seconds. If there is less than 10 seconds remaining, the time goes back to 10 seconds. Releasing the abort switch starts the timer at 10 seconds. Mode 2 - (JiRI) Operates the same as the ULI mode except the abort circuit only functions if the abort button is pressed before the second alarm is received by the panel. The panel must be programmed for cross zoning for the IRI mode to function. Mode 3 - (NYC) This mode is not UL listed. Activation of the abort circuit during the pre-discharge countdown adds 90 seconds to the original pre-discharge time. This is a one-time feature. Repeated pressing of the abort button has no effect. The pre-discharge timer resumes when the abort button is released. Mode 4 - (30-Second Abort) This mode is not UL listed. Activation of the abort circuit stops the pre-discharge timer at 30 seconds. If there is elss than 30 seconds remaining, the timer goes back to 30 seconds. Releasing the abort switch starts the timer at 30 seconds. CAUTION Zones programmed as Manual Release cannot be aborted. If it is necessary to abort a manual station zone, program that zone as Detection. If the pre-discharge timer is set at 0 the abort circuit will not stop the release circuit. NFPA 12 prohibits the use of abort circuits on Suppression Systems employing carbon dioxide. Low/Missing Battery Causes battery and system trouble if battery falls below 22 volts. Battery circuit is fused and reverse polarity protection is provided. Input Power Universal Input 120VAC, (60 Hz, 165VA) or 220VAC, (50/60 Hz, 185VA) 15 Amp Branch Line over current protection required AC Power indicator on LED annunciator module goes off on AC power loss (supervised) System trouble is also generated if voltage drops below 102V Supervised 11 PFC-4410RC • 5403550 • REV G • 6/09 ackup Power Requirements PFC-4410RC - Standby 121 mA, alarm 274 mA at 24VDC, supervised Service Use NFPA 12— Carbon Dioxide systems NFPA 12A—Halon 1301 fire systems NFPA 13 - Automatic Sprinkler NFPA 15 - Water Spray Fixed System NFPA 16 - Foam Water Sprinkler and Foam Water Spray NFPA 17 - Dry Chemical NFPA 17A - Wet Chemical NFPA 72 - National Fire Alarm Code Local Remote Station (protected premise unit) Central Station (protected premise unit) NFPA 750 - Water Mist NFPA 2001 - Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing System Listings and Approvals PFC-4410RC - UL Standard 864, ULC Standard S527, FM, CSFM and NYMEA Terminals All terminals capable of #22 - #14 AWG wire All terminations have transient protection All four initiating device circuit terminals capable of handling linear heat detection. Relay Outputs Common system alarm contacts SPDT rated 3 Amps, 30VDC resistive Common supervisory contacts SPST, N.O. rated 3 Amps, 30VDC resistive Common system trouble contacts SPDT rated 3 Amps, 30VDC resistive Common waterfiow contacts, SPST, N.O. rated 3 Amps, 30VDC resistive Circuits connected to relays should be connected within the same room Auxiliary Power Auxiliary Power - 24VDC special application. Rated 200 mA max. Power limited, current limited, non-supervised Re-settable for 4-wire smoke detectors, see Annex A. Annunciator Connection Auxiliary Power - 24VDC regulated. Rated 200 mA max. Power limited, current limited, supervised for RA-44 10RC Annunciator RS-485 For connection to RA-4410RC remote annunciator Maximum 2000' with 22 AWG, 4000' with 20 AWG wire Optional Accessories CA2Z MODULE (Class A initiating device circuit): Converts two Class B initiating device circuits to two Class A circuits. CAM Module (Class A Notification Appliance Circuit): Converts indicating appliance circuit from Class B to Class A. One model CAM (Class A Module) is required or each circuit. (Do not use this on an output programmed as "Trouble Bell".) ARM- l/ARM-2 Module (Auxiliary Relay Module) 12 PFC-4410RC • 5403550 • REV G• 6/09 Activated by 24VDC Indicating and/or Releasing, polarity reversing circuits. The module provides a non-supervised DPDT Relay that can be used for fan shutdown, door release, elevator recall, etc. RA-44 1ORC (Remote Annunciator) Connects to RS-485 & 24VDC terminals. Provides 34 LED's for each zone in alarm supervisory, or trouble, each output activated or in trouble, AC power, Power trouble, System trouble, Ground fault, Supervisory, Supervisory trouble, Alarm, Alarm silence and Pre-discharge/Discharging. The annunciator also has a lamp test switch. ARM-44 (Relay Module) - Relay installs in a cabinet and provides 8 relays. 4 relays mapped to inputs and 4 relays mapped to the outputs in a 1 to 1 relationship selectable selectable disable switch. Basic Operation In addition to the following events, the panel also provides an output via the RS-485 terminals to the RA-4410RC remote annunciator to light the appropriate indicators. See remote annunciator operations, page 15. Initiating Device Circuits Alarm Condition: An increase of current on any alarm initiating device circuit to approximately 10 mA or greater will result in the following: ALARM, (Except zones programmed as LOW AIR ALARM): Activation of the alarm relay contacts. Activation of the output circuit(s) which are mapped to the initiating device circuit(s). Providing all zone(s) necessary for the activation of those circuits is in alarm "ALARM" and zone # displayed on LCD. "PRE-DISCHARGE" displayed on LCD if zone(s) in alarm activated pre-discharge timer (In chemical mode only). Activation of red ZONE indicator(s) on LED display for the initiating device circuit(s). Activation of red ALARM indicator on LED display. Activation of red OUTPUT indicator(s) on LED display module for the output circuit(s) which are mapped to the initiating device circuit(s). Activation of flashing red PRE-DISCHARGE indicator on LED display if in chemical mode and pre-discharge timer was activated by zone(s) in alarm. Providing all zone(s) necessary for the activation of those circuits is in alarm. A CAUTION When in CHEMICAL EXTINGUISHING mode, the release circuit(s), are not activated until the pre-discharge timer expires, if a pre-discharge time was programmed. The predischarge time defaults to 30 seconds for Manual Release and 60 seconds for all other alarm tones. Low Air Alarm Operation of supervisory relay contacts and local buzzer. Activation of the notification appliance circuit(s) or releasing circuit(s) which are mapped to the initiating device circuit(s). Providing all zone(s) necessary for the activation of those circuits is in alarm. LOW AIR ALARM and <CIRCUIT #> displayed on LCD. Activation of yellow ZONE indicator on LED annunciator module for the initiating device circuit. Activation of yellow ZONE indicator(s) on LED annunciator module for the initiating device circuit(s) described as "LOW AIR ALARM". Activation of yellow OUTPUT indicator(s) on LED annunciator module for the output circuit(s) which are mapped to the zone. Providing all zone(s) necessary for the activation of those circuits is in alarm. Supervisory An increase of current to approximately 8 imk or greater on the supervisory initiating device circuit(s) or disabling an output programmed as realeasing will result in the following: Operation of supervisory relay contacts and local buzzer. Operation of any output circuits that have been described as SUPERVISORY BELL. "SUPERVISORY", "TAMPER", "LOW AIR", or "HIGH AIR" and <CIRCUIT> displayed on LCD. Activation of yellow SUPERVISORY indicator on LED display. Activation of yellow ZONE indicator(s) on LED display for the initiating device circuit(s) described as "SUPERVISORY", "TAMPER", "LOW AIR SUPERVISORY", or "HIGH AIR". 13 PFC-4410RC • 5403550 • REV G - 6/09 6. Activation of yellow OUTPUT indicator(s) on LED display for the Notification appliance circuit(s) described as SUPERVISORY BELL. Trouble Conditions In custom program mode, failure to map at least 1 zone to every output or only mapping 1 zone to a release output programmed as cross zoned will cause a system trouble. The display will read: TROUBLE NO OUTPUTS. Initiating Device Circuits A decrease of current to approximately 3.3 mA or programming the zone as disabled on any initiating device circuit will result in the following: Activation of trouble relay contacts, trouble LED and local buzzer. Operation of any output circuits which have been described as TROUBLE BELL. "TROUBLE" and <CIRCUIT> displayed on LCD. Activation of yellow ZONE indicator(s) on LED annunciator module for the initiating device circuit(s). Activation of yellow SYSTEM TROUBLE indicator on LED annunciator module. Activation of yellow OUTPUT indicator(s) on LED annunciator module of any output circuit(s) which have been described as TROUBLE BELL. Activation of the amber TROUBLE LED in a flashing mode. NOTE: The TROUBLE LED will continue to flash until all events in the TROUBLE queue are viewed. This is accomplished by scrolling through all of the events by use of the scroll up and scroll down buttons. The LED will go steady after all trouble events have been viewed. NOTE: When the circuits are operated in the Class A mode any trouble condition will require manual operation of the reset switch to restore the panel to normal after the fault has been removed. A complete loss of power will result in the transfer of the common system trouble relay contacts. Notification Appliance/Releasing Circuits An increase of current to approximately 0.63 mA or a decrease in current to approximately 0. 11 mA on any output circuit or onnecting an indicating appliance backwards, or disabling an output will result in the following: Activation of trouble relay contacts, trouble LED and local buzzer. Operation of any output circuits which have been described as TROUBLE BELL. If this output is in trouble, a TROUBLE BELL on this output may not function correctly, depending on the type of trouble. "TROUBLE" and "OUTPUT #" <CIRCUIT NO.> displayed on LCD. Activation of yellow OUTPUT indicator(s) on LED display for the notification appliance(s). Activation of yellow SYSTEM TROUBLE indicator on LED display. Activation of yellow OUTPUT indicator(s) on LED display of any output circuit(s) which have been described as TROUBLE BELL. NOTE: A current in excess of 1.4 Amps, when the panel is in the alarm condition, will result in that output being disabled and a trouble as described above. à CAUTION A problem in an audible or visual device may not be apparent when the panel is in a normal condition. If the circuit indicates a trouble condition when the panel is in an alarm condition the problem must be located and corrected. Ground Fault A short between any circuit and earth ground will result in the following: Activation of trouble relay contacts, trouble LED in a flashing mode, and local buzzer. Operation of any output circuits which have been described as TROUBLE BELL. "TROUBLE" and "GROUND" displayed on LCD. Activation of the amber TROUBLE LED in a flashing mode. NOTE: The TROUBLE LED will continue to flash until all events in the TROUBLE queue are viewed. This is accomplished by scrolling through all of the events by use of the scroll up and scroll down buttons. The LED will go steady after all trouble events have been viewed. Loss or Reduction of AC Power reduction in the AC input voltage will result in the following: Trouble LED and local buzzer will sound 11/2 hour delay of trouble relay. Operation of any output circuits which have been described as TROUBLE BELL. 14 PFC-4410RC • 5403550 • REV G - 6/09 "TROUBLE" and "A.C." displayed on LCD. LCD Backlight will be extinguished. Green AC POWER indicator on LED display will be extinguished. Activation of yellow POWER TROUBLE indicator on LED display. Activation of yellow SYSTEM TROUBLE indicator on LED display. Activation of yellow OUTPUT indicator(s) on LED display of any output circuit(s) which have been described as TROUBLE BELL. Low Battery Voltage Loss of or reduction of battery voltage to 22 volts will result in the following: Activation of trouble relay contacts, trouble LED and local buzzer. Operation of any output circuits that have been described as TROUBLE BELL. "TROUBLE" and "BATTERY" displayed on LCD. Activation of yellow POWER TROUBLE indicator on LED display. Activation of yellow SYSTEM TROUBLE indicator on LED display. Activation of yellow OUTPUT indicator(s) on LED display of any output circuit(s) which have been described as Loss Of Auxiliary Power Output Loss of output of the auxiliary power will result in the following: Activation of trouble relay contacts, trouble LED and local buzzer. Operation of any output circuits that have been described as TROUBLE BELL. "TROUBLE" and "AUX LOW" displayed on LCD. Activation of yellow POWER TROUBLE indicator on LED annunciator module. Activation of yellow SYSTEM TROUBLE indicator on LED annunciator module. Activation of yellow OUTPUT indicator(s) on LED annunciator module of any output circuit(s) which have been described as TROUBLE BELL. The remote annunciator RA-4410RC will not function if problem exists on nonresettable 24VDC. To Silence the Buzzer (or outputs that have been described as trouble or supervisory bell) Press the scroll up or scroll down buttons. Once all events in the trouble or supervisory queue have been viewed, the buzzer and appropriate outputs will silence. The applicable system TROUBLE or SUPERVISORY LED will change from flashing to steady. NOTE: Any continuous trouble conditions that have been silenced automatically resound 24 hours after the first trouble condition was silenced. To Silence a Signaling Appliance Press the SIGNAL SILENCE button. All silencable outputs will de-activate. A trouble condition will be created. The Amber Alarm Silence LED will light. A CAUTION Where audible and/or visual indicators are being used as an evacuation signal, do not silence an alarm condition without investigating and determining that an emergency condition does not exist. NOTES: Alarms initiated from zones that are in the waterfiow mode cannot be silenced. The panel must be reset to silence audible alarm devices. If silenceable waterfiow indication is desired it must be programmed as detection and annunciated on the zone identification portion of the LCD. To Reset an Alarm or Supervisory Condition Determine the cause of the alarm condition and if necessary remove the cause. Press the reset button. To Reset A Trouble Condition Determine the cause of the trouble condition and remove the cause. This circuit is self-restoring. When all trouble conditions are removed all indications will return to normal. NOTE: When an initiating device zone is operated in a Class A (Style D) mode any trouble condition will require manual. operation of the reset switch to restore the panel to normal after the fault has been corrected. 15 PFC-4410RC • 5403550 • REV G • 6/09 Lamp Test When the panel is in a Normal Condition, pushing the two top buttons will illuminate all of the LED's and display for Lpproximately one second. Remote Annunciator Model RA-4410RC Operation Red LED's: Initiating Device Circuits Active (4) Notification/Release Circuits Active (4) Common Alarm (1) Green LED's: AC Power Yellow LED's: Initiating Device Circuits troubles (4) Output Circuit Troubles (4) Supervisory Initiating Zone (4) Supervisory Bell Output Active (4) (1) each: Sup 1/Abort, Supervisory 2, Power Trouble, Supervisory Trouble, System Trouble, Ground Fault, Pre-Discharge/Discharging, Alarm Silenced 0 RED OUTPUT LED STEADY ABORT 0 (0 ZONE! 00) OUTPUT! I ZONES OUTPUT 2 I o- zoss [ OUTPUT3 J [____________ I o' [ZONE2 OUTPUT 4 ] [ I AC POWER 0 SUP I/ABORT POWERTBL 0 SUPERVISORY 2 SYSTEM_ 0 COMMON AlARM E SUPTOL 0 ALARM SILENCE o 0 GROUND FAULT 0 STEADY: DISCHARGING 0FLASHINO: PUE-D!SCBAROE DWGO 3554-Il The appropriate LED flashes to indicate a change of status on the panel. A trouble or supervisory condition will flash the appropriate Yellow LED indicating the location of the condition. If any outputs are programmed as TROUBLE or SUPERVISORY BELL, that Yellow output LED will flash indicating the output is activated. Pressing the BUZZER SILENCE button on the panel changes the flashing zone Amber LED to steady on and turns the flashing Yellow output LED off. An alarm condition will flash a Red LED indicating the zone in alarm and any outputs mapped to that zone that have activated. Pressing the SIGNAL SILENCE button changes the flashing Red Zone LED to steady on and the flashing Red Output LED mapped that zone off unless the output is programmed as RELEASE. In addition, the Yellow ALARM! SILENCE LED will light. \ny zone programmed as WATERFLOW is considered non-silenceable so the signal and buzzer silence buttons will have no effect on the flashing zone and output LED's. A buzzer on the annunciator sounds for any trouble condition. When the panel has a trouble or supervisory condition, pressing the SILENCE/LAMP TEST button silences the condition at the panel and all annunciators. When no non-silenced trouble or supervisory conditions exist, pressing the SILENCE/LAMP TEST button can be used to test the LED's. The release panel supervises and communicates with the annunciator via separate connections for the RS-485 communication and 24VDC power requirements of the RA-4410RC. Separate cables should be used for power and communication. Shielded cable shall be used for the communication line. Up to four annunciators can be connected to one panel. A rotary switch is provided on the panel to indicate how many annunciators are connected. Another rotary switch is on the annunciator to set the address. The annunciators must be addressed consecutively. See page 89 for wiring information. Refer to bulletin #8840024 for installation instructions and maximum wire run. Test Procedure The system should be inspected, tested and maintained in accordance with NFPA-72 National Fire Alarm Code, Chapter 10 and any other requirements of the local authority having jurisdiction. Test Procedure (Canada) The system should be inspected, tested and maintained in accordance with ULC Standard CAN/ULC-S536 and any other requirements of the local authority having jurisdiction. Testing should be done as a minimum as described below Notify the fire department or other receiving station if alarm, supervisory and/or trouble signals are transmitted. Notify the proper building personnel so that audible and/or visual signals can be ignored. If the release panel is monitored by a building fire alarm panel, take appropriate action to eliminate any unwanted events. Momentarily open each of the following circuits. Each initiating device zone Supervisory circuit Notification Appliance/Releasing circuit - observe that this results in a trouble condition and all indicators operate as described in the appropriate preceding section for the particular circuit that is faulted. 16 PFC-4410RC • 5403550 • REVG. 6/09 5. Move the PROGRAM switch down. The LCD should respond: "LOOK AT HISTORY?". Press the bottom button until the display reads: "PASSWORD=OOO". Press the SET button three times. Press the FUNCTION (bottom) button until the LCD reads "SYSTEM MODE: NORMAL". Press the SELECT (middle) button. The LCD will read "SYSTEM MODE: ONE MAN WALKTEST". Press the SET (top) button then move the PROGRAM switch up. The panel will respond with "ONE MAN WALKTEST" and the time. The trouble LED will light. Any output described as "RELEASING" will automatically be disabled. Note: The RCDS-1, Release Circuit Disconnect Switch, shall be used to provide physical means of disconnecting the release circuit in compliance with NFPA 72, 2007, 6.12.5.2. AWARNING Failure to enter the walktest mode and subsequent operation of initiating zones may result in a release. After 30 minutes of no activity in the walk test mode the panel automatically reverts to normal operation. Operate each initiating device on all zones. All audible and visual alarm devices should operate for about 3 seconds. Then the system will automatically reset allowing the user to go to the next initiating device. Operate each initiating device on the supervisory circuit. Observe that all the indications described in the section on supervisory conditions occur. Move the PROGRAM switch down again. The LCD should respond: "LOOK AT HISTORY?" Press the FUNCTION (bottom) button until the LCD reads: PASSWORD=000, enter the password. Press the bottom button until the display reads: "SYSTEM MODE: ONE MAN WALKTEST" Press the SELECT (middle) button. The LCD will read: "SYSTEM MODE: NORMAL" Press the SET (top) button then restore the PROGRAM switch to the up position. The LCD will show the normal banner message. All audible and visual indicators should be off. Notify all building, fire department, and/or other receiving station personnel that the test has concluded. Maintenance Test batteries per local and national standards. At a minimum replace batteries every four (4) years or sooner depending on test results. The date of purchase shall be marked on all batteries. Programming Mode Instructions To use the Programming Mode push the program switch to the right (see drawing below). Panel Visual Display As a general rule, the following applies on the Programming Mode buttons: The top button (SET) sets the message on the display into the memory. The middle button (SELECT) scrolls through the selections available for the function displayed. The bottom button (FUNCTION) allows the user to skip the function without changing the program. RED OUTPUT LED STEADY ABORT ZONE I OUTPUT [o ZONE 2 0) [OUTPUTI 01 oJ ro Z0NE3) 10 OUTPUT3 PROGRAM RUN ZONE 4 0] 1° OUTPUT4 0] MODE MODE OACPOWER OSUP I/ABORT SCROLL-UP IOWERTBL 0 SUPERVISORY 2 BUZZER SILENCE RUN SYSTEMTBL SUPIBL 0 (DMMONALARM 0 ALARM SILENCE } __________ LAMP PROGRAM [J 0 GROUND OISYSDY DISCHARGE TEST FAULT FLASH/P/cs SCROWIXYM/ IRE-DISCHARGE SEE BUZZER SILENCE SELECT SIGNALSII.ZNCE FUNCTION SYSTEM RESET (I) VIEW/NO ANGLE 0 AWARNING After 30 minutes of no activity, the panel will automatically exit Program Mode and revert to run mode. DWG# 35/0-18 17 PFC-4410RC • 5403550 • REV G • 6/09 To program, push the Program Switch down. ['here is no capability to back up screens in the program mode. If a mistake was made during programming, move the program witch back up, then move it down and start from the beginning. To exit the program mode at any time, move the Program Switch to the left. When the programming switch is down (see Panel Visual Display) the following will appear in the display window: EMMONEWEEMENNEMN OflOUOUNUl••I• History To examine the HISTORY press the top button, the display window will show the time and date of the last event or action. To skip to the next function or to exit history, press the FUNCTION (bottom) button. SET Press the top button to discover the time and date of the last event or action and to scroll forward. SELECT To scroll back, press the middle button. FUNCTION F-1 To exit or skip HISTORY, press the bottom button. After pressing the FUNCTION (bottom) button the following will appear in the display window: Date and Time SELECT To change the time, press the middle button. FUNCTION To exit to the next function, press the bottom button. If the middle button is pushed, the date and time will appear in the display window: •••••flflNBNUEIOE MUMMEBEEMBEEBEHE The date is shown at the top and the time at the bottom of the display window. "MINUTES" indicates that the user can now change the minutes. SET F1 Pressing the top button will decrease the minutes. SELECT 1-1 Pressing the middle button will increase the minutes. FUNCTION 1-1 When finshed setting the minutes, Press the bottom button. The minutes will change to hours. Continue this process and change the DAY, MONTH and YEAR. When you have finished changing the year, press the ,'UNCTION (bottom) button. A display similar to the following will appear: PAS SWORD=0 00 A 18 PFC-4410RC • 5403550 • REV G • 6/09 Password This display prevents unauthorized programming of the panel by requiring the user to enter the proper password. To select the appropriate number for the space indicated by the A symbol, press the middle button. When the proper number is displayed press the top button to set the number and move to the next space. If the wrong password is entered, the panel will automatically return to a normal condition. All panels are shipped from the factory with a password of 000. If the password is lost contact Potter. SET 1-1 After selecting the desired number, press the top button to set and move to the next number. SELECT 11 Press the middle button to scroll through the numbers. FUNCTION [—~Pressing the bottom button will have no effect. After entering the correct password, a display similar to the following will appear: EMEEMMMMOMMUMMEM Zone Disabled/Enabled This display allows the user to ENABLE or DISABLE Initiating zones. This display window shows that initiating ZONE #1 is enabled. To toggle from ENABLED to DISABLED or visa versa, press the SELECT (middle) button. SET After selecting ENABLED or DISABLED, press the top button to set and move to the next zone. SELECT Press the middle button to toggle between ENABLED or DISABLED. FUNCTION To skip to the next function, press the bottom button. After selecting all four zones or pressing the FUNCTION (bottom) button, the following will appear in the display window: OUT P J U J TJ # ENABLED Output Enable/Disable This display allows the user to ENABLE or DISABLE any of the output circuits. SET After selecting ENABLED or DISABLED, press the top button to set and move to the next output. SELECT F1 Press the middle button to toggle between ENABLED or DISABLED. FUNCTION 1-1 To skip to the next function, press the bottom button. After selecting all four outputs or pressing the FUNCTION (bottom) button, the following will appear in the display window: Disabling any input or outputs will create a trouble condition on the panel. EMMUMMEMMMEMEME DI3DflIIUUUUU•••I• 19 PFC-4410RC • 5403550 • REV G • 6/09 )ne Man Walktest This display allows the user to select system mode NORMAL or ONE MAN WALKTEST by pressing the SELECT (middle) button to toggle back and forth from NORMAL to ONE MAN WALKTEST. When the desired mode is displayed, press the SET (top) button. If ONE MAN WALKTEST is selected for test purposes, the display must be restored to the NORMAL setting after the test is completed by toggling to it using the SELECT (middle) button. lAftem r N iTi Note: NFPA 72, 2007, 6.12.5.2. requires a physical means of disconnecting release minutes of no activitythe panel circuits. The Potter Model, RCDS-1, complies with those requirements. atically reverts to normal. SET F-1 After selecting NORMAL or ONE MAN WALKTEST, press the top button to set that mode. SELECT Press the middle button to toggle between NORMAL and CROSS ZONED. FUNCTION 1-1 Press the bottom button to skip to the next function. After selecting the operating mode or pressing the FUNCTION button a display similar to the following will appear in the display window: EMMMMEMMUMEMMMMM EMEMMMEMMMMMMMW 20 PFC-4410RC • 5403550 • REV G • 6/09 PFC-4410RC Standard Program Information The PFC-4410RC has 24 standard programs which are detailed in the following pages. Selecting one of these programs will auto- matically program every function of the panel except the custom banner and zone message functions. - NOTES: The release discharge time is continuous for all 24 programs. In the chemical extinguishing programs the pre-discharge timer defaults to 60 seconds, manual release pre-discharge timer de- faults to 30 seconds, the abort mode defaults to UL. The following is an explanation of how the various programs operate and information about the types of devices that are to be connected to the input and output zones. If none of the standard programs are acceptable for the installation required, select the custom program #0 then press the SET (top) button. This will allow the user to custom program the panel. Turn to page 72 for custom program information. Type Description Alarm Zones Detection Smoke Detectors, Spot Type Heat Detectors Waterfiow PSI 0 Pressure Switch Linear Heat Cable Type Heat Detectors Manual Release Pull Stations Supervisory Zones Supervisory Valve Tamper, Low Air, High Air, Room Temperature Low Air supervisory Low Air Switch High Air High Air Switch Tamper Valve Tamper Switch Low Air Alarm * PSI 0, PS40 Outputs Alarm 24VDC Bells, Horns, Strobes, to indicate an alarm condition. Release Solenoid Valve, Squib, Releasing Mechanism eAEROSOL Aerosol Generator Supervisory 24VDC Bells, Horns, Strobes, to indicate a supervisory condition. Trouble 24VDC Bells, Horns, Strobes, to indicate a trouble condition. To program the PFC-4410RC to operate with one of the following 24 standard programs: The water based extinguishing programs are numbered 1-15. The chemical extinguishing programs are numbered 20-28. A description, theory of operation, and wiring diagrams for all standard programs start on the next page. Press SELECT (center) button to scroll to the program number (#1 through #15, #20 through #28) you desire. Press SET (top) button. Turn to page 76 to program the banner message and to finish programming the panel. SET After selecting the proper program number, press the top button to set the program and move to the next function. SELECT Press the middle button to scroll through the programs. FUNCTION Press the bottom button to skip to the next function. After selecting the desired program number with the middle button, SET (top button) must be pressed to set the program. *Not available on Supervisory Zones: Sup 1 or Sup 2. 21 PFC-4410RC • 5403550 • REV G - 6/09 Custom Program (#0 only) Describe Initiating Zones 1 - 4 Alarm Zones Supervisory Zones Detection Supervisory Waterfiow Tamper Linear Heat Detection Low Air Manual Release Hi Air Low Air Alarm Describe Initiating Zone 5 (dedicated supervisory) Supervisory Tamper Low Air Hi Air Abort Describe Initiating Zone 6 Supervisory Tamper Low Air Describe Output Zones Alarm Indicating Releasing eAEROSOL Supervisory Bell Trouble Bell Releasing circuits: normal/cross-zoned Discharge time: 7, 8, 9, 10, 20 minutes or continuous Map Alarm Inputs to Outputs Put in Banner Message Put in Banner Message Bottom Line Put Zone Description for Each Initiating Zone Change Password Finished Installation Instructions Read the entire manual before attempting to install this panel This panel wiring should be installed and maintained in accordance with section 760 (Fire Protection Signaling Systems) and all other applicable sections of the National Electrical Code, all other applicable NFPA Code and Standards, local code and the authority having jurisdiction. Review the circuit parameters listed below before installing the panel. Canada Installations A CAUTION This panel wiring should be installed and maintained in accordance with CAN/IJLC-S524M, (Standard for the Installation of Fire Alarm Systems), and all other applicable sections of the Canadian Electrical Code, all other applicable NFPA Code and Standards, local code and the authority having jurisdiction. Review the circuit parameters listed below before installing the panel. All wiring terminals support 14 to 22 AWG wire sizes. 18 AWG stranded or solid copper wire, (or wire size rated for the current carrying capacity of the input and output circuit application), with 300V, 85°C insulation is recommended. Wire checkout With all initiating devices and notification appliances installed and with the EOLR's in place, check the wires with an ohmmeter. Meter readings outside of the following will prevent normal operation. From any wire to ground - more than lOOK ohms. Across the 2 wires on each Initiating zone - between 1.8K ohms and 5.4K ohms. Across the 2 wires on each notification circuit - between 1.8K ohms and 23.9K ohms. 83 PFC-4410RC • 5403550 REV G - 6/09 Mounting Instructions The unit should be mounted in a convenient location, approximately 5 ft. from the floor where it will be accessible for testing and servicing. Ak WAR MNG Removal of this false front exposes electrical components at potentially hazardous voltages and should be performed by qualified personnel only. The main circuit board module should be removed before attempting to mount the cabinet. Disconnect the AC power from TB201. To remove the module, remove the two screws holding the chassis to the cabinet. Lift the module upwards, approximately 1/2", in order to clear the cross-beam of the cabinet on which the module rests. Remove the module and set aside. The PFC unit may be surface mounted or semi-flush mounted using the optional trim bezel. (See drawing for installation of bezel on page 84). For semi-flush installations mount the housing so that the front edge protrudes 1" from the finished wall surface. After all conduits and wiring are in place and the wall surface is completely finished, slide the trim bezel in place and fasten with 4 #6-32 x 1/4" machine screws and nuts. Install all required conduits, external wiring and devices and make all connections that are external to the panel. Replace the module. With the AC power still turned off at the circuit breaker panel, connect the AC hot, neutral and ground wires to the terminal block TB201 as shown on the connection drawing. (See connection drawings on page 88) Connect all the other wiring to the terminals as shown in the connection drawings. Turn the AC power on and connect the standby batteries with the cable provided, polarity must be observed. Replace false front panel and secure with mounting screws, taking care to not damage LED annunciator module cable. The operation of the complete system should be verified as outlined in the test procedure section. PFC-4410RC False Front Removal/Assembly Drawing DWG# 3550-15 84 PFC-4410RC• 5403550 REV G - 6/09 Inactive Circuits All inactive initiating device circuits and indicating appliance circuits must have the end-of-line resistor on the panel terminal. Operating Instructions Form Fill in the name, address and telephone number of the servicing agency on the appropriate instruction sheet provided and frame and place adjacent to control panel at eye level. Battery Size Calculations To use Calculation Table: List in column #1 all devices used in the system, include all modules, bells, horns, door holders, and smoke detectors (see table #1 or manufacturers specifications). List in column #2 the quantity of each device. List in column #3 the standby current of each device (exclude all alarm signal indicating devices). List in column #5 the alarm current of each device. For each line, multiply the figure in column #2 by the figure in column #3 and enter the product in column #4. Then multiply the figure in column #2 by the figure in column #5 and enter the product in column #6. Add the figures in columns #3 and #6, enter the sums in the appropriate Total mA box. Convert these figures from milliamperes to amperes by multiplying by 0.001, enter the product in the appropriate Total A box. Multiply the standby total amperes by required time in hours from table 2. Divide the alarm total amperes by 12 (5 mins.). Add the standby AH and the alarm AH and divide this sum by 0.85 (efficiency factor). Select a battery that has an AH rating above this figure but not less than 6.5AH. Battery Size Requirements And Maintenance These panels require a 24 volt gel-cell battery for proper operation. 24 hours of standby power is required for Local Systems and Central Station (NFPA-72). The chart below will assist you in selecting the proper size battery: (Does not include LED Annunciator) No. of Smoke No. of Bells Auxiliary Power Standby Hours Battery Size/Part No. Detectors (100mA each) Requirements Required (2 Req.) 0-100 0-10 0-25mA 24 8AH/5130084/BT80 0-100 0-10 OmA 90 12AH/5130090/BT 120 0-100 0-10 0-30mA 90 18AH/5130086/BT 180 Maximum allowed battery size for UL Listings is 12AH. FM and others may require more than 90 hours of standby time and may use larger batteries. Batteries rated above 18AH require a separate battery cabinet (Potter stock number 1000015). Mark the purchase date on the batteries. Test the batteries at least semi annually according to the battery test methods in NFPA72 or the battery maunfacturers instructions. Replace the batteries if they either fail the test or after four years of use. 85 PFC-4410RC • 5403550 • REV G • 6/09 2-Wire Smoke Detector Compatibility Data Smoke Detector Compatibility Identifier "A" System Sensor (Brk) (Max. No. Of Detectors Per Zone is 20) Det. Model Identifier Base Model Identifier. 1400* A N/A N/A 2400* A N/A N/A 2400TH* A N/A N/A 2W-B A N/A N/A 2WT-B A N/A N/A 2WTR-B A N/A N/A Detection Systems (Max. No. Of Detectors Per Zone Is 25) Det. Model Identifier Base Model Identifier DS250 A MB2W/MB2WL A DS250TH A MB2W/MB2WL A DS25OHD A MB2W/MB2WL A Esi (Max. No. Of Detectors Per Zone Is 25) Det. Model Identifier Base Model Identifier 611U Sto 601U SOO 611UD Slo 601U SOO 611UT Slo 601U SOO 612U Slo 601U SOO 612UD Slo 601U SOO 613U5 Slo 601U SOO 611UD Slo 609Ub0 SOO 612UD Slo 609U10 SOO 425C S1O N/A N/A 425C1 Sb N/A N/A Hochiki (Max. No. Of Detectors Per Zone Is 25) Det. Model Identifier Base Model Identifier SLR24* HD-3 HSC-221R I-IB-71 HSB-22 1 HB-54 HSB-22 iN HB-54 NS6-221 NS4-221 NS6-220 HB-3 SLR24H* HD-3 HSC-221R HB-71 HSB-221 HB-54 HSB-221N HB-54 NS6-221 NS4-221 SIJ24* HD-3 HSC-221R HB-71 HSB-221 HB-54 HSB-22 iN HB-54 NS6-221 NS4-221 Fenwal (Max. No. Of Detectors Per Zone Is 25) Det. Model Identifier Base Model Identifier CPD7051* I51FE1 2-WIRE FE51A PSD7155* P55FE1 2WRLT FE52A PSD7156* P56FE1 2WRB . FE55A All of the above Fenwal detectors and bases can be used in any combination Retrofit Base Adaptor 70-501000-003, Identifier MAFE1 (for series 70-201000 Bases, Models -001, -002, -003 and -005) Duct Housing with Detector Base DH-51, Identifier DH22FE5 (for CPD-705 1 and PSD-7 155 detectors only) Potter (Max. No. Of Detectors Per Zone Is 25) Det. Model Identifier Base Model Identifier PS.24* HD-3(HOCHIKJ) SB-46 HB-71(HOCHIKb) HB-54(HOCHIKI) SB-93 HB-3 (HOCHIKI PS-24H HD-3(HOCHIKI) SB-46 HB-71(HOCHlKI) HB-54(HOCHIKI) IS24* HD-3(HOCHIKI) SB-46 HB-71(HOCHIKJ) HB-54(HOCHIKI) I Only one detector can be supported in alarm per zone. If using a mix of System Sensor and other smoke detectors, a maximum of 20 detectors shall be permitted. Sync Module Compatibility - Panel is compatible with the following synchronization modules: Amseco #SMD10-3A, Gentex #AVSM, System Sensor #MDL, Wheelock #DSM12/24 *SJll, and ULC Listed 89 PFC-4410RC 5403550 REV G - 6/09 Releasing Device Capability Automatic Water Control Valves Compatibility Data Using the Following Solenoids Devices Per Circuit Water Valve Manufacturers Water Valve Designation Size NPT ASCO Solenoid Valve 1 Figgie Fire Protection Model D and F 21/,', 4", 6" Model T8210A107 Systems (Formally ASCOA) Model R8210A107 Model 8210A107 24VDC Grinnell Corp. Grinnell or Gem Model A-4 4", 6" Skinner Solenoid Valve Model Grinnell or Gem Model B 2" 73218BN4UNLVNOCl 11C2 Grinnell or Gem Model F445 2V2" 24VDC Grinnell or Gem Model F470 4", 6" Skinner Solenoid Valve Model 1 Central Sprinkler Model A 6" 732 18BN4UNLVNOC lllC2 Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Model A 2W' 24VDC Co. Inc. Models B and BX 4", 6" 100mm, 150mm Global Fire Sprinkler Corp. Model F 21/2', 4", 6' Star Sprinkler Corp. Model A 3",6" Model 3", 6" ASCO Solenoid Valve I The Viking Corp. Model B-i 1 Y2", 2', 3", 4", 6' Model T82l0A107 Model R8210Al07 Model 8210A107 24VDC Solenoid Compatibility Data Manufacturer Devices Per Circuit Solenoid(s) Voltage Victaulic 1 753-B Series 24VDC Viking 1 11591 24VDC Viking 1 11601 24VDC Parker 1 732 12Bn4TNLVN0C322C2 24VDC FM Approval Solenoid Groups A,B,D,E,FG,H,I,J,K Agent Releasing Systems Compatibility Data Manufacturer Actuator Voltage Fike Protection Systems Division of Fike, Inc. C85-102 CO2 Solenoid 24VDC Fike Protection Systems Division of Fike, Inc. Interface Firing Module P/N 102136* 24VDC Janus FM200 Electric Valve Actuator P/N 18481 24VDC Amerex 17014 24VDC Fireaway Stat-x Models 30E, 60E, bOB, 250E, 500E, and 1000E 24 VDC Alarm Indicating Appliance Compatibility Data All alarm indicating appliances must be UL Listed, 24VDC devices * ULC Listed NAC Device Compatibility I Manufacturer Model # Type of Device Maximum Devices per Circuit* Amseco All devices compatible with SMiDlO-3A I SL24W-1530 Strobe 7 t 11 SH24W-1530 Horn/Strobe 6 to 9 (Do Not Jumper Horn and Strober) MBA 24-6 Bell 16 MBA 24-8 Bell 16 MBA24-10 Bell 16 * Number of devices per circuit will depend on the field selectable candela and audible settings of the device. 90 PFC-4410RC• 5403550 • REV G - 6/09 Manufacturer Model # Type of Device Maximum Devices per Circuit* Amseco (continued) All devices compatible with SMI)10-3A MH-12/24 Mini-Horn 66 HP-25T Mini-Horn 60 CSL24W Strobe 7 to 12 (Not for Evacuation) CSL24C Strobe 4 to 8 (Not for Evacuation) CSH24W Horn/Strobe 6 to 9 (Not for Evacuation) CSH24C Horn/Strobe 3 to 7 (Not for Evacuation) H24W Horn 14 CM24W Chime 22 CSHB24 Horn/Strobe 5 (Not for Evacuation) CSLB24 Strobe 6 (Not for Evacuation) SMD10-3A Sync Module 1 Gentex All devices compatible with the AVSM GEH Horn 35 GEC3 Horn/Strobe 3 to 8 AVSM Sync Module System Sensor All devices compatible with the MDL H SERIES Horn 14 S SERIES Strobe 3 to 6 MB Series Mini-Horn 12 55M24-6 Bell 18 SSM24-8 Bell 18 SSM24-10 Bell 18 MDL Sync Module Wheelock All device are compatible with the DSM RSS/RSSP Strobe 11 AS-241575 Horn/Strobe 6 AS-24MCW Horn/Strobe 3 to 11 AS-24MCWH Horn/Strobe 2 NS-24MCW Horn/Strobe 4 to 15 NS-241575 Horn/Strobe 9 NS-24MCC/ MCCH Horn/Strobe 2 to 14 MT-241575 Horn/Strobe 3 to 11 MT-24MCW Horn/Strobe 3 to II AMT-241575 Horn/Strobe 4 to 9 AMT-24MCW Horn/Strobe 3 to 12 AMT 12/24 Horn 8 to 17 NH-12/24 Horn 22 to 55 HS-24 Horn 37 HS4-241575 Horn/Strobe 5 to 8 HS4-24MCW Horn/Strobe 3 to 11 HS4-24MCC Horn/Strobe 2 to 10 MT-12/24 Horn 16 to 66 AH-24 Horn 12 to 47 MIZ Mini-Horn 38 ASAP Horn/Strobe 6 DSM Sync Module 1 * Number of devices per circuit will depend on the field selectable candela and audible settings of the device. 91 Rate-of-Rise and Do moT I'll Tnt -- DETECTOR Fixed Temperature Heat Detectors 280B-PL Series > Low profile with base The 280B-PL Series heat detectors offer fixed temperature or corn- > Positive fixed temperature bination rate-of-rise and fixed temperature features. The heat detec- operating indication tor is available with a white plastic reversible mounting plate. The > On site testing of rate-of-rise plastic plate can be used for either flush or surface mounting. It in- feature cludes a white skirt which covers the space between detector base and the mounting surface. *NOTE: Maximum detector coverage has been determined by UL to > UL Listed > FM Approved > CSFM Listed provide detection time equal to sprinkler devices spaced at 10 ft (3.05m) intervals on a smooth ceiling 15 feet 9 inches (4.8m) high. Higher ceilings may adversely affect detection time. Earlier detec- tion may be obtained by reducing the spacing between detectors. (See NFPA 72, Chapter 5) Detector twists and locks onto mounting plate. Mounting plate may SPECI FICATIONS > Single circuit normally open contact rated at 3 amps at 6 to be surface mounted or mounted onto any 3 1/4" (83mm) or 4 125V AC; 1.0 amps at 6 to 28V (1 02mm) octagon box. DC, 0.3 amps at 125V DC, and .01 amps at 250V DC > Maximum coverage 2,500 sq. ft. (232.25 sq. m) > UL spacing: 50 ft (15.24m) > FM spacing: 30 ft (9.14m) > Color - white 90 Fieldstone Court I Cheshire, CT 06410 I \ d Signaling © Copyright 2004 Edwards Ph: 203.699.3300 I Fx: 203.699.3108 www.edwards-signals.com I & Security Systems® Surface Mount Flush Mount Skirt Mount 5 dia. Wire entrance T: 7 13/16 dia. ( snap-outs 198mm) ttmKReversibl \eversible ____________ 6253 __-i plastic mounting 3 7/16 ___________________ skirt 5 DlA _ plate (87mm) __________________ (127mm) supplied) plastic mounting plate Flush mounting (supplied) using 3 1I2 or 4 octagonal Mounting using Reversible plastic mount- 1 1/2 deep electrical outlet box 6253 skirt (not supplied) ing plate (supplied)* (not supplied) with 3 1/2 or 4 octagonal 1 1/2* deep electrical outlet box (not supplied) 818-PL) (ROR & Fixed) (15°F/mm.) 282B-PL. ROR & Fixed 150F/mm. 194 150 283B-PL Fixed - 135 100 284B-PL Fixed - 194 150 © Copyright 2004 Edwards c1VardS Signaling 90 Fieldstone Court I Cheshire, CT 06410 Ph: 203.699.3300 I Fx: 203.699.3108 & Security Systems® www.edwards-signals.com Effective: June 2007 Series MT Multitone Horns and rA. Series MT Multitone Horn-Strobes FENWAL Protection Systems A UTC Fire & Security Company F-75-O01 FEATURES Approvals include: UL 1971 and UL 464. Factory Mutual (FM), California State Fire Marshal (CSFM) and New York City (MEA). Designed to meet or exceed ADA!NFPA!UFCIANSI Standards and Accessibility Guidelines. Meets OSHA 29 Part 1910,165. One alarm appliance with eight (8) selective signals to provide superior sound penetration for various ambient and wall conditions with two field selectable sound output levels. Audible and strobe can operate from a single signal- ing circuit with any of the eight (8) audible signals. Code-3 Horn and Tone meet ANSI!NFPA temporal pat- tern for standard emergency evacuation signaling. Multi-Candela MT Strobe models available with field selectable 151301751110 candela settings. Single Candela MT Strobe models available with 15! 75 candela rating. Weatherproof MT Strobe models available with 751 180 candela rating. Strobe markings for fire and suppression applica- tions. Wide listed voltage range, filtered (DC) and FWR. Polarized inputs for compatibility with standard reverse polarity type supervision of circuit wiring by an alarm panel. Low cost installation via standard electrical boxes. Attractive flush or surface mounting options. No additional trimplate required for flush mounting. IN and OUT wiring terminations that accept two (2) #12 to #18 AWG wires at each terminal. DESCRIPTION Fenwal Series MT and MT Strobe Multitone electronic signals offer a choice of eight (8) nationally and interna- tionally recognized alerting sounds: Horn, Bell, March Time Horn, Code-3 Tone, Code-3 Horn, Slow Whoop, Siren or Hi/Lo Tone. Our Code-3 horn and tone patterns are engineered to comply with NFPA/ANSI Temporal Pat- tern specifications without requiring additional equip- ment. With MT and MT Strobe Signals, one alarm appliance meets most of your signaling needs. The MT Strobes are designed for ADA applications with maximum performance, reliability and cost-effectiveness while meeting or exceeding the latest requirements of NFPA 72 (1999), ANSI 117.1, UFC (2000) and UL Stan- dard 1971 as well as meeting ADA requirements con- cerning photosensitive epilepsy. Series MT Horn Strobe (with lOB backbox) Series MT Horn Each MT and MT Strobe appliance has two user selec- tive sound output levels: STANDARD dBA and HIGH dBA. The MT-12/14 provides dual voltage capability in one unit, 12 Vdc or 24 Vdc operation, filtered or FWR. The MT Strobe Electronic Signals operate with 24 Vdc and may be used with filtered or unfiltered (full-wave-rectified) input voltages. Separate input terminals are available and shunt wires are provided to enable both tone and strobe to operate simultaneously from a single input. The Multitone Strobe Signals are UL Listed for indoor wall mount applications, under Standard 1971 for Devices for the Hearing Impaired and under Standard 464 for Audible Signal Appliances. MT Strobe models are listed for indoor use with a temperature range of 32°F to 120°F (0°C to 49°C) and maximum humidity of 93% ± 2%. The MT-12/24 and MTWP models for outdoor use are Listed for -31°F to 150°F (-35°C to 66°C) and maxi- mum humidity of 95%. The strobe devices use a Xenon flashtube with solid state circuitry enclosed in a rugged Lexan® (or equivalent) lens to provide maximum reliability for effective visible signaling. Strobe lens markings avail- able for "Fire" and "Agent" labeled applications. The Series MT Signals have IN and OUT wiring termina- tions that accept two #12 to #18 AWG wires at each ter- minal. Inputs are polarized for compatibility with standard reverse polarity type supervision. Table 1. Alarm Tones • All candela ratings represent minimum effective Mul- titnn Strobe intpnqih, based on UL 1971 Tone Alarm Tones Pattern Description Horn Broadband Horn (Continuous) Bell 1560 Hz Modulated (0.07 sec. ON/Repeat) March Time Horn Horn (0.25 sec. ON/0.25 sec. OFF/Repeat) Code-3 Horn Horn (ANSI S3.41 Temporal Pattern) Code-3 Tone 500 Hz (ANSI S3.41 Temporal Pattern) Slow Whoop 500-1200 Hz SWEEP 500-1200 sec. ON/0.5 sec. OFF/Repeat) Siren 600-1200 HZ SWEEP (1.0 sec. ON/Repeat) Hi/Lo 1000/800 (0.25 sec. ON/Alternate) GENERAL NOTES Strobes are designed to flash at I flash per second minimum over their "Regulated Voltage Range." Note that NFPA-72 (1999) specifies a flash rate of 1 t 2 flashes per second and ADA Guidelines specifies a flash rate of 1 to 3 flashes per second. The MT Audible is UL 464 Listed. Regulated Voltage Range" is the newest terminology used by UL to identify the voltage range. Prior to this change, UL used the terminology "Listed Voltage Range." Table 3. Current Ratings for Series MT Strobe Portion Model RMS current (Amps) MT241575 MTWP-2475 MT24McW Candela 1575cd 180cd 15cd 30cd 75cd llocd 24.0 Vdc 0.060 0.094 0.041 0.063 0.109 0.140 UL Max* 0.090 0.138 0.060 0.092 0.165 0.220 * RMS current ratings are per UL average RMS method. UL max current rating is the maximum RMS current within the listed voltage range (16-33v for 24v units). For strobes the UL max current is usually at the minimum listed voltage (16v for 24v units). For audibles the max current is usually at the maximum listed voltage (33v for 24v units). For unfiltered FWR ratings, see installation instructions. SPECIFICATIONS Table 2. dBA and Current Ratings for Series MT Audible Portion Tone RMS Current (Amps) dBA@ 10 Ft (UL Reverberant) dBA@ 10 Ft 24 VDC 12 VDC 24 VDC 12 VDC 12 and 24 VDC HI Output - STD Output HI Output STD Output HI Output STD Output HI Output STD Output HI Output STD Output @ 24 VDC UL max* @ 24 VDC UL max* @ 24 VDC - UL max* - @ 24 VDC - UL max* Horn 0.074 0.108 0.033 0.044 0.145 0.176 0.023 0.034 92 87 90 77 99 93 Bell 0.040 0.053 0.018 0.024 0.077 0.095 0.014 0.020 86 80 85 69 92 87 March Time Horn 0.067 0.104 0.033 0.038 0.109 0.142 0.023 0.034 89 84 89 74 99 93 (Code-3 0.069 0.091 0.035 0.100 0.142 0.023 0.034 88 83 88 73 99 93 Code-3 Tons 0.061 0.075 0.026 0.035 0.088 0.105 0.015 0.021 85 80 84 70 95 90 Slow Whoop 0.069 0.098 0.028 0.037 0.100 0.142 0.025 0.035 90 89 89 75 99 94 Siren 0.080 0.104 0.027 0.036 0.122 0.152 0.021 0.030 89 84 89 75 98 93 HVLO 0.044 1 0.057 0.020 0.026 0.089 0.114 0.018 0.026 1 86 81 1 86 71 93 88 * RMS current ratings are per UL average RMS method. UL max current rating is the maximum RMS current within the listed voltage range (16-33v for 24v units). For strobes the UL max current is usually at the minimum listed voltage (16v for 24v units). For audibles the max current is usually at the maximum listed voltage (33v for 24v units). For unfiltered FWR ratings, see installation instructions. -2- WIRING DIAGRAMS 3. Contact Fenwal for 'Installation Instructions' sheets on these products. These materials contain impor- MT SIGNAL FROM PRECEDING TO NEXT OR EOLR ORIDSM OR FACP APPLIAJUCE. APPLIANCE SIGNAL AUDIBLE SIGNAL AND STROBE OPERATE INDEPENDENTLY FROM PRECEDING + AUDIBLE OR - ID NEXT + FACP APPLIANCE OR EOLR FROM PRECEDING __________________________ ____________________ APPLIANCE, TO NEXT STROBE SMIDSM OR EOLR OR FACP STROBE AUDIBLE AUDIBLE SIGNAL AND STROBE OPERATE IN UNISON, RED AND BLACK SHUNT-WIRES ARE SUPPLIED. FROM RED ____________ + TO NEXT PRECEDING APPLIANCE OR FACP . +-+---- r— APPLIANCE, OR EOLR STROBE AUDIBLE INSTALLATION NOTES If the strobe and audible operate on the same cir- cuit, add the strobe current from Table 3 to the audi- ble current from Table 2. For Peak and Inrush current across the listed voltage range, refer to Installation Instructions. The average current indicated is per actual Produc- tion Testing at listed Vdc. For rated average and Peak current across the UL listed voltage range for both filtered DC and unfiltered VRMS, see Installa- tion Instructions. Failure to comply with the installation instruction sheets could result in improper installation, application, and/or operation WARNING of these products in an emergency situa- tion, which could result in property damage and serious injury or death. tant information that should be read prior to specify- ing or installing these products, including: Total current required by all devices connected to system primary and secondary power sources. Fuse ratings on signaling circuits to handle maxi- mum inrush or peak currents from all devices on those circuits. Composite flash rate from multiple strobes within a person's field of view. Installation in office areas and other specification and installation issues. Use strobes only on circuits with continuously applied operating voltage. Do not use strobes on coded or interrupted circuits in which the applied voltage is cycled on and off, as the strobe may not flash. The voltage applied to these products must be within their rated input voltage range. Conductor size (AWG), length and ampacity should be taken into consideration prior to design and installation of these products, particularly in retrofit installations. 4. Fenwal notification appliances must be used within their published specifications and must be PROP- ERLY specified, applied, installed, operated, main- tained and operationally tested in accordance with their installation instructions at the time of installa- tion and at least twice a year or more often and in accordance with local, state and federal codes, reg- ulations and laws. Specification, application, installa- tion, operation, maintenance and testing must be performed by qualified personnel for proper opera- tion in accordance with all of the latest National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), Underwriters' Labo- ratories (UL), National Electrical Code (NEC), Occu- pational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), local, state, county, province, district, federal and other applicable building and fire standards, guide- lines, regulations, laws and codes including, but not limited to, all appendices and amendments and the requirements of the local Authority Having Jurisdic- tion (AHJ). ARCHITECTS AND ENGINEERS SPECIFICATIONS The notification appliance shall be a Fenwal MT Series audible/visual device or equivalent. Notification appliance shall be electronic and use solid state components. Elec- tromechanical alternatives are not approved. Each elec- tronic signal shall provide eight (8) field selectable alarm tones. The tones shall consist of: HORN, BELL, MARCH TIME HORN, CODE-3 HORN, CODE-3 TONE, SLOW WHOOP, SIREN AND HI/LO. Tone selection shall be by durable dip switch assembly and not clips or jumpers. -3- The Multitone Audible appliance shall be UL Listed under Standard 464 for Audible Signal Appliances. The audible and the strobe shall be able to operate from a single noti- fication circuit while producing any of these tones. The device shall provide two output sound levels: STAN- DARD and HIGH dBA. The HIGH dBA setting shall pro- vide a minimum 5 dBA increase in sound output at nominal voltage. The HIGH anechoic dBA measurement at 10 feet at the alarm HORN SETTING shall be 99 dBA minimum. Operating voltages shall be 24 Vdc using fil- tered power or unfiltered power supply (full-wave-recti- fied). All models shall have provisions for standard reverse polarity type supervision and IN/OUT field wiring using terminals that accept #12 to #18 AWG wiring. Combination audible/visual appliances shall incorporate a Xenon flashtube enclosed in a rugged Lexan® lens or equivalent with solid state circuitry. Strobe shall produce a flash rate of one (1) flash per second minimum over the voltage range. The strobe intensity shall be rated per UL and Listed under Standard 1971 for Signaling Devices for the Hearing Impaired for 15/75 cd multi-candela with field selectable 15/30/75/110 candela settings. The 15/75 can- dela strobe shall be specified when 15 candela or with 75 candela intensity on-axis is required. Strobe models shall incorporate circuitry for synchronized strobe flash and shall be designed for compatibility with Fenwal SM and/ or DSM Sync Modules. The strobes shall not drift out of synchronization at any time during operation. If the mod- ule fails to operate (i.e., contacts remain closed), the strobes shall revert to a non-synchronized default flash rate. All Listed strobe appliances shall incorporate low temper- ature compensation to insure the lowest possible current consumption. Strobe activation shall be via independent input or from the same input circuit as the audible. The combination audible/visual appliances may be installed indoors and surface or flush mounted. They shall mount to standard electrical hardware requiring no additional trimplate or adapter. The aesthetic appearance shall not have any mounting holes or screw heads visible when the installation is completed. The appliance shall be finished in a textured red color. The audible device may be installed indoors or outdoors with the proper backbox. For weatherproof applications where specifications require 75 cd at -31°F (-35°C) and full temperature range of -31°F to 150°F, the Fenwal Model MTWP-2475W FR shall be used. ORDERING INFORMATION Model Number Part Number Input Rated Strobe Mounting Voltage Candela Label Options MT-12/24-R 75-000010-001 12/24 - - B,H,J,K 15 MT-241575W-FR 75-000015-001 24 (75 FIRE B,H,l,J,K on AXE) - 15 MT-241575W-AR 75-000015-002 24 (75 AGENT B,H,I,J,K on AXIS) MT-24MCW-FR 75-000018-001 24 15/30/75/ FIRE B,H,J,K 110 MT-24MCW-AR 75-000018-002 24 15/30/75/ AGENT B,H,I,J,K 110 180 @ MT\NP-2475W-FR 75-000017-001 24 77F FIRE H (25C) Notes: MT-12/24 Audible can be used with Fenwal's RSSP Multi-Candela for applications requiring 15, 30, 75, 110 cd Wall Strobes. MTWP-2475W is weatherproof and rated for 180 cd @ 77°F (25°C) and 75 cd @ -31°F (-35°C) with low current draw. SM Sync Modules are rated for 3.0 amperes at 12! 24 Vdc; DSM Dual Circuit Modules are rated for 3.0 amperes per circuit. Maximum number of intercon- nected DSM modules is twenty (20). Refer to Data Sheet 75-12. Use MT-241575W when 15 cd is specified. 15/75 is UL Listed for 15 cd with 75 cd on AXIS. MOUNTING OPTIONS Model Number Part Number Mounting Options DBB-R 75-000000-009 A ISP-R 75-000000-002 B WBB-R 75-000000-008 E IOB-R 75-000000-001 H RP-R 75-000000-003 J For complete installation options, refer to the Alarm Sig- nals Installation Data Sheet 75-008.A. Fenwal is a registered trademark of Kidde-Fenwal, Inc. Lexan is a registered trademark of the General Electric Company This literature is provided for informational purposes only. KIDDE-FENWAL, INC. I RIFENWAL assumes no responsibility for the product's suitability for a particular application. The I product must be properly applied to work correctly. I Protection Systems If you need more information on this product, or if you have a particular problem or ques- A UTC Fire & Security Company ton, contact KIDDE-FENWAL, INC., Ashland, MA 01721. Telephone: (508) 881-2000. 400 Main Street Ashland, MA 01721 Ph: 508.881.2000 F-75-001 RevAB © 2007 Kidde-Fenwal Inc. Printed in USA Fax: 508.881.8920 www.fenwalfire.com SERIES MB MOTOR BELLS FEATURES Approvals include: UL, FM, CSFM, MEA 6-inch and 10-inch shell sizes, 24 Vdc models Mounting options for surface, semi-flush, outdoor, and concealed conduit installation Screw terminals permit fast in-out field wiring of 12 to 18 AWG wire Red textured finish to improve appearance and durability DESCRIPTION Fenwal Series MB Motor Bells provide a superior engi- neered motor bell for fire and life safety alarm systems. The Series MB offers higher dBA, low current draw; built- in trimplate for semi-flush mounting, low frequency alumi- num shells for better audibility, low RFI noise and high torque. A permanent magnet motor is incorporated for durable, reliable performance. ORDERING INFORMATION Model Number Part Number Input Voltage I Shell Size l I dBA @ I I lOft I Current I (Amps) I B-GJ 75000030001 I 24 6 inch 92 iB-G10-24-R 75-000030-002 24 10 inch 92 .030 MOUNTING OPTIONS Model Number Part Number Mounting Options SFP-R 75-000000-005 F BB-R 75-000000-006 C AP-R 75-000000-007 C WBB-R 75-000000-008 E F. SEMI-FLUSH C. SURFACE G CONCEALED CONDUIT COO AP E. OUTDOOR Note: Refer to Data Sheet 75-008.A for mounting hard- ware dimensions. Fenwal is a registered trademark of Kidde-Fenwal Inc This literature is provided for informational purposes only. KIDDE-FENWAL, INC. I RIFENWAL i assumes no responsibility for the product's suitability for a particular application. The prod- I uct must be properly applied to work correctly. I Protection Systems If you need more information on this product, or if you have a particular problem or ques- I A UTC Fire & Security Company lion, contact KIDDE-FENWAL, INC., Ashland, MA 01721. Telephone: (508) 881-2000. 400 Main Street Ashland, MA 01721 F-75-003 Rev AB © 2007 Kidde-Fenwal Inc. Printed in USA Ph: 508.8812000 Fare 508.881.8920 wwwfenwalfire,corn (E)POTTER The Symbol of Protection Patent Pending Ordering Information Model Description PS10-1 Pressure switch with one set SPDT contacts PS 10-2 Pressure switch with two sets SPDT contacts Hex Key 5250062 Cover Tamper Switch Kit 0090200 Tamper Cover incorporates tamper resistant fastener that requires a special key for removal. One key is supplied with each device. For optional cover tamper switch kit, order Stock No. 0090200. See bulletin #5401200 PSCTSK. Installation The Potter PS10 Series Pressure Actuated Switches are designed for the detection of a waterfiow condition in automatic fire sprinkler systems of particular designs such as wet pipe systems with alarm check valves, dry pipe, preaction, or deluge valves. The PSI is also suitable to provide a low pressure supervisory signal; adjustable between 4 and 15 psi (0,27 and 1,03 BAR). Apply Teflon tape to the threaded male connection on the device. (Do not use pipe dope) Device should be mounted in the upright position (threaded connection do). Tighten the device using a wrench on the flats on the device. Wiring Instructions Remove the tamper resistant screw with the special key provided. Carefully place a screwdriver on the edge of the knockout and sharply apply a force sufficient to dislodge the knockout plug. See Fig 9 Run wires through an approved conduit connector and affix the connector to the device. Connect the wires to the appropriate terminal connections for the service intended. See Figures 2,4,5, and 6. See Fig 7 for two switch, one conduit wiring. Testing The operation of the pressure alarm switch should be tested upon completion of installation and periodically thereafter in accordance with the applicable NFPA codes and standards and/or the authority having jurisdiction (manufacturer recommends quarterly or more frequently). Wet System Method 1: When using PS10 and control unit with retard - connect PS 10 PS10 SERIES PRESSURE SWITCH (UL, cUL, and CSFM Listed, FM and LPC Approved, NYMEA Accepted, CE Marked Pending) Dimensions: 3.78 (9,6cm)W x 3.20" (8,lcm)D x 4.22" (10,7cm)H Conduit Entrance: Two knockouts provided for 1/2" conduit. Individual switch compartments and ground screws suitable for dissimilar voltages. Enclosure: Cover - Die-cast with textured red powdercoat finish, single cover screw and rain lip. Base - Die-cast Automatic Sprinkler NFPA-13 One or two family dwelling NFPA-13D Residential Occupancy up to four stories NFPA-13R National Fire Alarm Code NFPA-72 into alarm port piping on the input side of retard chamber and electrically connect PS 10 to control unit that provides a retard to compensate for surges. Insure that no unsupervised shut-off valves are present between the alarm check valve and PSI 0. Method 2: When using the PS10 for local bell application or with a control that does not provide a retard feature -the PSI 0 must be installed on the alarm outlet side of the retard chamber of the sprinkler system. Testing: Accomplished by opening the inspector's end-of-line test valve. Allow time to compensate for system or control retard. Note: Method 2 is not applicable for remote station service use, if there is an unsupervised shut-off valve between the alarm check valve and the PS 10. Wet System With Excess Pressure Connect PS1O into alarm port piping extending from alarm check valve. Retard provisions are not required. Insure that no unsupervised shut-off valves are present between the alarm check valve and the PS 10. Testing: Accomplished by opening the water by-pass test valve or the inspector's end-of-line test valve. When using end-of-line test, allow time for excess pressure to bleed off. Dry System Connect PS10 into alarm port piping that extends from the intermediate chamber of the alarm check valve. Install on the outlet side of the in-line check valve of the alarm port piping. Insure that no unsupervised shut-off valves are present between the alarm check valve and the PS 10. Testing: Accomplished by opening the water by-pass test valve. Note: The above tests may also activate any other circuit closer or water motor gongs that are present on the system. Pressure Connection: Nylon 1/2" NPT Male Factory Adjustment: 4 -8 PSI (0,27 - 0,55 BAR) Differential: 2 PSI (0,13 BAR) typical Maximum System Pressure: 300 PSI (20,68 BAR) Switch Contacts: SPDT (Form C) 10.1 Amps at 125/250VAC, 2.0 Amps at 30VDC One SPDT in PS10-1, Two SPDT in PS10-2 Stock No. Environmental Specifications: 1340103 NEMA 411P55 Rated Enclosure - indoor or outdoor when used with NEMA 4 conduit fittings. 1340104 Temperature range: -40°F to 140°F (-40°C to 60°C) Service Use: Potter Electric Signal Company, LLC • St. Louis, MO • Phone: 866-956-0988/Canada 888-882-1833 www.pottersignal.com PRINTED IN USA MFG. #5400928 - REV D PAGE 1 OF 3 1/08 Low Pressure Signal Connection Fig. 4 TO FIRE ALARM PANEL I own, 928-I (E . ).POTTER The SjmboI of Protection Dimensions Fig. 1 GROUND SCREWS 2.87 I ADJUSTMENT [72.97] I KNOB t I 4.22 1/2" NPT 2.48 [107.19] I 3.78 U 1.60 [62.87] [40.64] 3.20 [95.89] [81.28] NOTE: To prevent leakage, apply Teflon tape sealant to male threads only. DWO# 930-I PS10 SERIES PRESSURE SWITCH Switch Clamping Plate Terminal Fig. 2 - cC0 DWGO 923-3 An uninsulated section of a single conductor should not be looped around the terminal and serve as two separate connections. The wire must be severed, thereby providing supervision of the connection in the event that the wire becomes dislodged from under the terminal. Typical Sprinkler Applications Fig.3 WET SYSTEM WITH WET SYSTEM WITHOUT DRY SYSTEM EXCESS PRESSURE EXCESS PRESSURE Ps10 WATER PS'S PS'S WATER MOTOR MOTOR MOTOR GONG GONG GONG REVS CHECK WET RBVS DRY VALVE REVS SYSTEM WET SYSTEM ALARM SYSTEM ALARM CHECK ALARM CHECK VALVE CHECK RETA RD RETA VALVE WATER VALVE WATER WATER OS&Y BY-PASS OS&Y By OS&Y BY VALVE VALVE VALVE VALVE VALVE VALVE DWG. #923-25.'. A CAUTION Closing of any shutoff valves between the alarm check valve and the PS 10 will render the PS 10 inoperative. To comply with NFPA-72 any such valve shall be electrically supervised with a supervisory switch such as Potter Model RBVS. Waterfiow Signal Connection Fig. 5 TO FIRE ALARM PANEL / IE Local Bell For Waterfiow Connection Fig. 6 NEGATIVE DC OR NEUTRAL AS POSITIVE DI OR HOT AC PRINTED IN USA MFG. #5400928 - REV D PAGE 2 OF 3 1/08 (E)POTTER The Symbol of Protection One Conduit Wiring Fig. 7 Break out thin section of divider to provide path for wires when wiring both switches from one conduit entrance. Switch Operation Fig. 8 Terminal wi paxssuax APPLIED C: Common NC Closed when installed under normal system C pressure. Open when installed H under normal system pressure. Closes on pressure drop. Use for low pressure supervision. -------------------------------- Terminal W/O PRESSURE APPLIED Open with no pressure NC supplied. Closes upon detection of pressure. Use for waterfiow ri indication. Closed with no C I 2 pressure applied. DWG#925-6 PS10 SERIES PRESSURE SWITCH Removing Knockouts Fig. 9 Id TV JflJL2lS A WAR IG -Installation must be performed by qualified personnel and in accordance with all national and local codes and ordinances. -Shock hazard. Disconnect power source before servicing. Serious injury or death could result. -Read all instructions carefully and understand them before starting installation. Save instructions for future use. Failure to read and understand instructions could result in improper operation of device resulting in serious injury or death. -Risk of explosion. Not for use is hazardous locations. Serious injury or death could result. Engineer/Architect Specifications Pressure Type Waterfiow Switch Pressure type waterfiow switches; shall be a Model PSI as manufactured by Potter Electric Signal Company, St Louis MO., and shall be installed on the fire sprinkler system as shown and or specified herein. Switches shall be provided with a ½" NPT male pressure connection and shall be connected to the alarm port outlet of; Wet Pipe Alarm Valves, Dry Pipe Valves, Pre-Action Valves, or Deluge Valves. The pressure switch shall be actuated when the alarm line pressure reaches 4-8 PSI (0,27 - 0,55 BAR). Pressure type waterfiow switches shall have a maximum service pressure rating of 300 PSI (20,68 BAR) and shall be factory adjusted to operate on a pressure increase of 4 - 8 PSI (0,27 - 0,55 BAR) -Do not tighten by grasping the switch enclosure. Use wrenching fiats on the bushing only. Failure to install properly could damage the switch and cause improper operation resulting in damage to equipment and property. -To seal threads, apply Teflon tape to male threads only. Using joint compounds or cement can obstruct the pressure port inlet and result in improper device operation and damage to equipment. -Do not over tighten the device, standard piping practices apply. Pressure switch shall have one or two form C contacts, switch contact rating 10.1 Amps at 125/250 VAC, 2.0 Amps at 30 VDC. Pressure type waterfiow switches shall have two conduit entrances one for each individual switch compartment to facilitate the use of dissimilar voltages for each individual switch. The cover of the pressure type waterfiow switch shall be Zinc die-cast with rain lip and shall attach with one tamper resistant screw. The Pressure type waterfiow switch shall be suitable for indoor or outdoor service with a NEMA 4/IP55 rating. The pressure type waterfiow switch shall be UL Ulc and CSFM listed, FM and LPC approved and NYIVIEA accepted. PRINTED IN USA MFG. 95400928 - REV D PAGE 3 OF 3 1/08 (2.)POTTER The Symbol of Protection Ordering Information Model Description Stock No. PS40-1 Pressure switch with one set SPDT contacts 1340403 PS40-2 Pressure switch with two sets SPDT contacts 1340404 Hex Key 5250062 Cover Tamper Switch Kit 0090200 BVL Bleeder valve 1000018 Installation The Potter PS40 Series Pressure Actuated Switches are designed primarily to detect an increase and/or decrease from normal system pressure in automatic fire sprinkler systems. Typical applications are: Dry pipe system, pre-action air/nitrogen supervision, pressure tanks, air supplies, and water supplies. The PS40 switch is factory set for 40 PSI (2,8 BAR) normal system pressure. The switch marked with the word LOW is set to operate at a pressure decrease of 10 PSI (,7 BAR) at 30 PSI (2,1 BAR). The switch marked with the word HIGH is set to operate at a pressure increase of 10 PSI (,7 BAR) at 50 PSI (3,5 BAR). See section heading Adjustments and Testing if other than factory set point is required. Connect the PS40 to the system side of any shutoff or check valve. Apply Teflon tape to the threaded male connection on the device. (Do not use pipe dope) Device should be mounted in the upright position. (Threaded connection down) Tighten the device using a wrench on the flats on the device. Wiring Instructions Remove the tamper resistant screw with the special key provided. Carefully place a screwdriver on the edge of the knockout and sharply apply a force sufficient to dislodge the knockout plug. See Fig. 9 Run wires through an approved conduit connector and affix the connector to the device. A NEMA-4 rated conduit fitting is required for outdoor use. PS40 SERIES PRESSURE SWITCH (UL, cUL, and CSFM Listed, FM and LPC Approved, NYMEA Accepted, CE Marked Pending) Dimensions: 3.78' (9,6cm)W x 3.20" (8,lcm)D x 4.22" (10,7cm)H Conduit Entrance: Two knockouts provided for 1/2' conduit. Individual switch compartments and ground screw suitable for dissimilar voltages Enclosure: Cover- Die-cast with textured red powdercoat finish, single cover screw and rain lip. Base- Die-cast Pressure Connection: Nylon 1/2" NPT male Factory Adjustment: PS40- 1 operates on decrease at 30 PSI (2,1 BAR) PS40-2 operates in increase at 50 PSI (3,5 BAR) and on decrease at 30 PSI (2,1 BAR) Pressure Range: 10-60 PSI (,7 - 4,1 BAR) Differential: Typical 1 lb. at 10 PSI (,07 at ,7 BAR) 4 lbs at 60 PSI (,28 at 4,1 BAR) Maximum System Pressure: 300 PSI (20,68 BAR) Switch Contacts: SPDT (Form C) 10.1 Amps at 125/250VAC, 2.0 Amps at 30VDC One SPDT in PS40-1, Two SPDT in PS40-2 Environmental Specifications: NEMA 4/IP55 Rated Enclosure - indoor or outdoor when used with NEMA 4 conduit fittings. Temperature range: -40°F to 140°F (-40°C to 60°C). Tamper: Cover incorporates tamper resistant fastener that requires a special key for removal. One key is supplied with each device. For optional cover tamper switch kit, order Stock No. 0090200. See bulletin #5401200 PSCTSK. Service Use: Automatic Sprinkler NFPA-13 One or two family dwelling NFPA-13D Residential Occupancy up to four stories NFPA-13R National Fire Alarm Code NFPA-72 Connect the wires to the appropriate terminal connections for the service intended. See Figures 2,4,5,6, and 8 Adjustment And Testing The operation of the pressure supervisory switch should be tested upon completion of installation and periodically thereafter in accordance with the applicable NFPA codes and standards and/or the authority having jurisdiction (manufacturer recommends quarterly or more frequently). Note: Testing the PS40 may activate other system connected devices. The use of a Potter BVL (see product bulletin 8900067 for details) is recommended to facilitate setting and testing of the PS40 pressure switch. When a BVL (bleeder valve) is used, the pressure to the switch can be isolated and bled from the exhaust port on the BVL without effecting the supervisory pressure of the entire system. See Fig. 3 The operation point of the PS40 Pressure Switch can be adjusted to any point between 10 and 60 PSI (0,7 - 4,11 BAR) by turning the adjustment knob(s) clockwise to raise the actuation point and counter clockwise to lower the actuation point. In the case of the PS40-2, both switches operate independent of each other. Each switch may be independently adjusted to actuate at any point acrosss the switch adjustment range. Initial adjustment can be made with a visual reference from the top of the adjustment knob across to the printed scale on the switch bracket. Final adjustments should be verified with a pressure gauge. Potter Electric Signal Company, LLC • St. Louis, MO • Phone: 866-956-0988/Canada 888-882-1833 • www.pottersignal.com PRINTED IN USA MFG. #5400930 - REV D PAGE 1 OF 3 1/08 PS4O-2 TO F ALA PAN Typical Connections Fig.4 WITH NORMAL SYSTEM PRES- PS40-I SURE APPLIED LOW -TERMINAL 2 CLOSES ON PRESSURE DROP. TO FIRE ALARM PANEL HIGH AIR LOW WITH NORMAL SYSTEM AIR PRESSURE APPLIED HIGH - TERMINAL 1 WILL CLOSE ON PRESSURE INCREASE. (E)POTTER The Symbol of Protection Dimensions Fig. 1 GROUND 2.17 1 SCREWS ADJUSTMENT _.Lll1I [72.97] KNOB [107 12 .19] I I/2" NT [] 2.48 1.60 3.78 3.20 [95.893 [81.281 NOTE To p9'.'oot leakage, apply Teflon tape 300!oot to muk thread' ooly. DWO# 930-I Typical Sprinkler Applications Fig. 3 P540 AIR LINE - SHUT-OFF VALVE BLEEDER ALARM TEST I PRESSURE CHECK ' VALVE SWITCH BVL j CHECK RBVS DRY PIPE VALVE VALVE WATER DWG. 2IA OS&Y BY-PASS VALVE 'i.' TEST VALVE WATER MOTOR GONG PS40 SERIES PRESSURE SWITCH Switch Clamping Plate Terminal Fig.2 C0 cP' OWG# 923-3 o" AWARNING An uninsulated section of a single conductor should not be looped around the terminal and serve as two separate connections. The wire must be severed, thereby providing supervision of the connection in the event that the wire becomes dislodged from under the terminal. A CAUTION Closing of any shutoff valves between the alarm check valve and the PS 10 will render the PSI inoperative. To comply with NFPA- 72 any such valve shall be electrically supervised with a supervisory switch such as Potter Model RBVS. DWG# 930-2 PRINTED IN USA MFG. #5400930 - REV D PAGE 2 OF 3 1/08 High Pressure Signal Connection Fig. 6 TO FIRE ALARM PANEL EOLR One Conduit Wiring Fig. 7 Break out thin section of divider to provide path for wires when wiring both switches from one conduit entrance. Removing Knockouts Fig. 9 12 r (E)POTTER The Symbol of Protection PS40 SERIES PRESSURE SWITCH Low Pressure Signal Connection Fig. 5 TO FIRE ALARM PANEL EOLR Changing Pressure (With normal system pressure) Fig. 8 Terminal LOW PRESSURE SWITCH C: Common NC I: Closed when installed under normal system pressure. 2: Open when installed under normal system pressure. Closes on C 2 pressure drop. Use for low air signal. ------------------------------- Terminal HIGH PRESSURE SWITCH Open when installed NC under normal system C pressure. Closes on increase in pressure. Use for high air signal. Closed under normal C I 2 system pressure. DWG# 930-3 Engineer/Architect Specifications Pressure Type Waterfiow Switch Pressure type supervisory switches; shall be a Model PS40 as manufactured by Potter Electric Signal Company, St. Louis, MO., and shall be installed on the fire sprinkler system as shown and or specified herein. Switches shall be provided with a 1/2" NPT male pressure connection to be connected into the air supply line on the system side of any shut-off valve. A Model BVL bleeder valve as supplied by Potter Electric Signal Company of St. Louis, MO., or equivalent shall be connected in line with the PS40 to provide a means of testing the operation of the supervisory switch. (See Fig. 3) The switch unit shall contain SPDT (Form C) switch(es). One switch shall be set to operate at a pressure decrease of 10 PSI (0,7 BAR) from normal. If two switches are provided, the second switch shall be set to operate at a pressure increase of 10 PSI (0,7 BAR) from normal. Switch contacts shall be rated at 10.1 Amps at 1251250VAC and 2.0 Amps at 30VDC. The units shall have a maximum pressure rating of 300 PSI (20,68 BAR) and shall be adjustable from 10 to 60 PSI (0,7 to 4,1 BAR). Pressure switches shall have two conduit entrances, one for each individual switch compartment to facilitate the use of dissimilar voltages for each individual switch. The cover of the pressure switch shall be zinc die-cast with rain lip and shall attach with one tamper resistant screw. The pressure switch shall be suitable for indoor or outdoor service with a NEMA-4055 rating. The pressure switch shall be UL, ULC, and CSFM listed, FM and LPC approved and NYMEA accepted. -Installation must be performed by qualified personnel and in accordance with all national and local codes and ordinances. -Shock hazard. Disconnect power source before servicing. Serious injury or death could result. -Read all instructions carefully and understand them before starting installation. Save instructions for future use. Failure to rend and understand instructions could result in improper operation of device resulting in serious injury or death. -Risk of explosion. Not for use is hazardous locations. Serious injury or death could result. I &CAUTION I -Do not tighten by grasping the switch enclosure. Use wrenching flats on the bushing only. Failure to install properly could damage the switch and cause improper operation resulting in damage to equipment and property. -To seal threads, apply Teflon tape to male threads only. Using joint compounds or cement can obstruct the pressure port inlet and result in improper device operation and damage to equipment. -Do not over tighten the device, standard piping practices apply. PRINTED IN USA MFG. g5400930 - REV D PAGE 3 OF 3 1/08 CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF FORESTRY & FIRE PROTECTION .... OFFICE OF THE STATE FIRE MARSHAL FIRE ENGINEERING - BUILDING MATERIALS LISTING PROGRAM LISTING SERVICE LISTING No. 7165-0328:0170 Page 1 of I CATEGORY: 7165 - FIRE ALARM CONTROL UNIT (COMMERCIAL) LISTEE: Potter Electric Signal Co1609 Park 370 Place, Hazelwood, MO 63042 Contact: Bill Witherspoon (314) 595-6900 Fax (314) 595-6999 Email: BillWpottersignal.com DESIGN: Model PFC-4410RC and PFC-4410ARC fire alarm control units. Automatic, manual, noncoded, local, remote station, central station, releasing device, waterfiow and sprinkler supervisory service. Refer to listee's data sheet for additional detailed product description and operational considerations. Minimum system components: PFC-4410RC Control Unit PFC-4410ARC Control Unit with LED annunciator Suitable for use with the following modules: RA-4410RC, CA2Z, CAM, ARM-I, ARM-2, *ARM.44 and SG-32. INSTALLATION: In accordance with listee's printed installation instructions, applicable codes & ordinances and in a manner acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. MARKING: Listees name, model number, electrical rating and UL label. APPROVAL: Listed as fire alarm control units when use with separately listed electrically and functionally compatible initiating and indicating devices. Suitable for high-rise applications when used with separately listed voice evacuation systems. Refer to listee's Installation Instruction Manual for details. These control units do not generate a Temporal Pattern Signal. If the distinctive three-pulse Fire Alarm Evacuation Signal (for total evacuation) in accordance with NFPA 72, 2002 Edition is required, the control unit must be used with appliances that can generate the temporal pattern signal. Model PFC-4410RC control unit meets the requirements of UL Standard 864, 9th edition. Model PFC-44I0ARC control unit meets the requirements of UL Standard 864, 8th edition. NOTE: Combined with 7170-0328:171 *Rev 06-18-10 fm This listing is based upon technical data submitted by the applicant. CSFM Fire Engineering staff has reviewed the test results and/or other data but does not make an independent verification of any claims. This listing is not an endorsement or recommendation of the item listed. This listing should not be used to verify correct operational requirements or installation criteria. Refer to listee's data sheet, installation instructions and/or other Date Issued: July 01, 2012 Listing Expires June 3O,2013 Authorized By: JASON DEWITT, Deputy State Fire Marshal Fire Engineering Division CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF FORESTRY & FIRE PROTECTION OFFICE OF THE STATE FIRE MARSHAL r1iifl7 FIRE ENGINEERING - BUILDING MATERIALS LISTING PROGRAM LISTING SERVICE LISTING No. 7272-0410:0107 Page 1 of I CATEGORY: 7272 -- SMOKE DETECTOR-SYSTEM TYPE-PHOTOELECTRIC LISTEE: Hochiki America Corporation7051 Village Drive, Suite 100, Buena Park, CA 90621-2268 Contact: Michael Urn (714) 670-3248 Fax (714) 522-2268 Email: mum@hochiki.com DESIGN: Models SLG-12, SLG-24, SLG-24FH, SLG-24F, SLK-12, SLK-24F, SLK-24FH, SLK-24FB, SLK-24FL, SLK-24FLB, SLK-835, SLK-835H, SLR-835, SLR-835W, SLR-835B-2, SLR-835B-4, SLR-835B-2W, SLR-835B-4W, SLR-24, SLR-24H, SLR-24V, *SLR24vN SLR-835H, SLR-835HW, SLR-835BH-2, SLR-835BH-2W, SLR-835BH-4, SLR-835BH-4W photoelectric type smoke detectors. Unit with suffix -H or -FH employs a supplemental heat sensor. Refer to listee's data sheet for additional detailed product description and operational considerations. RATING: 12 VDC and 24 VDC INSTALLATION: In accordance with listee's printed installation instructions, applicable codes & ordinances and in a manner acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. MARKING: Listees name, model designation, electrical rating and UL label. APPROVAL: Listed as photoelectric smoke detectors for use with separately listed compatible fire alarm control units when used in conjunction with listee's listed bases (CSFM Listing No. 7300-0410:132). Models with supplemental heat sensor are not approved for use in lieu of required heat detectors. NOTE: Formerly 7257-0410:107 *Rev 2-14-2003 IPI This listing is based upon technical data submitted by the applicant. CSFM Fire Engineering staff has reviewed the test results and/or other data but does not make an independent verification of any claims. This listing is not an endorsement or recommendation of the item listed. This listing should not be used to verify correct operational requirements or installation criteria. Refer to listee's data sheet, installation instructions and/or other Date Issued: July 01, 2012 Listing Expires June 30, 2013 Authorized By: JASON DEWITT, Deputy State Fire Marshal Fire Engineering Division CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF FORESTRY & FIRE PROTECTION OFFICE OF THE STATE FIRE MARSHAL FIRE ENGINEERING - BUILDING MATERIALS LISTING PROGRAM LISTING SERVICE LISTING No. 7270-1657:0109 Page 1 of 1 CATEGORY: 7270 -- HEAT DETECTOR LISTEE: EDWARDS, A Division of UTC Fire & Security Americas Corporation, lnc.8985 Town Center Parkway, Brandenton, FL 34202 Contact: Jewell Micochero (941) 739-4358 Fax (941) 308-8123 Email: rhonda.micochero@fs.utc.com DESIGN: Models 281A, 281B, 281 AM, 281 AR, 281 AL, 281 AF, 282A, 28213, 282AM, 282AR, 282AL, 282AF, 291 B and 292B combination fixed temperature/rate-of-rise heat detectors; Models 283A, 28313, 283AM, 283AR, 283AL, 283AF, 284A, 28413, 284AM, 284AR, 284AL, 284AF, 29313, 29413, 445, 446, 6290B-281 and 6290B-283 fixed temperature heat detectors. Models may have suffix -F or -PL. Refer to listee's data sheet for detailed product description and operational considerations. RATING: 281,283, 291, 293,445, 6290B-281/283: 135oF 282, 284, 292, 294, 446; 194oF INSTALLATION: In accordance with listee's printed installation instructions, applicable codes & ordinances and in a manner acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. MARKING: Listees name, model number, temperature/electrical ratings and UL label. APPROVAL: Listed as fixed temperature and/or combination fixed temperature/rate-of-rise system heat detectors for use with separately listed compatible bases and fire alarm control units. NOTE: Formerly 7270-1591:109, 7270-1388:113 and 7270-0073:039 7-29-10 ma This listing is based upon technical data submitted by the applicant. CSFM Fire Engineering staff has reviewed the test results and/or other data but does not make an independent verification of any claims. This listing is not an endorsement or recommendation of the item listed. This listing should not be used to verify correct operational requirements or installation criteria. Refer to listee's data sheet, installation instructions and/or other Date Issued: July 01, 2012 Listing Expires June 30, 2013 Authorized By: JASON DEWI1T, Deputy State Fire Marshal Fire Engineering Division CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF FORESTRY & FIRE PROTECTION .... OFFICE OF THE STATE FIRE MARSHAL FIRE ENGINEERING - BUILDING MATERIALS LISTING PROGRAM LISTING SERVICE LISTING No. 7135-0785:0118 Page 1 of 1 CATEGORY: 7135 —AUDIBLE DEVICES LISTEE: Cooper Wheelock Inc.7246 16th St. E., Ste. 105, Sarasota, FL 34243 Contact: Tom Conover (941) 487-2336 Email: thomas.conover@cooperindustries.com DESIGN: Model MT-12/24, MT-115 and MT4-12/24, and MT4-115 multi-tone audible devices followed by R, W, 5, or X to indicate package color. Models MT-12, MT4-12, MT-24, MT4-24 multi-tone audible/strobe signals followed by A, B, G, R orWto indicate lens color, followed by S (15 cd), H (15 cd) or M (117 cd)to indicate strobe intensity, and other suffixes to designate orientation, lens lettering and plate color. Models MT-115-WH and MT4-115-WH multi-tone audible/visual devices (Rated 15 cd). Refer to listee's data sheet for additional detailed product description and operational considerations. RATING: Suffix -12: *8175\JDC -24: *1633 VDC -115: 120 VAC INSTALLATION: In accordance with listee's printed installation instructions, NFPA 72, applicable codes and ordinances and in a manner acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. Models MT series are surface mount and suitable for outdoor with Model lOB back box. Models MT4 series are flush mount and suitable for outdoor with model WBB back box. MARKING: Listee's name, model number, electrical/candela rating and UL label. APPROVAL: Listed as audible and audible/visual signaling devices for use with separately listed electrically compatible fire alarm control units. Not suitable for the hearing impaired application. These appliances can produce a distinctive three- pulse Temporal Pattern Fire Alarm Evacuation Signal (for total evacuation) in accordance with NFPA 72, 2002 Edition. Refer to manufacturer's Installation Manual for details. NOTE: *Rev. 06-13-2006 This listing is based upon technical data submitted by the applicant. CSFM Fire Engineering staff has reviewed the test results and/or other data but does not make an independent verification of any claims. This listing is not an endorsement or recommendation of the item listed. This listing should not be used to verify correct operational requirements or installation criteria. Refer to listee's data sheet, installation instructions and/or other Date Issued: July 01, 2012 Listing Expires June 30, 2013 Authorized By: JASON DEWIIT, Deputy State Fire Marsha! Fire Engineering Division CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF FORESTRY & FIRE PROTECTION OFFICE OF THE STATE FIRE MARSHAL FIRE ENGINEERING - BUILDING MATERIALS LISTING PROGRAM LISTING SERVICE LISTING No. 7135-0785:0113 Page 1 of 1 CATEGORY: 7135—AUDIBLE DEVICES LISTEE: Cooper Wheelock Inc.7246 16th St. E., Ste. 105, Sarasota, FL 34243 Contact: Tom Conover (941) 487-2336 Email: thomas.conover@cooperindustries.com DESIGN: Model MB series bells and Model MBS series bell/strobes. Models MB are suitable for outdoor use when used with Model WBB backbox. Refer to listees data sheet for detailed product description and operational considerations. INSTALLATION: In accordance with listees printed installation instructions, NFPA 72, applicable codes and ordinances and in a manner acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. MARKING: Listee's name, model number, electrical rating and UL label. APPROVAL: Listed as audible devices for use with separately listed compatible fire alarm control units. If this appliance is required to produce a distinctive three-pulse Temporal Pattern Fire Alarm Evacuation Signal (for total evacuation) in accordance with NFPA 72, 2002 Edition, the appliance must be used with a fire alarm control unit that can generate the temporal pattern signal. Refer to manufacturer's Installation Manual for details. *Rev. 06-13-2006 TI This listing is based upon technical data submitted by the applicant. CSFM Fire Engineering staff has reviewed the test results and/or other data but does not make an independent verification of any claims. This listing is not an endorsement or recommendation of the item listed. This listing should not be used to verify correct operational requirements or installation criteria. Refer to listee's data sheet, installation instructions and/or other Date Issued: July 01, 2012 Listing Expires June 30, 2013 Authorized By: JASON DEWITT, Deputy State Fire Marshal Fire Engineering Division CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF FORESTRY & FIRE PROTECTION . 1. MMA OFFICE OF THE STATE FIRE MARSHAL FIRE ENGINEERING - BUILDING MATERIALS LISTING PROGRAM LISTING SERVICE LISTING No. 7770-0531:0113 Page 1 of 1 CATEGORY: 7770 - VALVES/SWiTCHES LISTEE: VICTAULIC490I Kesslersville Rd., Easton, PA 18040 Contact: Michael Erie (610) 923-3739 Fax (610) 923-3115 Email: merle@victaulic.com DESIGN: *Models 705 grooved-end type butterfly valves in sizes 2, 2-1/2", 3", 4", 5", 6", 8", 10" and 12". *Models 707C grooved-end type butterfly valves in sizes 2, 2-1/2", 3", 4", 5", 6", 8", 10" and 12". *Models 765 grooved-end type butterfly valves in sizes 2, 2-1/2", 3", 4", 5", 6", 8", 10" and 12'. *Models 766 grooved-end type butterfly valves in sizes 2, 2-1/2", 3", 4', 5", 6", 8", 10" and 12". For above ground and indoor/outdoor use only. Refer to listee's data sheet for detailed product description and operational considerations. RATING: *Models 705: 300 psi *Models 707C : 300 psi *Models 765: 365 psi *Models 766: 365 psi INSTALLATION: In accordance with listee's printed installation instructions, applicable codes .& ordinances and in a manner acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. MARKING: Listee's name, model number, UL label. APPROVAL: Listed as above ground water control butterfly valves for fire protection service. *Rev 0126 11 bh This listing is based upon technical data submitted by the applicant. CSFM Fire Engineering staff has reviewed the test results and/or other data but does not make an independent verification of any claims. This listing is not an endorsement or recommendation of the item listed. This listing should not be used to verify correct operational requirements or installation criteria. Refer to listee's data sheet, installation instructions and/or other Date Issued: July 01, 2012 Listing Expires June 30, 2013 Authorized By: JASON DEWITT, Deputy State Fire Marshal Fire Engineering Division CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF FORESTRY & FIRE PROTECTION OFFICE OF THE STATE FIRE MARSHAL FIRE ENGINEERING - BUILDING MATERIALS LISTING PROGRAM LISTING SERVICE LISTING No. 7770-0328:0010 Page 1 of 1 CATEGORY: 7770 -- VALVES/SWITCHES LISTEE: Potter Electric Signal Co1609 Park 370 Place, Hazelwood, MO 63042 Contact: Bill Witherspoon (314) 595-6900 Fax (314) 595-6999 Email: BillWpottersignal.com DESIGN: Supervisory switches listed below to monitor pressure, OS&Y, gate, globe/gate, Ply, tank temperature or water level valves. Refer to listees data sheet for detailed product description and operational considerations. HLS-B WLS-W PS-120A OSYSU-2 PTS-B OSYSU-1 PIVS-B US-S WLS PTS-C *RBVS WLS-S PS-40A OSYS-B PMS GVS PCVS-1 US-W PCVS-2 PS4O PS12O RATING: INSTALLATION: n accordance with listees printed instructions, applicable codes and ordinances and in a manner acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. MARKING: Listee's name, model designation and FM or UL label. APPROVAL: Listed as sprinkler system supervisory switches. NOTE: Formerly 7738-0328:010 *Rev 5-17-2007jw This listing is based upon technical data submitted by the applicant. CSFM Fire Engineering staff has reviewed the test results and/or other data but does not make an independent verification of any claims. This listing is not an endorsement or recommendation of the item listed. This listing should not be used to verify correct operational requirements or installation criteria. Refer to listee's data sheet, installation instructions and/or other Date Issued: July 01, 2012 Listing Expires June 30, 2013 Authorized By: JASON DEWITT, Deputy State Fire Marshal Fire Engineering Division CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF FORESTRY & FIRE PROTECTION OFFICE OF THE STATE FIRE MARSHAL FIRE ENGINEERING - BUILDING MATERIALS LISTING PROGRAM LISTING SERVICE LISTING No. 7770-0328:0001 Page 1 of 1 CATEGORY: 7770 - VALVES/SWiTCHES LISTEE: Potter Electric Signal Co1609 Park 370 Place, Hazelwood, MO 63042 Contact: Bill Witherspoon (314) 595-6900 Fax (314) 595-6999 Email: BillWpottersignaLcom DESIGN: Vane and pressure type water flow alarm switches listed below. Refer to listee's data sheet for detailed product description and operational considerations. Vane Types: VSR-CF VSR-D VSR-F VSR-SF VSR-FE-2 VS-SP VS-F VSR-SFG VSR-SFT VSG VSR VSR-S VSR-C VSR-ST VSR-SG Pressure Type: WFS-B WFSR-C WFSPD-B PSIO PS-1 OA PS-bOA WFSR-F PS100 INSTALLATION: In accordance with listee's printed installation instructions, applicable codes and ordinances and in a manner acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. MARKING: Listees name, model number and UL or FM label. APPROVAL: Listed as waterflow alarm switches for use with fire sprinkler systems. Vane models may be used in wet pipe systems; pressure models may be used in wet or dry systems. Model VSR-CF is for use on K, L or M copper pipe (2", 2-1/2", 3", 4") and listed CPVC pipe (2", 2-1/2", 3"). Model VSR-SF for use on 1", 1-1/4", 1-1/2" and *2 steel, copper or listed plastic pipe. Model VSG is for low flow rate. Model VSR-SFG and VSR-SFT are for use on 1", 1-1/4", 1-1/2" and *2 plastic pipe. Models VS-F, VSR-F, VSR-FE and VSR-FE-2 is for use on 2", 2-1/2", 3", 3-1/2", 4", 5", 6", 8" and 10" pipe. *Model VSR is for use on steel pipe sizes from 2" through 8". Vane type switches may be used outdoors when the outdoor temperature never falls below 400F. Rev*5172007 1w This listing is based upon technical data submitted by the applicant. CSFM Fire Engineering staff has reviewed the test results and/or other data but does not make an independent verification of any claims. This listing is not an endorsement or recommendation of the item listed. This listing should not be used to verify correct ' operational requirements or installation criteria. Refer to listee's data sheet, installation instructions and/or other Date Issued: July 01, 2012 Listing Expires June 30, 2013 Authorized By: JASON DEWI1T, Deputy State Fire Marshal Fire Engineering Division